Catalog 40 Vol2 Metaro

Număr client:
Comenzi Online www.metaro.ro

Comenzi prin E-mail comanda@metaro.ro
Întotdeauna Comenzi prin Fax +4 0213.224.440
disponibili Consultanţă tehnică generală +4 0213.083.477

Experţi calificaţi vă pot îndruma de luni până vineri între orele 8.30 şi 17.30 pentru a alege de fiecare dată soluţia
pentru perfectă .
Consultanţă specială:
dumneavoastră! Prelucrări prin aşchiere şi tehnologii
de măsurare (pentru capitolele 1, 2, 3, 4, 01 şi 65) +4 0743.153.530
Serviciul de relaţii cu clienţii +4 0213.224.544
Call center E-Commerce +4 0740.153.598
Programul centrului de
prelucrare comenzi: de
luni până vineri între
orele 8.30 - 17.30
Metaro Industrial S.R.L.
Head office: BUCUREŞTI

Str. G.V. Bibescu, Nr. 20A
Sector 1
Tel: +4 0213 224 544
+4 0213 083 477
Fax: +4 0213 224 440
E-mail: office@metaro.ro
Web: www.metaro.ro
Centru Logistic: ARAD

Str. Poetului Nr. 1c,
Parc Industrial U.T.A.,
hala 57
Tel: +4 0357 800 943
Fax: +4 0357 800 944
Web: www.metaro.ro
www.metaro.ro
www.hoffmann-group.com
Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 2 25.05.2009 08:32:02

The
Quality
Un nou început! Company
Pe lângă toate efectele nefaste ale acestei crize, fără precedent sub aspectul generalităţii,
profunzimei şi vitezei sub care se consumă, actorii economiei globale au primit şi câteva
lecţii, care însuşite corect, vor genera evoluţii viitoare spectaculoase şi în cele din urmă
progres.
Legităţile simple dar totodată profunde ale economiei de piaţă au pus în mişcare un
sistem imunitar nemilos şi foarte selectiv care va filtra toate procesele economice dar şi
participanţii la relaţiile de afaceri.
În domeniul nostru de activitate, strâns legat de peisajul industrial local dar şi global, Aveţi întrebări sau
asistăm deasemenea la transformarea sistemelor de valori şi la schimbări de mentalităţi neclarităţi referi-
uneori dramatice dar categoric cu un important potenţial pozitiv. toare la produsele şi
Întoarcerea la valorile şi competenţele de bază ale fiecărei activităţi şi companii din indus- serviciile noastre?
trie va genera consolidarea unui mediu de afaceri sănătos, eficient şi curăţat de rutinele Contactaţi-ne la
specifice concurenţei neloiale şi ale risipei de resurse în domeniul achiziţiilor. adresa de E-mail:
Acum mai mult ca oricând, Metaro Industrial este corect evaluat şi apreciat de mediul marketing@metaro.ro
industrial ca un partener cu valori şi competenţe solide, pe care te poţi baza mai ales în
perioada când beneficiile aduse de un furnizor puternic şi bine pregătit tehnic sunt clar
vizibile şi perfect măsurabile.
Adaptarea la schimbarea şi puterea de a lua decizii rapide vor fi criteriile de selecţie pen-
tru viitori formatori de piaţă şi aducători de progres.
Inovaţia şi promovarea relaţiilor parteneriale bazate în egală măsură pe interacţiune
umană dar şi pe tehnologii moderne vor face diferenţa la acest nou început de drum.
Metaro va participa activ la aceste evoluţii cu toate resursele şi competenţele sale pe care
vă invit să le consultaţi în paginile următoare.
Ştefan Cobori
Managing Director
Metaro Hoffmann Group

Partener europe-
an pentru scule Bazaţi-vă pe partenerul Nr. 1 în Europa!
de calitate La dispoziţia dumneavoastră prin cea mai puternică reţea de

parteneri din Europa
Întotdeauna soluţia potrivită, în locul potrivit, la momentul potrivit
Know-how: GARANT Toolmanagement
Cel mai bun raport calitate-preţ
Peste 2.200 de angajaţi entuziaşti
Catalog actualizat anual

în 16 limbi nationale
40 000 de scule de calitate
Catalog principal cu scule din domeniile:
tehnicii de aşchiere, de fixare, de măsurare,
scule de mână, scule abrazive şi pentru
debitare, echipamente şi accesorii.
Betriebseinrichtungen
Catalog de echipamente şi mobilier industrial Europas führender Systempartner für Qualitätswerkzeuge

■
■
Werkstattwagen
Werkbänke
■
■
Arbeitsstühle
Steigtechnik und
pentru ateliere; bancuri de lucru, dulapuri,

Werkzeug- und Flügeltürschränke Regalsysteme
Hauptkatalog
■
■ Arbeitsstühle ■ Europas führender Systempartner für Qualitätswerkzeuge
NC-Lagersysteme
■ Zerspanungstechnik ■ Schleif- und Trenntechnik

Handwerkzeuge
tehnici de depozitare NC şi accesorii.

■ Spanntechnik ■
■ Messtechnik ■ Werkstattbedarf
Catalog separat disponibil atât tipărit cât şi

în format electronic.

Finlanda
Norvegia
Estonia
Suedia
Letonia
Danemarca
Lituania
Rusia
Irlanda Belarus
Polonia
Olanda
Marea Britanie
Germania
Belgia
Republica
Ceha
Luxemburg Ucraina
Slovacia
Austria
Franţa Ungaria Moldova
Elvetia Slovenia
Croatia România
Italia
Bosnia
Serbia
Bulgaria
Spania
Portugalia
Grecia
Partenerul dumneavoastră de încredere în Date de contact

ale partenerilor
Amenajarea atelierelor: Hoffmann Group in-
clusiv formularele de
570 de consultanţi de vânzări
comandă se găsesc
20 specialişti în amenajarea atelierelor în ultimile pagini ale
catalogului.
Staff intern de primă clasă şi departamente de consiliere online
Experienţă acumulată prin numeroase proiecte europene
One stop shopping pentru produse şi servicii de cea mai bună calitate
Cooperare exclusivă cu producătorii, clienţii şi asociaţiile tehnice
Cel mai bun raport calitate preţ
Specialiştii în amenajări oferă soluţii şi asigură consultaţă pentru dotarea atelierelor.

GARANT alternativa înţeleaptă
Calitate premium, funcţionalitate şi fiabilitate constante

Funcţionalitate şi ergonomie unică
Cel mai bun material şi cea mai bună calitate de prelucrare
Cel mai bun raport calitate-preţ
3.500 de produse pentru amenajarea atelierelor
Tehnică de vârf, datorită dezvoltării continue a produselor
Calitate premium
pentru cele mai
exigente cerinţe
ZERTIFIKATSERGÄNZUNG
ZERTIFIKAT
Die TÜV SÜD Management Service GmbH
VERBAND DER AUTOMOBILINDUSTRIE E.V. (VDA) / Z. Nr. 10/97
bescheinigt hiermit, dass das Unternehmen
Die Zertifizierungsstelle
der TÜV SÜD Management Service GmbH
bescheinigt, dass das Unternehmen
Hoffmann GmbH Qualitätswerkzeuge
Haberlandstraße 55
D-81241 München
Standort: D-81241 München

für den Geltungsbereich:
Entwicklung und Vertrieb von Qualitätswerkzeugen
Hoffmann GmbH Qualitätswerkzeuge, Haberlandstr. 55, D-81241 München für die Automobilindustrie
Hoffmann Nürnberg GmbH Qualitätswerkzeuge, Sigmundstr. 181, D-90431 Nürnberg
Hoffmann GmbH, Herbert-Ludwig-Str. 4, D-28832 Achim ein Qualitätsmanagementsystem nach VDA 6.4: 2005
Hoffmann France SAS, 4, rue Gay-Lussac/BP 36, F-67410 Drusenheim
Hoffmann Italia, Via San Crispino 114, I-35129 Padova - Produktionsmittel -
(mit Produktentwicklung)
Hoffmann Göppingen Qualitätswerkzeuge GmbH & Co. KG, Ulmer Str. 70, D-73037 Göppingen
anwendet.
für den Geltungsbereich
Diese Zertifikatsergänzung ist nur gültig in Verbindung mit dem ISO 9001-Zertifikat,
Registrier-Nr.: 12 100 4426 TMS. Sie bestätigt, dass das QM-System
Entwicklung und Vertrieb von Qualitätswerkzeugen,
durch Erfüllung der in VDA 6.4: 2005, gegenüber ISO 9001: 2000
Messwerkzeugen und Betriebseinrichtungen
erweiterten Forderungen zusätzlich qualifiziert ist. Der Nachweis wurde im Rahmen
des Zertifizierungsaudits, Bericht Nr. 70002227, erbracht.
ein Qualitätsmanagementsystem Diese Zertifikatsergänzung ist gültig bis 2010-04-10
eingeführt hat und anwendet. TMS-Registrier-Nr.: 12 110 4426/01 TMS
Durch ein Audit, Bericht-Nr. 70002227 Ausstellungsdatum: 2007-04-23
wurde der Nachweis erbracht, dass die Forderungen der
ISO 9001: 2000

erfüllt sind. Dieses Zertifikat ist gültig bis 2010-04-10
Zertifikat-Registrier-Nr. 12 100 4426 TMS
München, 2007-04-23
KBA-ZM-A22001-95
München, 2008-03-17 QMS-TGA-ZM-07-92
Tehnica modernă de producţie Certificat de producător

şi experienţa îndelungată garantează calitatea produselor ISO 9001 şi VDA 6.4
capabile să funcţioneze în cele mai dificile situaţii. Pentru pentru procese şi dezvoltare.
mai multe detalii consultaţi pagina 216.

CEL MAI ROBUST MAMIFER
Garant Mobil ToolCar - design practic şi mobil

Carcasă din tablă de oţel foarte rigidă cu două feţe frontale retrase
Mâner solid, ergonomic din PP ranforsat cu fibră de sticlă
Încuietoare DOM cu butuc cilindric, adaptabilă pentru sistemul de închidere
GARANT
Masă X-ABS de depozitare cu compartimente pentru piese mici, rezistentă la
zgâriere şi care opreşte alunecarea
Perete dublu în părţile frontale care protejează împotriva prafului şi a murdăriei
Sertar cu capacitate de 40 kg
nou
Individualitate şi siguranţă cu
sistemul de închidere GARANT
Operare practică şi construcţie bine structurată
Prindere sigură
Mai multe informaţii la pagina 136

Consultanţă
tehnică de Derularea Proiectului de la A la Z
specialitate Aveţi nevoie de o soluţie de amenajare adecvată
necesităţilor dumneavoastră?
Specialiştii noştri vă sfătuiesc competent pentru fiecare fază a
proiectului, oferindu-vă întotdeauna cea mai bună soluţie.
Specialiştii în amenajări asigură

1. Consultanţă
consultanţă în întreaga Europă:
2. Planificare Consultanţă tehnică personalizată: de la evaluarea
necesităţilor până la montaj
3. Ofertă Consultanţă conceptuală chiar şi la faţa locului
Alegerea perfectă a celor mai bune soluţii şi produse
4. Livrare
Procedee de lucru optimizate
5. Montaj Economie de bani şi timp

Eficienţă sporită

Planificare
Planificarea proiectului dumneavoastră în sistemul CAD Inteligentă
vă asigură:
Configurarea în detaliu a spaţiului de muncă
Structură transparentă a sistemului luând în considerare factori importaţi cum ar fi
securitatea muncii şi ergonomia
Dimensiuni adaptate individual, autorizare şi acces prin intermediul sistemului de
încuietori electronice
Sunt luate în considerare criterii importante cum ar fi: camerele
intermediare şi condiţiile de iluminat 1. Consultanţă
Reprezentare şi parcursuri virtuale
2. Planificare
3. Ofertă
4. Livrare
5. Montaj
Planificăm dotarea atelierului
dumneavoastră până la cel mai mic
detaliu
eForm: Protecţie şi individualitate pentru sculele dumneavoastră

Configuraţi simplu şi comod suportul pentru unealta dumneavoastră prin intermediul specialiştilor
noştri tehnici
Alegem din 8000 de modele În funcţie de necesităţile Imagine de ansamblu al

de suporturi pentru aran- dumneavoastră putem executa proiectului executat prin
jarea sculelor . inclusiv suporturi ergonomice. eForm.

Individualitate
şi
transparenţă Oferta noastră - Beneficiile dumneavoastră
Investiţie optimă, planificare excelentă
Angajament şi transparenţă absolută la fiecare ofertă
Raport calitate-preţ fără egal
Consultanţă, planificare CAD şi livrare incluse în preţ
1. Consultanţă Montarea asigurată de către specialiştii Hoffmann Group

Stabilitatea şi durabilitatea materialului garantată
2. Planificare
Eficienţă maximă şi flexibilitate
3. Ofertă
4. Livrare Acoperire prin pulbere în mai

multe culori:
5. Montaj Alegeţi nuanţa dorită
Maximă securitate:
Sistem de închidere mecanic sau
electronic
Cele mai bune materiale şi cea

mai bună calitate de producţie:
Stabilitate şi durabilitate conform
solicitărilor dumneavoastră

Punctualitate
şi
Livrare şi montaj perfecte responsabilitate
Produsul potrivit, la timpul potrivit în momentul potrivit
Calitate şi precizie înaltă în livrări
Siguranţă în livrare şi respectarea exactă a termenelor ofertate
Transport în condiţii de maximă siguranţă inclusiv transfer direct
la locul amplasării
1. Consultanţă
Transport economic şi în condiţii de maximă siguranţă graţie unei
reţele de livrare complexe
2. Planificare
Predare sigură a mărfii: verificare comună a calităţii şi a cantităţii
Asamblare opţională prin intermediul echipelor noastre calificate 3. Ofertă
de monteuri
Construcţie individuală, modulară
4. Livrare
Predare la cheie direct coordonatorilor de proiect
5. Montaj
De la planificare personalizată
până la predare la cheie:
Întotdeauna pregătiţi pentru
solicitările dumneavoastră.

Rapid
şi
fiabil
Serviciul Express -Program de livrări rapide
Trebuie să acţionăm repede şi flexibil ?
O vedere de ansam- Cu programul nostru de livrare rapidă express aveţi acces la 45 de echipa-
blu asupra articolelor mente, care sunt marcate în catalog cu semnul
ce pot fi livrate cu
ajutorul programului
express o puteţi
găsi pe pagina 2 din
cuprins.
Livrare express a articolelor solicitate.

120.000
Suntem întotdeauna aici pentru dumneavoastră de clienţi
oferindu-vă:
Oferte de top pentru scule de calitate
mulţumiţi
Raport excelent calitate-preţ
Consultanţă excelentă în orice domeniu
Soluţii logistice de ultimă generaţie
Soluţia potrivită de fiecare dată.

Manfred Eberl, Audi AG
Întotdeuana bine informaţi.

Martin Schima,
KraussMaffei Technologies GmbH
Întotdeuna de încredere.
Hermann Neumann, MTU Aero Engines GmbH

Pictogramele din cadrul catalogului de echipamente şi mobilier
Identificare simplă şi rapidă în peste 200 de pagini.
Construcţie din tablă de

Construcţie din ţeavă de Construcţie din cornier
Construcţie oţel sudat 1,0
oţel sudată (grosime
minimă a materialului)
Capacitatea de încărcare a 1000 kg Capacitate de încarcare a

100 kg 100 kg Capacitate de încărcare a
sertarului la sarcina bancului la sarcina
sertarului la sarcina
Capacitate de încarcăre distribuită pe întreaga distribuită pe întreaga
distribuită pe întreaga
suprafaţă suprafaţă (independent de
suprafaţă
lungimea plăcii)
Capacitatea totală de
încărcare a sertarului la
1000 kg sarcina distribuită pe
întreaga suprafaţă
ˡ Lacăt cu butuc profilat cu 5
Execuţie 50 ˡ Grosimea plăcii ştifturi de blocare Şuruburi de reglare a
ˡ Muchia superioară a ˡ Element de inserţie modu- 25 înalţimii cu domeniu de
850
plăcii bancului de atelier lar ajustare de 25mm.
ˡ Adaptabil pentru încuietori
40 ˡ Rezistenţa plăcii.
IP Grad de protecţie împotri- Varietate de culori fără cost
700 ˡ Ajustarea înalţimii de la
-
900 - până la 41 va umidităţi suplimentar
100% ˡ Elemente de blocare a

cursei sertarului
Cursa maximă a sertarului 225°
Unghi de deschidere al uşii
ˡ Poate fi tras doar un sertar
la un moment dat
Protecţie pentru obiecte şi

Rezistent la ulei Nerezistent la ulei
pardoseli
Rezistent la lovire
Ergonomie Împotriva oboselii Împotriva alunecării Izolaţie
Program rapid de livrare - express

Livrare Livrările express sunt valabile doar pentru corpuri de culoare gri deschis RAL 7035, suprafeţele frontale de culoare
albastră RAL 5005.. Diese 10 Farben liefern wir ohne Aufpreis,
weitere Farben gegen Aufpreis auf Anfrage lieferbar.
Varitate de culori fără costuri suplimentare RAL 9002 7035 7032 7016 6011 5018 5012 5007 5005 3003
Culorile RAL pentru acoperire cu pulbere CORP RAL Suprafaţă frontalaLieferbare

RAL Farb-
sunt furnizate fără costuri suplimentare. Korpus RAL Fronten RAL
kombinationen, keine
7035 5018 7016 5005 Sonderfarben möglich.
Combinaţii de culori disponibile.
La pagina 224 puteţi găsi întreaga gamă de culori
Vă rugăm luaţi în considerare:

Catalogul, configuraţia grafică şi sistemul folosit pentru numerotarea articolelor sunt proteja-
te prin drept de autor.
Toate preţurile sunt exprimate în €, EXW Munchen şi nu includ TVA - valabil până la data de
31.07.2010.
Preţurile din paranteza () înseamnă: termen de livrare condiţionat de furnizor (non-stoc)
Catalogul este pus la dispoziţia clienţilor noştri gratuit, dar rămâne în proprietatea noastra şi poate fi oricând revendicat.
Reproducerea şi orice fel de multiplicare sunt admise doar cu aprobarea scrisă din partea Hoffmann Group GmbH Qualitätswerk-
zeuge, 81241 München.
Catalogul este complet reciclabil.

Noutăţi Simbol pentru produse sau mărimi noi apărute
în catalog.
91 91 6757_23 (Pagina 16)

Sistem de aranjare a uneltelor(Program construcţie)
91 9865 (Pagina 21)

Masă de transport cu sarcină de 1200 kg
91 9915_2000 (Pagina 23)

Stivuitor cu scală
93 93 3712_240V (Pagina 65)

Bloc electric cu cablu pe sistem roll up
93 3712_240V/Luft (Pagina 65)

Bloc electric cu furtun şi cablu pe sistem roll up
93 3740_S7T3 (Pagina 67)

Sistem depozitare 430 mm lăţime cu sertare
şi uşi
93 3832_50 (Pagina 67 / 70)

Soclu pentru sistem depozitare
93 3922 (Pagina 71)

Suport susţinere PC
(Pagina 95 – 99)
Sisteme combinate de rafturi şi sertare 577 mm
adâncime (27E)
95
95 4701 – 95 4759 (Pagina 108 – 109)
Dulapuri suspendate cu accesorii
96 96 0011 (Pagina 136 – 137)

G-LS Sistem de închidere electronică
96 3460 (Pagina 171)

SWEEMO – Scaun dinamic
96 6060 (Pagina 172)

Plachetă din plastic
98
98 7015_1000P2 (Pagina 199)
Dulapuri de curaţare
98 7120 (Pagina 200)

Punct de curăţare
98 7180_5005 (Pagina 201)

Colector pentru reciclarea materialelor

Sistem de navigare pentru amenajarea echipamentelor
Depozitare de piese mici, transport, sisteme de clasificare
■ Cărucior de atelier şi sisteme de clasificare
■ Cărucior de atelier
■ Mijloc de transport
■ Corpuri din metal uşor
■ Suport de sertare
Bancuri de atelier Avantaje

Sistem de amenajare locuri de muncă
400 kg 40
– ergonomic 700
-
25
■ Loc de muncă cu aparatură electrică 900

■ Loc de muncă cu montaj
KOMPAKT banc de lucru

1500 kg 50
– robust 850
■ Construcţia de maşini
■ Confecţii metalice
KOMPAKT-L banc de atelier

1200 kg 50
– rasat 850
25
■ Mecanică fină
■ Electrotehnică
KOMBI banc de atelier

800 kg 50
– universal 850 2,0
■ Loc de muncă de montaj
■ Şcolarizare
700 kg 40
– avantajos 850
20
1,5
■ Lucrări de reparaţii
■ Spaţii de depozitare
Dulapuri de unelte
Dulapuri de unelte
200 kg
– bine structurat
1,2
■ Depozit de unelte
■ Administrare de unelte
Dulapuri
Dulapuri
200 kg
– spaţioase
0,9
■ Depozitare de unelte şi de consumabile
■ Documentaţie, organizare
Sisteme de închidere, compartimentare, accesorii, scaune, tehnică de ridicare, rafturi
■ Sertare compartimentare ■ Rafturi

■ / Sisteme de închidere ■ Tehnică de ridicare
■ Tehnică de şedere ■ Podeţe şi grătare din lemn
NC-depozitare de unelte
Depozitare NC
– versatil
■ Depozitare, transport şi protecţia uneltelor NC
Tehnologie pentru protejarea mediului înconjurător

Tehnologie ecologică
– biologic
■ Cabinete pentru securitate biologică ■ Containere reciclare
■ Curăţenie

91
91
3 –
23
92 92
24 –
37
93
38 –
41
93 93
42 –
49
93
50 –
74 94
93
75 –
77
94 95
78 –
99
95
100 –
132
96
96
133 –
179 97
97
180 –
191
98
98
192 –
203
204 –

Range overview − express − quick delivery range
91 express − quick delivery range

Do you need factory equipment products at short notice? No worries:
Products that are tagged with the "express" symbol are available at short notice.
Applies only for colour combination body light grey RAL 7035, fronts signal blue RAL 5005.
We reserve individual delivery times for project requirements and special offers.
Product group Variants Page
7−
Roller cabinets
10
Workbenches
39 −
70
Mobile workbenches
81 −
Tool cabinets
91
Computer cabinets
103 −
131
Swing door cabinets
Work chairs
169 −
171
Racks
182 −
NC storage systems
186
2 eShop www.hoffmann-group.com 40
Drawer units
Version: Casing of sheet steel, anthracite varnished. Version: Casing of sheet steel, anthracite varnished.
Dividable drawers with stop edge,
(prevents the drawer falling out) of polypropylene.
For wall mounting and incorporation into rotary towers.
To accept 12 drawer units
No. 913610_8 − 60. 91
Installation example: No. 913615 fitted with

2×913610_8
2×913610_16
2×913610_24
2×913610_40
2×913610_48
2×913610_60
91 3610_40
Size = Number of drawers pieces 8 16

91 3610 Drawer unit 68,89 68,89
Width×depth×height mm 306×150×552
Number / dimensions of drawers pieces / mm 8 / 279×155×64 16 / 139×155×64
Number of subdivisions per drawer pieces 4 4

91 3610 Drawer unit 68,89 68,89
Number / dimensions of drawers pieces / mm 24 / 91×154×64 36 / 67×153×41
3 / 91×154×64
1 / 279×155×64
Number of subdivisions per drawer pieces 3 16 / 3 / 4
91 3615
91 3610 Drawer unit 68,89 68,89 Rotary tower
91 3615 221,95
Width×depth×height mm 306×150×552 empty
Number / dimensions of drawers pieces / mm 48 / 67×153×41 60 / 55×153×41 Total loading capacity kg 480
Number of subdivisions per drawer pieces 16 4 ⌀×length mm 680×1760
Cases, boxes and small parts cases can be found in the main catalogue
Aluminium Euro boxes
Version: Stackable lightweight metal boxes made of high-tensile,
corrosion-resistant aluminium alloy for professional use for
91 packing, storage and transport. Lid with high-grade steel

hinges, two stay belts and blue plastic stacking corners.
All-round lid gasket provides dust and splash-water protection.
Stiffening embossing, spring-loaded handles and catches with
sockets for locks. Can be locked by seal, padlock or built-in lock
(not included).
Size = Volume litres 27 42 60

91 3700 Aluminium Euro box (111,55) (139,15) (150,65)
External dimensions (L×W×H) mm 400×300×340 600×400×250 600×400×340 81
Internal dimensions (L x W x H) mm 350×250×310 550×350×220 550×350×310
Weight kg 3.0 4.7 4.9 27
Size = Volume litres 63 70

42
91 3700 Aluminium Euro box (231,15) (151,80) 240
External dimensions (L×W×H) mm 1200×300×250 600×400×410
Internal dimensions (L x W x H) mm 1150×250×220 550×350×380 60
Weight kg 6.3 5.2 70
63
91 3700 Aluminium Euro box (207,–) (231,15)
External dimensions (L×W×H) mm 800×400×340 800×600×410 415
Internal dimensions (L x W x H) mm 750×350×310 750×550×380
Weight kg 6.1 7.5 155

91 3700 Aluminium Euro box (271,40) (404,80)
External dimensions (L×W×H) mm 800×600×610 1200×800×510
Internal dimensions (L x W x H) mm 750×550×580 1150×750×480
Weight kg 8.9 13
Accessories for ZARGES Euro boxes

Suitable for: Euro boxes No. 913700 sizes 42, 60, 70, 81.
Version: Small parts box of PP with 21 insertable dividers.
91 3710 Small parts box (27,14)

L×W×H mm 430×330×60
Suitable for: Euro boxes No. 913700 sizes 42, 60, 70. 91 3710
Version: Partition set made of high quality foam material.
91 3715 Partition set (59,80)

L×W×H mm 550×350×190 91 3715
Suitable for: Size 1 − for Euro boxes No. 913700 size 27, 42, 60, 70
(a size adaptation provided by the customer is necessary for size 27).
Size 2 − for Euro boxes No. 913700 size 81, 155, 240
(a size adaptation provided by the customer is necessary for size 81).
Version: Foam cube set for sensitive equipment; made of several
soft foam layers, forms adapt easily without tools.
Size = Type 1 2
91 3720 Foam cube set (34,96) (57,50)
L×W×H mm 550×350×220 750×550×220 91 3720
Suitable for: Euro boxes 913700 sizes 81 − 240.

Version: 2-piece roller set for customer self-assembly.
(drilling required).
91 3730 Roller add-on kit (22,54) 91 3730
Price in brackets ( ) = Non-stock item (delivery and price are subject to manufacturer's terms). Continued ▶
Aluminium Euro boxes
▶ Continued
Suitable for: Euro boxes 913700 sizes 27 − 415
Version: The wheels are clamped to the lower edge profile of the boxes,
no tools required.
91
Treadless wheels ⌀ 100 mm. Load capacity with 4 wheels 90 kg.
Supplied with:
Size 40741 – 2 fixed wheels (one each fixed wheel "left" and "right").
Size 40742 – 2 castors with parking brake (one each castor "left" and "right").
Size = Type 40741 40742

Clip-on wheel set _40741
91 3735 (50,60) (64,40)
2 pieces
_40742
Possible arrangement of wheels version 1 1× 1×
Possible arrangement of wheels version 2 − 2×
Suitable for: Euro boxes 913700 sizes 27 − 415

(size 27 requires only 1 lock).
Version: Lock set composed of 2 locks and 2 keys.
The sets are available with shared keys (size GL)
or individual keys (size VS).
Size = Type GL VS
91 3740 Lock set 2 pieces (15,01) (15,01)
Key safes
Version: Body, partition and door made of sheet steel.
Arranged for wall hanging. Interior cladding of sheet
polypropylene. Hook strips continuously adjustable
for height, with sequential numbering and key list.
Lockable by cylinder lock.
91 3800 – With 48 key hooks (6 hook strips each with 8 hooks)
91 3805 – With pivoting partition and 96 key hooks
(12 hook strips each with 8 hooks).
91 3810 – With pivoting partition and 176 key hooks
(16 hook strips each with 11 hooks).
Colour: Light grey RAL 7035 powder-coated. 91 3800
Key safe with

91 3800 106,03
48 key hooks
Key safe with partition
91 3805 149,50
96 key hooks
Key safe with partition
91 3810 211,60
176 key hooks
H×W×D (91 3800) mm 380×280× 80
H×W×D (91 3805) mm 380×280×105
H×W×D (91 3810) mm 560×380×105 91 3805
Key fob set, 10 pieces

Version: Elegant design with key-ring and paper insert
for labelling. The cover over the paper insert
opens and closes using a thin film hinge.
Key fob set

91 3850 7,88
10 pieces, blue
Key fob set
91 3851 7,88
10 pieces, yellow
Key fob set 91 3810
91 3852 7,88
10 pieces, red
Key fob set
91 3853 7,88
10 pieces, clear
Key fob set
91 3854 7,88
10 pieces, green
Padlocks can be found in the main catalogue
08 5805 08 5865
08 5830
Roller cabinet ToolCar
91
Perforated back panel Sturdy handle
 Pair of support columns of  Glass-fibre reinforced
tubular steel ⌀ 30 mm  Ergonomic
 For insertion into the roller  Robust
cabinet stiles  Non-fatiguing
ABS tray
 With compartments for small parts
 Can-holder
 Scratch-resistant, non-slip, does not
damage surfaces placed on it
Laptop stand Safety

 Made of sheet metal  Ergonomic handle
Drawers with swing arm  DOM cylinder lock
 Load capacity up to 40 kg  X-ABS tray, scratch-resistant,  Locking system capable
 Full extension drawers non-slip, does not damage
 Compartments can be surfaces placed on it
divided for storage of
small components
Bumpers End faces
Protect drawer fronts and cabi-  Recessed end faces
net stiles and reduce the damage  Second wall protects against
to delicate surfaces and work- dust and dirt
pieces in the event of collisions.  Perforations □ 9×9 mm in
37 mm grid for individual
mounting of accessories and
holders
Roller-bearing Castors
fixed wheels ⌀ 150 mm 2 pieces, with roller bearings,
End cupboard ⌀ 100 mm with brakes
Sheet metal door with frame for
hanging on to end faces. Lockable
with cylinder lock.
The GARANT roller cabinet family
ToolCar roller cabinet with fully extendable drawers with TÜV / GS kitemark 470 mm deep
40 kg 100%
Version: Sturdy sheet metal cabinet with 2 recessed end faces. The end walls are perforated for storage
91
of accessories. A second inner side wall protects the interior from ingress of dirt. Inner faces
of drawers have slots for dividers. The drawers are unlocked by a catch integral to the grip
handles. Drawers centrally lockable by means of a cylinder lock. With roller bearing wheels
(2 castors with parking brake, 2 fixed wheels). ABS tray with storage area / compartments for
small components, cans and screwdrivers.
Solid ergonomic handle of glass-filled PP. Drawer fronts and cabinet stiles are clad with PP
bumpers. In the event of collisions they reduce the damage to vulnerable surfaces and tools.
Colour: Two-tone powder-coated; silver combined with steel blue RAL 5011.
Supplied with: Dividers:
for each 60 mm drawer
2 slotted dividers;
for each 120 mm drawer
1 slotted divider.
Size = Number of drawers pieces 6 8 10
91 6300 757,85 882,05 1033,85

ToolCar roller cabinet
Overall height mm 950 950 950
Footprint (W×D) mm 720×464 720×464 720×464
Drawer usable area (W×D) mm 530×390 530×390 530×390
Weight kg 64 73 82
Roller cabinet with fully extendable drawers with TÜV / GS kitemark 470 mm deep
40 kg 100%
Version: Sturdy sheet metal cabinet with 2 recessed end faces. The end walls are perforated for storage
of accessories. A second inner end wall protects the interior from ingress of dirt. Inner faces
of drawers have slots for dividers. The drawers are unlocked by a catch integral to the grip
handles. Drawers centrally lockable by means of a cylinder lock. With roller bearing wheels
(2 castors with parking brake, 2 fixed wheels). Solid ergonomic handle of glass-filled PP.
Sturdy steel tray with rubber inlay, prepared for fitting vice No. 874000 size 120.
Colour: Two-tone powder-coated, silver combined with steel blue RAL 5011.
for each 60 mm drawer 2 slotted dividers,
for each 120 mm drawer 1 slotted divider.

Roller cabinet
91 6310 631,35 738,30
with full extension drawers
Overall height mm 950 950
Footprint (W×D) mm 720×464 720×464
Drawer usable area (W×D) mm 530×390 530×390
Weight kg 67 76
For tool sets see No. 916710 − 916835 and group 68 in the main catalogue
Continued ▶
Roller cabinet with drawers that pull out from both sides 470 mm deep
▶ Continued
40 kg 75% 75%
91 Version: Sturdy sheet metal cabinet with 2 recessed end faces. The end walls are perforated for
storage of accessories. A second inner end wall protects the interior from ingress of dirt.
Inner faces of drawers have slots for dividers. The drawers are unlocked by a catch integral
to the grip handles. Drawers centrally lockable by means of a cylinder lock. With roller
bearing wheels (2 castors with parking brake, 2 fixed wheels). Sturdy steel tray with rubber
inlay, prepared for fitting vice No. 874000 size 120. Solid ergonomic handle of glass
fibre-filled PP.
Size = Number of drawers pieces 6
91 6320 631,35
Roller cabinet with 6 drawers
Overall height mm 950
Footprint (W×D) mm 720×464
Drawer usable area (W×D) mm 530×390
Weight kg 67
ToolTruck mobile workbench with fully extendable drawers with TÜV / GS kitemark 470 mm deep
40 kg 100%
Version: Sturdy sheet steel cabinet with 2 recessed side faces. The side walls are
perforated for storage of accessories. A second inner side wall protects
the interior from ingress of dirt. Inner faces of drawers have slots for
dividers. The drawers are unlocked by catches incorporated in the grip
handles. Drawers are centrally lockable by means of a cylinder lock.
With roller bearing wheels (2 castors with parking brake, 2 fixed wheels).
Solid ergonomic handle of glass fibre reinforced PP. Worktop of HDPE
for highly demanding technical applications. Side cupboard with 2
shelves, door with cylinder lock. Cabinet stiles are clad with PP
bumpers.
Installation example: With pull-out shelf No. 916522.
91 6330 ToolTruck mobile workbench 939,55 1010,85

with full extension drawers
Footprint (W×D) mm 1120×464 1120×464
Drawer usable area (width×depth) mm 530×390 530×390
Weight kg 80 85 91 6330_6 91 6330_8
Mobile workbench with drawers that pull out from both sides
40 kg 75% 75%
Version: Sturdy sheet steel cabinet with 2 integral storage compartments.

The side wall is perforated for storage of accessories. Inner faces
of drawers have slots for dividers. The drawers are unlocked by a
catch integral to the grip handles. Drawers are centrally lockable
by means of a cylinder lock. With roller bearing wheels (2 castors
with parking brake, 2 fixed wheels).
Worktop 25 mm thick beech ply (suitable for mounting a vice).
91 6340 668,15
Mobile workbench with 5 drawers
Worktop size (L×W) mm 980×540
Weight kg 55
30 kg 75% 75%
Version: Sturdy sheet steel cabinet with perforated side

91
walls for storage of accessories. Inner faces of
drawers have slots for dividers. The drawers are
unlocked by a catch integral to the grip handles.
Drawers are centrally lockable by means of
a cylinder lock. With roller bearing wheels
(2 castors with parking brake, 2 fixed wheels).
Steel tray with rubber inlay. Solid ergonomic
handle of glass fibre reinforced PP.
Colour: Two-tone powder-coated,
silver combined with steel blue RAL 5011.
Supplied with: Dividers
91 6350 543,95
Roller cabinet with 6 drawers
Weight kg 45
Roller cabinet with trays that pull out from both sides, and roller shutters 380 mm deep
15 kg 75% 75%
Version: Sturdy sheet steel cabinet with perforated side walls

for storage of accessories. With dividable pull-out trays.
Spacious base container for storage of large tools.
Lockable by metal roller shutters with cylinder lock.
With roller bearing wheels (2 castors with parking
brake, 2 fixed wheels). Steel tray with rubber inlay.
Solid ergonomic handle of glass fibre reinforced PP.
Size = Number of pull-out trays pieces 4
91 6360 389,85
Roller cabinet with 4 pull-out trays
Weight kg 36
Telescopic roller tool box

Version: Stable, deep-drawn sheet steel construction with spacious
base container, 2 storage trays and cover with all-round
protection edging and rubber mat.
2 telescopic columns with integral gas pressure
springs (each with 20 kg spring force) provide support
for opening and closing the cabinet, particularly when
loaded. When closing, the telescopic columns slide into
each other, so there is no projection when closed.
Centrally lockable by means of a cylinder lock.
With fold-away handle for pulling and pushing.
With roller bearing wheels (2 castors with parking brake,
2 fixed wheels).
91 6400 488,75
Telescopic roller tool box
Overall height (open / closed) mm 935 / 520
Storage compartment usable area (W×D) mm 435×330
Load capacity per cover or tray kg 20
Load capacity of base container kg 40
Weight kg 28
15 kg 75% 75%
91 Version: Sturdy sheet metal construction with rubber inlay.

Drawer unlocked by lifting the drawer. Drawers can
be centrally locked with a locking bar for a padlock.
With roller bearing wheels (2 castors with parking
brake, 2 fixed wheels).
Colour: Two-tone powder-coated.
Fire red RAL 3000 in combination with black.
91 6450 Roller cabinet 448,50

with 6 drawers
Weight kg 46
Roller cabinet with trays that pull out from both sides, and roller shutters 380 mm deep
15 kg 75% 75%
Version: Sturdy sheet metal cabinet with rubber inlay. With dividable pull-out trays.
Spacious base container for storage of large tools. Lockable with metal roller
shutters and attachment point for a padlock.
With roller bearing wheels (2 castors with parking brake, 2 fixed wheels).
Steel tray with rubber inlay.
Colour: Two-tone powder-coated.
Fire red RAL 3000 in combination with black.
Size = Number of pull-out trays pieces 4
91 6460 Roller cabinet 301,30

with 4 pull-out trays
Weight kg 31
Accessories for roller cabinets

Non-slip mat set 5 pieces
Version: Fabric-reinforced mat with knob structure of special
high-grip plastic, slip-proof and very strong.
Anthracite colour.
Application: For insertion in drawers / pull-out trays of roller
cabinets (see table). As protection against slipping
and for protective storage of tools.
Size = Type 1 2 3
Non-slip mat set 5 pieces
91 6490 24,38 25,65 32,55
for roller cabinets
L×W mm 498×293 498×318 530×390
Thickness mm 4 4 4
suitable for roller cabinets No. 91 6360 91 6350 91 6300
91 6460 91 6310
91 6320
91 6330
91 6340
91 6450
Accessories for GARANT roller cabinets
Plywood worktops with and without vice

Suitable for: Roller cabinet No. 916310 and 916320.
Supplied with:
91
91 6510/6520 – Including vice No. 874000 size 120.
91 6505 Plywood worktop 63,02

Plywood worktop
91 6510 187,45
with vice
91 6510
Plywood worktop
91 6515 92,–
with galvanised sheet steel overlay
Plywood worktop
91 6520 with galvanised sheet steel overlay 205,85
and vice
91 6520
Shelves pull-out / fixed Insta

Suitable for: Mobile workbench No. 916330.
Version: Of sheet steel, silver varnished, Installation example:
for hanging in the side cupboard.
91 6522 – 98 % extendable with 2 slotted dividers.
2×91 6523
Fixed shelf
1×91 6522
Pull-out shelf
91 6522 Pull-out shelf 53,36

Usable area width×depth mm 295×370
Working height mm 80 91 6522
91 6523 Shelf fixed 14,26 91 6523

Usable area width×depth mm 330×410
Cable boxes, compressed air accessories and wiper cloths can be found in the main catalogue
08 1158
08 9105 / 9116
08 0060
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
Tray / laptop tray

91 Suitable for: Roller cabinet No. 916300, 916310, 916320 and mobile workbench No. 916330.
Version: Made of sheet metal with swing arm, silver varnished and ABS tray.
For insertion in the roller cabinet stiles.
91 6525 Tray with anti-roll lip 60,95

91 6525
Width ×height×depth mm 320×20×400
Writing surface / information board

Suitable for: Roller cabinet No. 916300, 916310, 93 6320 and mobile workbench No. 916330.
Version: Of sheet metal, steplessly adjustable angle, silver varnished.
▶
For insertion in the roller cabinet stiles.
91 6529
▶
91 6529 Writing surface 59,80 Steplessly adjustable
Width × height mm 450×410 angle
Perforated panel
Version: Pair of support columns of ⌀ 30 mm steel tubing with sheet metal
perforated panel (9×9 mm in a 37 mm grid), silver varnished.
For insertion into roller cabinet or mobile workbench stiles.
Perforated panel for

91 6530 72,91
roller cabinet
Width×height of the perforated panel mm 610×481
suitable for No. 91 6300, 91 6310, 91 6320
Perforated panel for

91 6532 85,33 91 6530
mobile workbench
Width×height of the perforated panel mm 1010×481
suitable for No. 91 6330
Container shelves
Version: Sheet metal, silver paint finish.
For hanging in the perforated sheet metal rear panel.
Size = Number of containers pieces 0 4 6

91 6535 Container rail 17,42 37,03 37,49
Overall length mm 600 600 600
Assembly height mm 100 100 100
Type / colour of open storage box − SB4 / blue SB5 / red 91 6535_6
Number of containers pieces − 4 6
Storage shelf
Suitable for: Sheet steel perforated panel with 9×9 mm holes at 37 mm pitch.
For hanging in the perforated sheet metal panel.
91 6540 Storage shelf 25,53

Width ×height×depth mm 600×30×100 91 6540
For accessories see No. 96 1325 − 961500 and No. 96 0900 − 96 1290
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
Storage bins / document pocket / universal carrier
Suitable for:
91
91 6545/6547 – Roller cabinet No. 916300 / 6310 / 6320 / 6340
and mobile workbench No. 916330, 470 mm deep.
91 6546 – Roller cabinet No. 916350 and 916360, 380 mm deep.
For hanging on to perforated end walls of GARANT roller cabinets.
Size = Storage bin height mm 100 160

91 6545 Storage bin 345 mm wide 15,99 25,53 91 6545 / 6546
Width x depth mm 345×80 345×120
Size = Storage bin height mm 100 160

91 6546 Storage bin 285 mm wide 14,43 22,31
Width x depth mm 285×80 285×120
91 6547 Universal carrier 345 mm wide 33,35

Width×depth×height mm 345×225×300 91 6547
Valuables cupboard / side cupboard

Suitable for: Roller cabinet No. 916300 / 6310 / 6320 and mobile workbench No. 916330.
Version: Sheet steel door with frame, silver paint finish, for hanging
on to recessed side walls. Lockable with cylinder lock.
91 6550 Valuables cupboard / side cupboard 86,02

Usable area W×D×H mm 328×35×730
91 6550
Paper dispenser
Size = maximum roll width mm 340
91 6555 Paper dispenser 42,09
91 6555
Slotted dividers
Suitable for: Drawers of roller cabinets.
91 6560 – Roller cabinet No. 916300 / 6310 / 6320 / 6340, mobile workbench No. 916330
91 6562 – Roller cabinet No. 916350
Version: Sheet metal, steel blue RAL 5011 powder-coated.
Size = Front height of drawers mm 60 120 180

91 6560 Slotted divider 390 mm long 4,32 6,79 8,34
91 6562 Slotted divider 320 mm long 3,86 6,10 7,76
Dividers of aluminium for further Front height mm: 60 120 180

division between slotted dividers
No. 91 6560 / 91 6562. Product code: 96 0550 96 0560 96 0570
Continued ▶
eForm
eForm helps you to plan your personal rigid foam design.

91 ■ Better working by finding tools more quickly − thanks to individual configuration
■ Increased process reliability due to easier detection of missing tools
■ Tool protecting storage and transport in made-to-measure oil-resistant rigid foam
A warning protects against

"tool collisions" at the
planning stage
The toolbar allows you to The product list

plan your drawer insert gives an overview
individually, using 9,000 of contents, product
pre-loaded current Hoff- codes and costs:
mann Group tools (from Request a quote
sections 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8). online − with or
without the
selected tools.
See your requirements clearly planned in

realistic photomontage. Add, change and
save as your personal projects.
The eForm planner can be found in the Hoffmann Group eCenter.
Tool organiser system for GARANT roller cabinets

Suitable for: Drawers of GARANT roller cabinets No. 916300 / 916310 (916320 / 916340),
and GARANT mobile workbench No. 916330.
Version: Popular tool sets in two-colour moulded rigid foam inserts.
The closed-pore foam is oil-resistant and does not absorb liquids of any sort.
Upper layer anthracite, under which the contrast colour of blue indicates if a tool is missing.
The rigid foam inserts fill 1/3 (176×390×30 mm) or 2/3 (352× 390×30 mm) of the usable area of the drawer.
Size 0 – Rigid foam inserts without tools, (empty).
1 1
3 3
Size = Number of tools pieces 0 7 Size = Number of tools pieces 0 5

91 6710 Measurement tools set 15,64 80,50 91 6711 Measurement tools set 15,30 175,38
Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6710 size 0 1 1 Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6711 size 0 1 1
Holex vernier caliper No. 41 0200 size 150 − 1 GARANT digital vernier caliper No. 41 2601 size 150 − 1
Holex try square No. 45 2600 size 150×100 − 1 Holex stock square No. 45 2100 size 100×70 − 1
Holex steel rule No. 46 1805 size 300 − 1 Holex protractor No. 45 3000 size 120×150 − 1
GARANT tape measure No. 46 2201 size 2.5 − 1 Holex precision steel rule No. 46 1600 size 300 − 1
Plastic ruler 2 m No. 46 6200 size 2 − 1 GARANT tape measure No. 46 2201 size 2.5 − 1
Scriber No. 45 8800 − 1
Holex spirit level No. 46 7435 size 300 − 1
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
1 1
91
3 3
91 6712 16,56 226,55 91 6735 15,12 122,48

Measurement tools set Ratchet ring spanner set
Garant digital vernier caliper No. 41 2601 size 150 − 1 Combination / ratchet ring spanner set (8 − 19 mm) − 1
Holex bevel edge square No. 45 2600 size 100×70 − 1 No. 61 4810 size 10
GARANT external micrometer No. 42 0402 size 0−25 − 1
GARANT workshop straight edge No. 46 1161 size 300 − 1
GARANT tape measure No. 46 2210 size 3 − 1
2 2
3 3

91 6715 Workshop files set 23,69 56,81 91 6740 24,15 96,37
Double-ended ring spanner set
Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6715 size 0 1 1
Set of workshop files No. 51 7200 size 200, 5 pieces − 1
Double-ended ring spanner set (6 − 30 mm) − 1
Wire brush No. 57 5000 size 3 − 1
No. 61 5710 size 10
File card No. 57 6000 size 100×25 − 1
1 1
3 3

91 6720 Precision key files / PUK saw set 14,55 67,85 91 6745 15,12 57,16
Socket set
Precision key file set, 6 pieces No. 53 9100 − 1
Socket set (4 − 10 mm) − 1
Diamond wet stone No. 55 9150 size D25 − 1
No. 62 2210 size 9
PUK saw, adjustable No. 59 3500 − 1
Pack of saw blades, 12 pieces, metal No. 59 3700 − 1
1
3
Size = Number of tools pieces 0 7
91 6750 13,80 44,05

Torx screwdriver set
2
3
Torx screwdriver set − 1
Size = Number of tools pieces 0 10 (TX 6 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 10 -15 -20) No. 62 5331 size 7
91 6725 24,84 65,09

Double open-ended spanner set
Open-ended spanner set (6 − 30 mm) − 1
No. 61 0710 size 10
1
3

Torx screwdriver set
1 91 6751 16,56 46,23
3 with T-handle
Size = Number of tools pieces 0 9 Torx screwdriver set with T-handle − 1
No. 62 5210 (size TX 8 - 9 − 10 - 15 - 20 - 25)
91 6730 13,80 61,18
Combination spanner set
Combination spanner set (5.5 − 19 mm) − 1
No. 61 3710 size 9
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
91
1
3
1
3 1
2

Hexagon screwdriver set
91 6752 15,64 50,60 91 6760 15,12 106,26
with T-handle Socket set 1/2″
Hexagon screwdrivers with T-handle − 1 each Bi-hexagon socket set − 1 each
No. 62 7420, size 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 No. 64 2130 size 10 - 13 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19 - 21 - 22 - 24
Extension No. 64 1030 size 130 − 1
Ratchet No. 64 0030 − 1
2
3

Hexagon and Torx
91 6753 36,80 115,–
screwdriver set with T-handle
Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6753 size 0 1 1 2 1
Torx screwdriver set with T-handle − 1
3
2
No. 62 5210 size TX 8 − 9 − 10 − 15 − 20 − 25
Hexagon screwdriver set with T-handle − 1 Size = Number of tools pieces 0 32
No. 62 7430, size 6 (3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10)
91 6761 36,11 254,15
Socket set 1/2″
Insert set, 1/2″ drive 32 pieces − 1
No. 63 8013 size 12 (without box)
1
3 1
4
91 6755 15,12 128,23

Socket set 1/4″
Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6755 size 0 1 1 1
3
Hexagon socket set No. 63 1030 size 3.5 - 4 - 4.5 - 5 - 5.5 -
6 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 - 13 − 1 each
Hexagon bit set No. 63 1730 size 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 − 1 each Size = Number of tools pieces 0 8
T-handle No. 63 3030 − 1
Spinner handle No. 63 2830 − 1 91 6765 14,15 47,27
Screwdriver set
Universal joint No. 63 3530 − 1
Slot-head screwdrivers − 1 each
Ratchet No. 63 2030 − 1
No. 66 0030 size 2.5 - 3.5 - 4 - 5.5 - 6.5
Phillips screwdrivers − 1 each
No. 66 7690 sizes 0; 1; 2
1
3 3
8
1
91 6757 19,55 165,60 3
Socket set 3/8″
Hexagon socket set No. 63 7030 1 each Size = Number of tools pieces 0 3
size 8 - 10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19 − 13,80 40,02
Hexagon bit set No. 63 7530 size 3-4-5-6-7-8-10 − 1 each
91 6766 Screwdriver set, large
T-handle No. 63 5730 − 1 Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6766 size 0 1 1
Extension No. 63 5430 size 75, 240 − 1 each GARANT slot-head screwdrivers − 1 each
Universal joint No. 63 6230 − 1 No. 66 0030 sizes 8 - 10
Ratchet No. 63 5030 − 1 GARANT Phillips screwdriver No. 66 7690 size 3 − 1
Cleaning:
GARANT rigid foam inserts are easy to clean.
Wash them out with a neutral soap solution using a soft handbrush.
Then rinse them off under running water and allow them to dry.
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
1 1
91
3 3

Chisel, taper pin punch
91 6770 14,15 37,03 91 6795 14,15 42,78
Screwdriver set and pin punch set
Slot-head screwdrivers − 1 each Cold chisel 200 mm No. 74 0500 size 200 − 1
No. 66 0700 size 2.5 - 3.5 - 5.5 - 7 - 8 Cross-cut chisel 200 mm No. 74 0600 size 200 − 1
Phillips screwdrivers − 1 each Taper pin punches No. 74 5500 size 3 - 4 − 2
No. 66 8400 sizes 0 - 1 - 2 Pin punches No. 74 7000 size 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 − 6
Engineer's hammer No. 75 0110 size 300 − 1
1
1 3
3

91 6800 Set of hammers 12,88 47,84
91 6775 15,12 37,84
Screwdriver set, fully insulated Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6800 size 0 1 1
Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6775 size 0 1 1 Dead-blow nylon mallet No. 75 4900 size 40 − 1
Slot-head screwdrivers, fully insulated − 5 Engineer's hammer No. 75 0110 size 500 − 1
No. 66 3300 size 2.5 - 3.5 - 4 - 5.5 - 6.5
Phillips screwdrivers, fully insulated − 3
No. 66 8630 size 0 - 1 - 2
Voltage tester No. 66 5050 size 3 − 1
1
3

1
3
91 6805 Set of shears and snips 12,88 58,19
Size = Number of tools pieces 0 4 Aviation snips, stainless steel No. 76 6000 size 260 − 1
12,88 71,30 Multi-purpose shears No. 76 3100 size 190 − 1
91 6780 Set of pliers
Electrician's shears No. 76 9000 size 130 − 1
Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6780 size 0 1 1 Heavy duty scissors No. 76 9250 size 200 − 1
Water pump pliers No. 70 5800 size 240 − 1
GARANT side cutters No. 72 4840 size 160 − 1
GARANT snipe-nose pliers No. 71 3040 size 200 − 1
GARANT combination pliers No. 70 0940 size 180 − 1
1
3
1 Size = Number of tools pieces 0 5

3
91 6815 Inspection tool set 12,59 101,20
Magnetic retriever with LED lamp No. 08 1475 − 1
91 6785 Circlip pliers set 14,15 63,94 Claw retriever No. 08 1450 size 500 − 1
Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6785 size 0 1 1 Telescopic inspection mirror No. 08 1497 size 30 − 1
Circlip pliers (internal) − 3 LED torch No. 08 1525 size 1 − 1
No. 71 9800 size J0 - J1 - J2 Tweezers No. 72 7550 size N − 1
Circlip pliers (external) − 3
No. 71 9900 size A0 - A1 - A2
1
3
1
3
91 6816 Workshop accessory set 17,94 74,06
91 6790 Cable stripping tools set 12,88 70,38
Universal trimming knife No. 84 5000 − 1
Rigid foam insert, empty No. 91 6790 size 0 1 1 Snap-off blades, pack of 10, No. 84 5010 − 1
Automatic wire stripper No. 72 8625 size 6 − 1 Marker pen No. 08 5100 R − 1
Cable stripping knife No. 72 8010 size 8-28 − 1 Small parts bin No. 96 0650 size 26/2 − 1
VDE side cutters No. 72 5350 size 160 − 1 LED torch No. 08 1525 size 1 − 1
Crimping tool for terminals No. 72 9400 size 2.5 − 1 Comfort safety glasses No. 08 9450 − 1
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
91
1
3
91 6820 13,– 45,31

Hexagon key L-wrench set
Hard foam insert, empty No. 91 6820 size 0 1 1
Hexagon key L-wrench set No. 62 7131 size 9 − 9
Small parts bin No. 96 0650 size 26/1 − 3
2
3
1
3 Size = Number of tools pieces 0 8
91 6830 Marking out and sawing 34,27 140,30
Size = Number of tools pieces 0 15 Hard foam insert, empty No. 91 6830 size 0 1 1
HOLEX try square No. 45 2600 size 200×130 − 1
91 6821 Stub screwdriver set 18,57 66,01 HOLEX protractor No. 45 3000 size 120×150 − 1
and hexagon key L-wrench set Carbide scriber No. 45 8760 − 1
HOLEX precision steel rule No. 46 1600 size 300 − 1
GARANT tape measure No. 46 2201 size 2.5 − 1
Hexagon key L-wrench set No. 62 7131 size 9 − 1
GARANT hacksaw blades No. 58 2500 (1 pack = 10 blades) − 1
Stub slot-head screwdriver No. 66 4100 size 5.5 − 1
GARANT hacksaw blades No. 58 0400 − 1
Stub slot-head screwdriver No. 66 4100 size 6.5 − 1
Marker pen No. 08 5100 size R − 1
Stub Phillips screwdriver No. 66 8000 size 1K − 1
Stub Phillips screwdriver No. 66 8000 size 2K − 1
1
3
1
3
91 6835 Marking out − drilling − deburring 16,91 220,80
91 6825 12,82 21,10 GARANT jobber drill set HSS No. 11 5120 size 1−13 − 1
Small parts bin set GARANT hand deburrer 90° No. 15 0400 size 12.4 − 1
Hard foam insert, empty No. 91 6825 size 0 1 1 Carbide scriber No. 45 8760 − 1
Small parts bin No. 96 0650 size 26/1 − 4 GARANT workshop straight edge No. 46 1161 size 300 − 1
Small parts bin No. 96 0650 size 26/2 − 3 Centre punch, special quality No. 74 8900 size 120/10 − 1
Tool sets can be found in the main catalogue
68 0570
68 0275
Roller cabinet − Assistent
Assistent 173 35 kg 100%
Version: Large volume, robust cabinet with lockable side compartment

and pull-out work tray.
91
Cylinder lock for central locking of all drawers and individual
drawer locking.
2 castors with parking brake, and 2 fixed wheels.
Size 173–1 – With plastic bench top
Size 173–2 – With plywood bench top
Colour: Blue
Size = Type 173–1 173–2

Roller cabinet
91 8260 (1896,35) (1896,35)
Assistent 173
Number of drawers×height mm pieces 7×70 / 1×140 7×70 / 1×140
Footprint (W×D) mm 910×590 910×590
Drawer usable area (width×depth) mm 695×398 695×398
Weight kg 139 145
Assistent 179 25 kg 100%
Version: Sturdy pulling handle securely attached to the body.

Cabinet with edge protection corners throughout,
central locking and individual drawer locking.
2 castors with parking brake, and 2 fixed wheels.
Colour: Blue
Size = Type 179–6 179–7 179–8 179–9

Roller cabinet
91 8265 (918,85) (977,50) (1022,35) (1066,05)
Assistent 179
Number of drawers×height mm pieces 3×75 / 3×160 5×75 / 2×160 7×75 / 1×160 9×75
Overall height mm 1040 1040 1040 1040
Footprint (W×D) mm 817×502 817×502 817×502 817×502
Drawer usable area (width×depth) mm 527×398 527×398 527×398 527×398
Weight kg 88 90 92 94
Roller cabinet JET XL

Version: Large worktop of polypropylene with ergonomic handle.
Drawers with full extension, each 25 kg load capacity
(60 mm drawer only 20 kg).
Pull handle with integral lock.
Body with bumpers on all 4 sides.
Central locking by lock.
2 fixed wheels and 2 castors (1× with parking brake). 100%
Colour: Grey
Size = Type 6GXL 7GXL 8GXL 9GXL

Roller cabinet
91 8700 (829,15) (952,20) (1030,40) (1158,05)
JET XL
Number of drawers×height mm pieces 4×60 / 1×130 / 5×60 / 1×130 / 6×60 / 2×130 8×60 / 1×130
1×270 1×200
Dimensions L×W mm 780×520 780×520 780×520 780×520
Usable drawer area mm 569×421 569×421 569×421 569×421
Weight kg 74 76 78 80
Price in brackets ( ) = Non-stock item (delivery and price are subject to manufacturer's terms).
Trolleys with handle and retractable trolleys
Trolley with handle, capacity 200 / 250 kg
91 Standard:
Version:
EN 1757-3
Welded steel tubes, platform made of chipboard.
2 fixed wheels and 2 castors (with parking brake)
with solid rubber tyres and roller bearings.
Colour: Brilliant blue RAL 5007 powder-coated
Size = Type KF2 KF33
91 9805 Trolley with handle (166,75) (248,40)
External dimensions L×W×H mm 860×500×900 860×450×900
Platform area L×W mm 600×500 600×450
Platform height mm 185 185 / 765
Wheel ⌀ mm 125 125
Carrying capacity kg 250 200 KF2 KF33
Weight kg 12 15
Retractable trolley, capacity 150 / 250 kg

Standard: EN 1757-3
Version: Welded steel tubes with folding handle, platform made of chipboard. 2 fixed wheels
and 2 castors (with parking brake) with solid rubber tyres and roller bearings.
Size = Type KW1 KW11

91 9810 Retractable trolley (182,85) (220,80)
L×W×H folded mm 720×450×280 900×600×320
Platform area L×W mm 720×450 900×600
Platform height mm 260 300
Wheel ⌀ mm 125 160
Carrying capacity kg 150 250
Weight kg 16 25
Platform and table trolleys

Modular system:
Platform trolley with 400 / 500 kg capacity / 1 platform Plug and screw assembly.
Standard: EN 1757-3
Version: Welded steel tubes and sectional steel, platform made of chipboard.
2 fixed wheels and 2 castors (with parking brake) with solid rubber
tyres and roller bearings.
Size = Type 2500 2501 2502 2503

91 9800 Platform trolley (179,40) (189,75) (192,05) (212,75)
External dimensions L×W×H mm 970×500×950 1120×600×990 1120×700×990 1320×800×990
Platform area L×W mm 850×500 1000×600 1000×700 1200×800
Platform height mm 235 275 275 275
Wheel ⌀ mm 160 200 200 200
Capacity kg 400 500 500 500
91 9800
Weight kg 24 30 33 38
Table trolleys with 250 kg capacity / 2 or 3 shelves

Standard: EN 1757-3
Version: Welded steel tubes and sectional steel, platform made of chipboard resting on
steel frame, 12 mm high lip around the perimeter. 2 fixed wheels and 2 castors
(with parking brake) with solid rubber tyres and roller bearings.
Size = Type 2740 2742

Table trolley
91 9820 (212,75) (236,90)
with 2 shelves
Shelf area L×W mm 850×500 1000×600 91 9820
Shelf heights mm 195 / 820 195 / 820
Wheel ⌀ mm 125 125
Capacity of upper shelf kg 80 80
Total capacity kg 250 250
Weight kg 29 37
Size = Type 2750 2752

Table trolley
91 9840 (257,60) (289,80)
with 3 shelves
Shelf area L×W mm 850×500 1000×600
Shelf heights mm 195 / 508 / 820 195 / 508 / 820
Wheel ⌀ mm 125 125
Capacity of middle shelf kg 80 80 91 9840
Weight kg 36 50
Continued ▶
Table trolleys
▶ Continued
Table trolleys with 400 / 500 kg capacity / 2 shelves
Standard: EN 1757-3
91
Version: Welded steel tube and sectional steel, platforms
made of chipboard with beech grain surface.
Size = Type 2400 2401 2402 2403

Table trolley
91 9860 (295,55) (304,75) (309,35) (332,35)
with 2 shelves
Shelf area L×W mm 850×500 1000×600 1000×700 1200×800
Shelf heights mm 235 / 865 275 / 905 275 / 905 275 / 905
Wheel ⌀ mm 160 200 200 200 91 9860
Capacity of upper shelf kg 200 200 200 200
Total capacity kg 400 500 500 500
Weight kg 38 47 52 61
Table trolley with 1200 kg load capacity

Standard: EN 1757-3
Version: Welded steel tube and sectional steel,
platforms made of non-slip platform of marine plywood.
2 fixed wheels and 2 castors (with parking brake),
high-grade resilient solid rubber tyres (200×50 mm) and roller bearings.
Size = Type 12402 12403 12405 12406 kg y

Table trolley 1200 g capacit
i n
91 9865 with 2 shelves (493,35) (573,85) (722,20) (943,–) load
1200 kg
Shelf area L×W mm 1000×700 1200×800 1600×800 2000×800
Shelf heights mm 280 / 925 280 / 925 280 / 925 280 / 925
Wheel ⌀ mm 200 200 200 200 91 9865
Total capacity kg 1200 1200 1200 1200
Weight kg 70 80 103 159
Table trolleys (steel construction) with 400 kg capacity / 2 or 3 shelves

Standard: EN 1757-3
Version: Welded steel construction, oil-tight trays with 40 mm high edge.
2 fixed wheels and 2 castors (with parking brake) with solid rubber
tyres and roller bearings.
Application: Brilliant blue RAL 5007 powder-coated
Size = Type 4820 4822

Table trolley
91 9870 (263,35) (320,85)
with 2 shelves
Shelf area L×W mm 850×500 1000×700
Shelf heights mm 245 / 865 290 / 910
Wheel ⌀ mm 160 200
Weight kg 37 50
Size = Type 4830 4832

Table trolley
91 9875 (320,85) (401,35)
with 3 shelves
Shelf area L×W mm 850×500 1000×700
Shelf heights mm 245 / 555 / 865 290 / 600 / 910
Wheel ⌀ mm 160 200
Capacity of middle shelf kg 200 200 91 9875
Weight kg 47 64
Aluminium folding truck
Version: Made of high-tensile aluminium
profiles, with treadless PU wheels.
91 Very small size when folded - handy
one-hand folding mechanism.
Loading capacity 125 kg.
ing
oad
kg l
125 city
a
cap
Aluminium
91 9890 109,25
folding truck
H×W×D unfolded mm 1090×488×500
H×W×D folded up mm 765×488×64
Carrying capacity kg 125
Weight kg 5.2
Sack trucks
Version: Welded steel tube frame, safety grips of
plastic, pneumatic tyres on plastic rims with
roller bearings.
Size 1115L – 1330L – Welded steel tube frame with
sheet steel carrying plate
Size A1330L – Of aluminium with aluminium
carrying plate, very light
_1115L _1125L _1330L _A1330L

Size = Type 1115L 1125L 1330L A1330L
Sack truck
91 9900 (113,85) (109,25) (149,50) (220,80)
with pneumatic tyres
External dimensions W×H mm 620×1150 570×1150 580×1300 570×1300
Carrying plate L×W mm 150×400 250×320 250×320 250×320
Wheel ⌀ mm 260 260 260 260
Load capacity kg 250 200 300 200
Weight kg 12 11 15 9
Pallet trucks
Version: Frame and forks in distortion-free shell
construction. Sturdy steel tube drawbar  Lower
with thrust bearing for push operation.  Move
Runner wheels  Raise
Colour: Yellow, powder-coated.
Fork rollers nylon ⌀ 80 × 70 mm
tandem (treadless)
Steered wheels
Maintenance-free resilient
hydraulic solid rubber
hand pump ⌀ 200 × 50 mm tyres
Size = Lifting capacity kg 2500
91 9910 Pallet truck (358,80)
External dimensions L×W mm 1540×530
Fork length mm 1150
Fork width mm 160
Lift range mm 85 − 200
Weight kg 75
Continued ▶
Pallet truck with scales
▶ Continued
Version: Frame and forks in distortion-free shell construction.
Scales with weighing range 1 − 2000 kg.
LCD display, touch panel with ON/OFF button and tare button, IP
91
power supply from 4×1.5V AA batteries (included in delivery).
65
Colour: Yellow, powder-coated.
Weighing range 1 − 2000 kg with accuracy

of ± 0.1%. Graduation 1 kg.
LCD display with 18 mm figures.
Size = Lifting capacity kg 2000
Pallet truck
91 9915 (1794,–)
with scales
External dimensions L×W mm 1550×540
Fork length mm 1150
Fork width mm 160
Lift range mm 85−205 Tandem polyurethane fork rollers
Weight kg 117 Polyurethane castors
Tipper truck with discharge valve and roller set

Standard: EN 1757-3
Version: Oil-tight welded trough, on bearings for tipping.
Trough edge twice folded over at the top.
Chassis with integral fork lift slots, standing area
and protection against overturning.
_250
Discharge valve with sieve

for separating liquids from solids.
Tipping action is operated manually.
Contents A B C D For emptying using a forklift truck or
l mm mm mm mm when heavily loaded we recommend
250 194 203 603 60 a self-tipper.
450 194 203 603 60
600 194 327 727 60
Size = Trough volume litres 250 450 600
Tipper truck
91 9920 (534,75) (615,25) (670,45)
with discharge valve
External dimensions L×W×H mm 1332×713×766 1353×732×1065 1465×858×1088
Trough dimensions L×W×H mm 1202×655×390 1212×675× 695 1320×800× 715 _450
Filling edge height mm 766 721 828
Wheel ⌀ mm 200 200 200
Lifting capacity kg 250 450 500
Weight kg 62 75.5 89.5
Self-tipping truck with discharge valve and roller set

Standard: EN 1757-3 Tipping action is per-
Version: Sturdy welded construction of 3 mm sheet metal. formed automatically
Chassis with integral fork lift slots. when the interlock is
2 fixed wheels and 2 castors (with parking brake) released. We recom-
with nylon tyres. mend use of a pull cord
to initiate tipping from
Roll restraint and tip position locking, chain acts the forklift seat position.
as protection against slipping off and tipping. Discharge valve with
Colour: Brilliant blue RAL 5007 powder-coated sieve for separating liquids
from solids.
Contents A B C D
l mm mm mm mm
350 194 190 592 80
600 194 582 982 80
900 194 582 982 80
Size = Trough volume litres 350 600 900

Self-tipping truck
91 9925 (833,75) (930,35) (1124,70)
with discharge valve
External dimensions L×W×H mm 1300×730×1070 1300×1120×1070 1300×1620×1070
Filling edge height, including rollers mm 955 955 955
Wheel ⌀ mm 200 200 200 _600
Lifting capacity kg 1000 1500 2000
Weight kg 116 144 173
System workstations with TÜV / GS kitemark
92
Basic frame of steel tube, with integral cable channels and cable slots.
Includes height adjustment screws (25 mm adjustment range).
The height of the worktop is adjustable from 700 − 900 mm at 25 mm intervals.
Optionally with hydraulic height adjustment (maximum load capacity 300 kg).
Adjustment range from 720 − 920 mm by means of a hand crank (additional price No. 92 0025)
or a 230V electric motor with an inching switch (additional price No. 92 0045).
Choice of either Eluplan or Eterlux worktop.
Height adjustment: Cable management:

200 mm adjustment range at Integral cable channels, cable slots and removable
25 mm intervals (No. 92 0000 /
92 0010).
side panels enable an easy and tidy cable routing.
Side panels turn through 180º to allow additional
92
Optionally with hydraulic height cable slots.
adjustment (92 0025 / 92 0045).
Height adjustment screws: Eluplan worktop:

With 25 mm adjustment range 40 mm thick with plastic coating
for stability (all models). and ABS veneer on all edges.
Drawers: Eterlux worktop:

With smooth-running Delrin 100 wheels, 40 mm thick with light grey laminate
load capacity up to 100 kg. surface 2.7 mm thick (melamine /
With slots for drawer dividers on the phenolic resin) on a plywood core.
inner faces.
Layout example of a system workstation
12 Equipment track
11 Lighting unit
13 Drawing display stand
14 Perforated backpanel
5 Support column structure
8 Storage container rack

Baseframe 10
Swing arm 7 Storage shelf

TFT monitor support
9
6 Power tracks
Base unit 1
Drawer unit 2
3 Mobile drawer unit
Footrest 4
The tag numbers make it easier for you to find the individual components on the following pages.
40 100 kg 400 kg
1 700 25
-
900
Version:
Size 1000; 1500; 2000 – Basic unit without drawers for individual
fitting with fixed or movable units.
Size 10002A; 10002C – Basic unit with 1 drawer unit with 240 mm usable height.
For drawer fitments see table.
Size 15002AC; 20002AC – Basic unit with 2 drawer units with 240 mm usable
height. For drawer fitments see table.
Size 15004AB; 20004AB – Basic unit with 2 drawer units with 460 mm usable
height. For drawer fitments see table.
92 Colour: Bicoloured light grey RAL 7035 / signal blue RAL 5005
powder-coated
92 0000_15002AC
Size = Length mm / model 1000 10002A 10002C 1500 15002AC 15004AB 2000 20002AC 20004AB
Basic unit with
92 0000 (609,50) (839,50) (901,60) (741,75) (1263,85) (1551,35) (870,55) (1392,65) (1681,30)
Eluplan worktop, 40 mm
Basic unit with
92 0010 (647,45) (877,45) (938,40) (802,70) (1324,80) (1612,30) (949,90) (1472,–) (1761,80)
Eterlux worktop, 40 mm
W×D (overall) mm 1000×760 1500×760 2000×760
Worktop upper face (from − to) mm 700 − 900 700 − 900 700 − 900
Worktop (L×D×thickness) mm 920×700×40 1420×700×40 1920×700×40
Usable drawer area (W×D) mm − 320×520 320×520 − 320×520 320×520 − 320×520 320×520
Weight kg 53 75 78 65 111 149 76 123 160
Drawers fitted on left / right mm − − / 80 − / 60 − 80 / 60 60 / 60 − 80 / 60 60 / 60
mm − − / 160 − / 80 − 160 / 80 80 / 80 − 160 / 80 80 / 80
(1 each drawer of front height) mm − − − / 100 − − / 100 120 / 100 − − / 100 120 / 100
mm − − − − − 200 / 100 − − 200 / 100
mm − − − − − − / 120 − − − / 120
Additional charge for hydraulic height adjustment Hydraulic height adjustment

with fold-away hand crank.
Version: Optionally with hydraulic height adjustment (max. load 300 kg). Adjustment range from
Adjustment range from 720 − 920 mm by means of a hand crank 720 − 920 mm.
(which in the retracted position is completely concealed beneath
the worktop) or with an electric motor (230 V, which is activated
using an inching switch underneath the worktop).
Hydraulic height adjustment

Note: No. 92 0025 / 92 0045 are optional additional charge items, which
with electric motor / inching
can only be ordered for new equipment. Cannot be retrofitted. switch.
Adjustment range from
720 − 920 mm.
92 0025 (787,75)
hand crank
92 0045 (1288,–)
electric motor
Ergonomic working with flexible and adaptable workplace systems.

You can find the optimum chair for your requirements from page 168.
Seated workplace Standing workplace Standing workplace with structure
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
2 3 Drawer units complete with drawers

100 kg
1.0
Version: For drawer runner mountings at 25 mm intervals. Can be locked centrally with cylinder lock.
The drawer extend lock means that only one drawer can be opened at a time.
The unit is thus secured against tipping over.
92 0110 – With black ABS plastic shelf and push handle, 4 castors (2 with parking brakes)
⌀ 100 mm with grey, abrasion-resistant thermoplastic rubber tyres, ABS plastic casing.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, drawers signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
Application: Drawer units for individual fitting on to basic units No. 92 0000 − 92 0010.
Note: Drawer 300 mm suitable to accept suspension files.
92 0100_S2C 92
Size = Model S2A S2C S4H S4A S4B
Drawer unit
92 0100 (233,45) (296,70) (313,95) (379,50) (439,30)
complete with drawers
Mobile drawer unit
92 0110 — — (507,15) (571,55) (632,50)
Usable drawer area (W×D) mm 320×520
Overall height (92 0100) mm 300 300 540 540 540
Overall height (92 0110) mm − − 720 720 720
Usable height mm 240 240 460 460 460
Weight (92 0100) kg 21 25 38 40 44
Weight (92 0110) kg − − 41 43 46
1 each drawer of front height mm 80 60 60 60 60
160 80 100 80 80
− 100 300 120 100
− − − 200 100
− − − − 120
92 0110_S4A
Drawer cabinet
Version: As described under No. 92 0100 / 92 0110.
Note: When fitting out the cabinet with drawers, check that the sum of the heights of
all the individual drawer fronts corresponds to the usable height for the cabinet.
Size = Usable height mm 240 460

Cabinet for drawer unit
92 0120 (98,44) (114,08)
without drawers
Mobile cabinet for drawer unit
92 0130 — (309,35)
without drawers
W×D×H (92 0120) mm 430×630×300 430×630×540
W×D×H (92 0130) mm − 430×630×720
92 0120
Roller drawers for cabinet No. 92 0120 / 92 0130

Version: As described under No. 92 0100 / 92 0110.
Note: Drawer 300 mm suitable to accept suspension files.
Size = Front height mm 60 80 100 120 140 160 200 300

Sliding drawer
92 0140 (66,24) (66,24) (66,24) (66,24) (69,69) (69,69) (69,69) (71,53)
with runners
Shell height mm 40 40 80 80 120 120 160 250
Usable height mm 45 65 85 105 125 145 185 285
Usable area (W×D) mm 320×520 92 0140
For accessories see No. 96 0030 − 96 0180 and No. 96 0900 − 96 1290
96 0030 96 0040
Slotted Plain divider
divider
96 1220 96 1440
▶ Continued
1.0
2 Computer housing  Motorised fan to prevent overheating

 Cable slots for a tidy cable layout
Version: Sheet steel body with motorised fan and built-in 2-way socket
outlet with ON / OFF switch with fuse.
Lockable door with polycarbonate viewing window.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, door signal blue RAL 5005
powder-coated.
92 Application: For optimum enclosure of the computer at the workstation.

Protects from dirt and damage. Prevents unauthorized access.
92 0150 Computer housing (495,65)

W×D×H (overall) mm 370×630×600
Usable housing dimensions (W×D×H) mm 280×590×515
Weight kg 22.5
Keyboard drawer
Version: Lockable, with wooden handrest.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, front signal blue RAL 5005
powder-coated.
Application: For space-saving protection of the keyboard, with mouse
and mousepad. When the drawer is pulled out the front
tilts up automatically to enable rapid access.
92 0175 Keyboard drawer (307,05)

W×D×H (overall) mm 690×475×90
Usable internal dimensions (W×D×H) mm 625×295 / 385×50
Weight kg 8.5  Single-hand operation
 When the drawer is pulled out the front tilts up automatically
System trolleys and storage trolleys

Mobile flexibility
GARANT small parts transporters.
Mobility and flexibility − requirements by many current workplace designs.
GARANT small parts transporters realise those wishes − and set at the same
time new visual standards.
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
1.5
Installation example:
System trolley 92 0155_1645
Version: Frame and structure of rectangular steel tubes 60×40×2 mm with sheet steel
base. Insertion slots in the front and back of the frame (at 50 mm intervals) for
fitting size 1000 storage shelves etc. Threaded sockets on the inside of the 96 1460_1
frame for fitting perforated tool mounting panels.
4 castors (2 with parking brake, 100 mm ⌀, with grey, abrasion-resistant
Colour:
rubber tyres in ABS plastic casings) and 2 large push handles ensure stability
and safe handling in the workshop.
Light grey RAL 7035 powder-coated
92 0240_1000/9
92
92 0230_1000
Application: Fitting with shelves, storage container racks, drawing display stands and
perforated panels in size 1000 possible.
92 0280_1000
Size = Type 1175 1645

92 0155 System trolley (439,30) (463,45)
W (excl. handles)×D×H mm 1000×680×1235 1000×680×1720
Usable height mm 970 1445
Load capacity kg 250 250
Weight kg 37 42
Carrier rail for TUL tool carrier 92 0155_1175
Application: For slotting into system trolley No. 92 0155 to accept

3 TUL tool carriers No. 970910.
Can be arranged at either 12.5° or 25° inclination.
Carrier rail for

92 0165 (52,79)
TUL tool carrier
Load capacity kg 25
Length×width×height mm 940×85×75 92 0165
Storage trolley
Version: Frame of rectangular steel tube 60×40×2 mm.
Sheet metal structure with a black ABS plastic shelf. 4 castors (2 with parking
brake, 100 mm ⌀, with grey, abrasion-resistant thermoplastic rubber tyres in
ABS plastic casings) and 2 large push handles ensure stability and safe handling
in the workshop.
Transparent boxes in 4 sizes, made of transparent ABS plastic ensure dust-free
storage. Tilt the transparent box to remove stored goods. Boxes can be removed
and stacked for assembly purposes.
Colour: Light grey RAL 7035 powder-coated
Application: For storage / provision of bulk goods and small parts.
Size = Type 1260 1460

92 0170 Storage trolley (829,15) (930,35)
W (excl. handles)×D×H mm 680×600×1310 680×600×1520
Fitting with transparent boxes 18 pieces 100× 93× 84 mm 18 pieces 100× 93× 84 mm
Front 15 pieces 152×113×129 mm 15 pieces 152×113×129 mm
3 pieces 220×192×190 mm 4 pieces 190×142×165 mm
3 pieces 220×192×190 mm
Fitting with transparent boxes 16 pieces 190×142×165 mm 20 pieces 190×142×165 mm
Rear 3 pieces 220×192×190 mm 3 pieces 220×192×190 mm 92 0170_1460
92 0170_1460 Rear view
Front view
Weight kg 67 77
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
90° corner link for basic units No. 92 0000 / 92 0010 (all sizes)
40
700 25
-
900

Application: As an extension of the basic units for corner and U configurations.
Note:  Cannot be fitted in combination with hydraulic height adjustment.

 Corner link with support columns can only be fitted in combination with a 92 0180
92 base unit having support column construction and is suitable for mounting
shelves, perforated tool boards etc. in size 1000.
90° corner link with

92 0180 (570,40)
Eluplan worktop, 40 mm
90° corner link with
92 0185 (619,85)
Eterlux worktop, 40 mm
90° corner link
92 0190 with support column construction (678,50)
and Eluplan worktop, 40 mm 92 0190
90° corner link
92 0195 with support column construction (730,25)
and Eterlux worktop, 40 mm
W×D (overall) mm 1280×700
Worktop (L×D×thickness) mm 1280×640×40
Weight (92 0180, 92 0185) kg 38
Weight (92 0190, 92 0195) kg 55
Deep 90° corner link

92 0182 (700,35)
with Eluplan worktop, 40 mm
Deep 90° corner link
92 0187 (767,05)
with Eterlux worktop, 40 mm
92 0182
Weight kg 45
4 Footrest
25
2.5
Version: Free-standing footrest with inclinable, anti-slip surface.

4 height adjustment screws with rubber feet to prevent slipping.
92 0197 Footrest (144,90)

Weight kg 14
Inclination degrees 0 − 35°
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
5 Support columns set
Suitable for: System workstations No. 92 0000 − 92 0010.

Version: With insertion slots at 50 mm intervals at
the front and rear as well as threaded sockets
at 50 mm intervals at the front and inside
for holding other modules / components
(No. 92 0205 − 92 0275 and 92 0280 / 0285).
Size 1320 – With additional carrying arms including threaded
sockets for mounting lighting units / equipment
track.
92 0200_500
92
Cable channels eliminate cable management
problems. Removable side panels with
integral cable channels.
H
Colour: Support columns light grey RAL 7035,
side cladding signal blue RAL 5005,
powder-coated.
92 0200_1320
Size 1320 − cable slots and cable channels
Size = Height (H) mm 500 1320

Support columns
92 0200 (57,16) (338,10)
set, 2 pieces
Height mm 500 1320
Depth mm 60 360/740
Weight kg 3.6 34
Modular system workstations
Flexibility and versatility:

Corner links allow base units to
be combined as corner units and
U-shaped arrangements.
Modularity and functionality

permit quick and flexible
adaptation to new requirements.
Power tracks and modules for system workstations
Version:
Casing:
 Sheet metal modular construction for mounting individual modules
 Modules and covers can be changed and positioned as desired
 Cable slots are provided on the upper, lower and end faces, for power supplies and for
linking multiple power tracks together
 Electrical pre-installation with industrial plug-in system:
1× distribution block No. 92 0229 with 5-pin feed/supply cable and 6× 3-pin sockets
1× 5-pin plug No. 92 0227_5 included for the feed cable
Modules:
 Each module is provided with a connection cable and 3-pin plug No. 92 0227_3 for connection
92 to the distribution block in the power track. Power circuit modules have 5-pin plugs.
Technical data industrial plug-in system:

 Maximum connected load without internal fuse protection: Distribution block
16 A / 230 V or 16 A / 400 V
 Maximum connected load with internal fuse protection:
when using 16 A / 230 V or 16 A / 400 V plugs
 Maximum connected load, single phase: 3.6 kW
 Maximum connected load, three phase: 10.5 kW
 Maximum supply cable cross-section without internal fuse protection:
3×1.5 mm2, single phase
5×1.5 mm2, three phase
 Protection class 1
 Index of protection IP20
Initial connections and also the connection of plugs or bushings to cables may be
performed only by qualified electricians!

▶ Continued
6 Power tracks
1.5
Suitable for: Support column set No. 92 0200 and corner link with support
columns No. 92 0190 / 92 0195. Mounting by slotting.
92 0210 60 mm adjustment range
92 0220 60 mm adjustment range

Size = Length mm 1000 1500 2000
Power track for attaching
92 0205 (222,53) (243,80) (265,65)
your own devices
Power track
92 0210 (281,75) (303,60) (324,30)
with 2 plugs 230 V
Power track
92 0215 (339,25) (363,40) (381,80)
with 4 plugs 230 V
Power track with
92 0220 (370,30) (389,85) (410,55)
4×230 V / 1× ON-OFF
Dividers unit 8 13 18
Empty module 1 unit / 2 unit / 3 unit (92 0205) 1× / 2× / 1× 1× / 3× / 2× 2× / 2× / 4×
Continued ▶
Modular workstations with TÜV / GS kitemark
▶ Continued
Modules for power tracks
Note: When mounting individual modules, check that the sum of the module unit
widths matches the power track available width.
Size = 92 0225 Description Rated power Modular

Module Type dividers
type Module unit
230V/1 (33,24)
Three-pin socket
230 V / 16 A AC 1
92
with hinged cover
_230 V/1 _230 V/2
2 three-pin sockets
230V/2 (60,03) 230 V / 16 A AC 2
with hinged covers
CEE 400 V / 16 A three-phase
400V (51,52) 1
socket 3P + N + E
EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton
NOT (95,45) 230 − 400 V 1
without key release
ON-OFF
EIN/AUS (30,82) 230 V 1
switch
Miniature circuit-breaker
230 V / 16 A AC
SI/1 (28,98) 1-pole 1
capacity 250 V
(power protection switch)
Miniature circuit-breaker
380 V / 16 A three-phase
SI/3 (135,70) 3-pole 1
capability 400 V
(power protection switch) _400 V _NOT
Internal dimensions
165×50 mm
DECKEL (54,17) Transparent hinged cover 2
for miniature circuit-breakers
and earth leak trip switches
25 / 0.003 A
FI (247,25) Earth leak trip switch 1
230−400 V (4-pole)
Quick-release
LUFT (33,24) up to 16 bar 1
compressed air connection
Communications network
10 Gbit/s in conformity with
EDV (98,90) double socket for RJ45 cables 1
POE IEEE 802.3af _EIN/AUS _SI/1
(unwired)
_SI/3 _DECKEL _FI _LUFT _EDV
Accessories for power tracks and modules
Note: Initial connections and subsequent connections of plugs or sockets to cables should
only be performed by an experienced electrician.
Size = Number of pins 3 5

_3 _5
92 0227 Plug connector (7,13) (11,56)
Rated power 240V 400V
Size = Number of pins / number of outlets 3/5 5/1+3/6

92 0229 Distribution block (17,83) (21,10)
Rated power 240V 400V
Number of 3-pin outlets pieces 5 6
Number of 5-pin outlets pieces - 1 _3/5 _5/1+3/6
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
2.0
7 Storage shelves
92 0230
Suitable for: Mounted by slotting into a support column construction,
support column corner link, system trolley, divider.
Version: With anti-roll lip on 3 sides.
Front is folded downwards.
Range of depth adjustment 130 mm.
Locking horizontally 90° and inclined 120° possible.
92 0235 – With transparent Perspex cover and
92 Colour:
3 mm ribbed rubber inlay.
Light grey RAL 7035 powder-coated. 920235
Note: If 1 shelf is mounted to the front and 1 shelf to the rear of

the support columns the shelf space is doubled.
The shelves can be fitted with open storage bins No. 961510. ▶ ▶
130 mm
Size = Length mm 1000 1500 2000

92 0230 Sheet steel shelf (62,33) (83,72) (93,15)
Sheet steel shelf
92 0235 with transparent (185,15) (225,98) (267,95)
Perspex cover
Usable surface (width×depth) mm 855×300 1355×300 1855×300
Load capacity, evenly distributed kg 25 25 25
Small parts bins of polystyrene for shelves No. 92 0230

92 0238
Version: PS plastic containers, high-impact, blue.
Size = Height mm / type 41/1 41/2 41/3 67/1 67/2 67/3

92 0238 PS small parts storage bin 1,20 1,90 3,51 1,75 2,31 3,93
Width×depth×height mm 76×76×41 76×152×41 152×152×41 76×76×67 76×152×67 152×152×67
8 Storage container racks

Suitable for: Mounted by slotting into a support column construction, support
column corner link, system trolley, dividers and base frame.
Version: Of sheet steel. Different container sizes
can be fitted on one storage container rack.
Capacity 30 kg distributed along the length.
Colour: Light grey RAL 7035 powder-coated.
92 0240_1500/9
Size = 92 0240 Assembly Number of Type of Colour of
Length (mm) / height containers open storage bin open storage bin
No. of containers Storage container rack
mm pieces
330/LEER (19,09) − 0 − −
330/2 (25,88) 130 2 SB4 blue
330/3 (23,69) 100 3 SB5 red
1000/LEER (63,71) − 0 − −
1000/4 (89,93) 150 4 SB3Z grey
1000/6 (83,72) 130 6 SB4 blue
1000/9 (77,97) 100 9 SB5 red
1500/LEER (73,14) − 0 − −
1500/6 (111,09) 150 6 SB3Z grey
1500/9 (102,58) 130 9 SB4 blue
1500/14 (94,30) 100 14 SB5 red
2000/LEER (82,11) − 0 − −
2000/9 (140,30) 150 9 SB3Z grey
2000/13 (125,35) 130 13 SB4 blue
2000/19 (111,78) 100 19 SB5 red
For accessories and open storage bins see No. 96 0900 − 96 1560
96 1510_SB5 96 1510_SB4 96 1510_SB3Z 96 1530 96 1520 96 1540
Continued ▶
Modular workstation with TÜV / GS kitemark
▶ Continued
9 TFT monitor swing arm

Suitable for: Mounted by slotting into a support column structure.
Version: Swing arm made of aluminium with galvanised support plate
for monitors up to 30″. The support plate and the swing arm
are continuously adjustable and can be locked at any position.
Size = Number of joints pieces 0 1 2

92 0244
Swivel arm reach
TFT monitor swing arm
mm
(142,60)
76
(166,18)
235
(197,23)
380
92
Inclination adjustable degrees −45° to + 45°
Load capacity kg 20 13 13
9 Swing arm
Version: Swivel arm of steel tube with 2 joints, for screw fastening
to a support column structure.
For monitor stand No. 92 0250 or base frame No. 92 0255.
Swivel arm
92 0245 (202,98)
made of steel tube
Swivel arm reach mm 560
Capacity kg 25
10 Monitor stand / base frame

Suitable for: Swivel arm No. 92 0245.
Version: Sheet metal monitor stand, rotates 360º°, adjustable up to 45° inclination.
With anti-roll lip all round and keyboard shelf.
Monitor stand of sheet steel

92 0250 (77,28)
(without swivel arm)
Length×width mm 330×330
rotatable degrees 360°
inclinable (either side) degrees 0 − 45°
Capacity kg 20
Suitable for: Swivel arm No. 92 0245.

Version: Steel hollow section base frame, rotates 360º, adjustable up to 45º inclination
to either side. Takes storage bin racks No. 92 0240 size 330 or perforated back
panel No. 92 0280 size 300.
Base frame of steel tube

92 0255 (90,62)
(without swivel arm)
Width×height mm 490×350
rotatable degrees 360°
inclinable (either side) degrees 0 − 45°
Capacity kg 20
TFT holder for support column
Example: ▶
180 °
Application No. 92 0244 − continuously ▶
adjustable and can be locked at any
position.
▶
90 °
▶
Delivered as component parts to reduce carriage costs (excl. assembly).
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
92 0260
11 Lighting units
Suitable for: Support columns set No. 92 0200_1320.
Version: Carrier rail complete with lampholder and connecting cable for fitting
to No. 92 0225_ON / OFF switch. The lampholder is fitted with a fluorescent ance
ccord
92 tube, with glare-free lengthways and crosswise reflectors for optimum
workstation illumination.
An electronic ballast (EVG) ensures non-flickering light to ASR 7/3
r-free
li
FlickeASR 7/3 a
g h t in a 5035
nd DI
N
wit h
and DIN 5035 standards.
92 0262 – Additionally with an integral ON/OFF switch.
Connection to a power track is optional but not essential.
The switch is operated by a pull cord.
92 0262
Size = Length mm 1000 1500 2000
92 0260 Lighting unit (378,35) (417,45) (434,70)
500 mm long cord,
Lighting unit length can be reduced individually.
92 0262 (401,35) (441,60) (458,85)
with ON/OFF switch
Carrier rail (length×width) mm 920×190 1420×190 1920×190
Power consumption W 24 54 54
Lampholder (length×width) mm 620×115 1245×115 1245×115
12 Equipment tracks with 2 runners

Suitable for: Support columns set No. 92 0200_1320.
Version: Of channel section.
Each end has a rubber-backed internal stop.
The runners are mounted on ball bearings and have
a flange and a clip to which work equipment, lifting
devices and other ancillaries can be attached.
Size = Length mm 1000 1500 2000

Equipment track with
92 0265 (99,36) (113,16) (129,95)
2 runners
Width×height mm 40×40 40×40 40×40
Total capacity kg 60 50 40
Runners individually
Application: For retrofitting an equipment track No. 92 0265.
When adding additional runners, check that the total safe
working load of the equipment track is not exceeded.
92 0270 Runners individually (25,53) 15 kg carrying capacity
See the main catalogue for balancers, electric and pneumatic power tools
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
1.5
▶
▶

Suitable for: Mounted by slotting into a support column structure,
support column corner link, system trolley and divider.
Version: Drawings are clipped in place using magnets. Hinged magnets can be slid along
92
Size = Length mm 1000 1500 2000
Organisation magnets No. 08 5912_32
Drawing display stand freely positionable
92 0275 (110,86) (148,35) (187,45)
with hinged magnets
Drawing display stand
92 0278 (52,56) (57,39) (69,23)
with organisation magnets
Maximum drawing size DIN Up to A1 Up to A0 Up to A0
Number of magnets (92 0275) pieces 3 6 9
Number of magnets (92 0278) pieces 4 4 4
14 Perforated panels, □ 9×9 mm in a 37 mm grid

Suitable for: For mounting between support columns, in system
trolleys and for dividers or baseframes (size 300 only).
Version: Made of sheet steel, for clear tool storage. Perforated
panel, in double-sided version can accept components
on both sides independently.
Note: For hooks, holders and accessories for perforated

panels see No. 96 1325 − 96 1500.
Size = Type 300 1000 1500 2000

Perforated panel made of
92 0280 (17,60) (36,46) (54,86) (74,52)
sheet steel single-sided
Perforated panel made of
92 0285 — (72,91) (109,71) (149,50)
sheet steel double-sided
W×D×H mm 440×25×250 920×30×481 1420×30×481 1920×30×481
Safe working load kg 20 100 100 100
Weight (92 0280) kg 1.6 6 9 12
Weight (92 0285) kg − 12 18 24
Dividers, □ 9×9 mm in a 37 mm grid
Version: Columns (hollow section steel 40×40×2 mm) with level compensation and insertion
slots at front and back for storage shelves etc.
Threaded sockets on the inside of the columns for fitting (screwing on) to perforated
panels No. 92 0280 / 92 0285.
Colour: Perforated panels light grey RAL 7035, columns signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.
Application: As room dividers, for privacy and for well-arranged and versatile tool storage.
Size = Width mm 1000 1500

Single-sided divider
92 0290 (410,55) (473,80)
(2 columns and 3 perforated panels)
Single-sided extension divider
92 0295 (272,55) (341,55)
(1 column and 3 perforated panels)
W×D×H (overall) mm 1000×660×2125 1500×660×2125
maximum field loading kg 200
Weight (92 0290) kg 32 41
Weight (92 0295) kg 25 34

KOMPAKT workbenches with TÜV / GS kitemark
93
Robust, sturdy workbenches for general workshop use, e. g. machine building and tool making, steel fabrication, fitter's
workshops, repair workshops etc., also for vocational colleges and teaching workshops in the corresponding disciplines.
The individual workbenches Bench top: The frame:

(sizes .... L, .... M, .... R) can be 50 mm thick, non- Welded angle iron /
bolted together at the frames warping beech marine sheet metal construction.
thus forming a solid assembled ply, with waterproof Immensely stable!
With leg room unit. glue; finished with
for working when seated clear varnish.
1300 1200 1300

▶ ▶ ▶
(1900) ▶
(1800) ▶
(1900) ▶
700
Drawers:
With Delrin 100 low
friction rollers − load
Doors:
Of sheet metal, with
pocket on inside for
93
capacity up to 100 kg. drawings.
Size L Size M Size R With slots for drawer
= left workbench top = middle workbench = right workbench top dividers on the inner
overhangs 100 mm top has no overhang overhangs 100 mm faces.
to the left to the right

50 100 kg
850 1000 kg
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035,

drawers signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
With 1 drawer, 1 door
Size = Worktop length mm 1500 2000
Workbench with
93 0950 (512,90) (622,15)
1 drawer and 1 door
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 2000×700
Sub-frame (W×D) mm 630×600
Weight kg 82 94
1 drawer of usable height (left / right) mm − / 120 93 0950_1500
1500 kg
1 door with height (left / right) mm − / 380
With 1 drawer, 1 door, 2 shelves

Size = Bench top length mm 1500 1300L 1200M 1300R
Workbench
93 1000 right side 1 drawer and 1 door, (570,40) (555,45) (545,10) (555,45)
left side open
_1500 Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 1300×700 1200×700 1300×700
Sub-frame (L×D) mm 1200×600
Weight kg 101 96 93 96
1 drawer of usable height (left / right) mm − / 120
1 door with height (left / right) mm − / 380 93 1000_1500
Accessories see No. 93 3910 − 93 3970, No. 96 0030 − 96 0180 and No. 96 0900 − 96 1290
93 3950
96 1210 96 0130

Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i 50
850
100 kg 1500 kg

With 3 drawers, 1 shelf

Size = Worktop length mm 1500 1300L 1200M 1300R
Workbench, right side 3 drawers,
93 1200 (708,40) (692,30) (684,25) (692,30)
left side open
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 1300×700 1200×700 1300×700
Weight kg 114 108 105 108
1 each drawer of usable height (left/right) mm − / 120
− / 120
− / 180 93 1200_1500
93 With 6 drawers
93 1300 Workbench with 6 drawers (926,90) (911,95) (902,75) (911,95)
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 1300×700 1200×700 1300×700
Weight kg 132 127 124 127
1 each drawer of usable height (left/right) mm 120 / 120
120 / 120
180 / 180
93 1300_1500
With 3 drawers, 1 door

Workbench, left side 3 drawers,
93 1400 (755,55) (739,45) (731,40) (739,45)
right side 1 cupboard
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 1300×700 1200×700 1300×700
Weight kg 119 113 110 113
1 each drawer of usable height (left/right) mm 120 / −
120 / −
180 / − 93 1400_1500
1 door with height (left / right) mm − / 540
With 2 drawers, 2 doors (without central partition)

Workbench with 2 drawers,
93 1500 (660,10) (641,70) (634,80) (641,70)
2 cupboards / without centre partition
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 1300×700 1200×700 1300×700
Weight kg 108 102 99 102
A large cupboard
1 each drawer of usable height (left / right) mm 120 / 120 93 1500_1500
without
1 door with height (left / right) mm 380 / 380 central partition
96 0030 96 0040
Slotted divider Plain divider
96 1110
93 3910
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i 50
850
100 kg 1500 kg

drawers and doors signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
With 2 drawers, 2 doors

93 1600 (687,70) (670,45) (662,40) (670,45)
2 cupboards and centre partition
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 1300×700 1200×700 1300×700
Weight kg 109 103 100 103
1 each drawer of usable height
(left/right) mm 120 / 120
93 1600_1500
1 each door of height (left / right) mm 380 / 380 With centre
partition
93
With 2 drawers, 2 doors, 1 shelf
Workbench with 2 drawers
93 1700 (865,95) (857,90) (848,70) (857,90)
and 2 cupboards, centre open
Worktop (L×D) mm 2000×700 1900×700 1800×700 1900×700
Weight kg 145 142 139 142
1 each drawer of usable height
93 1700_2000
(left / centre / right) mm 120 / − / 120
1 each door with height (left / centre / right) mm 380 / − / 380
With 4 drawers, 1 door, 1 shelf

Workbench,
left side 3 drawers,
93 1800 (1021,20) (1013,15) (1003,95) (1013,15)
right side 1 drawer and 1 door,
centre open
_2000
Worktop (L×D) mm 2000×700 1900×700 1800×700 1900×700
Weight kg 156 153 150 153 93 1800_2000
1 each drawer of usable height 120 / − / 120

(left / centre / right) mm 120 / − / −
180 / − / −
1 each door with height (left / centre / right) mm − / − / 380

93 1900 (1190,25) (1182,20) (1173,–) (1182,20)
centre part open
Worktop (L×D) mm 2000×700 1900×700 1800×700 1900×700
Weight kg 170 167 164 167
1 each drawer of usable height 120 / − / 120
(left / centre / right) mm 120 / − / 120 93 1900_2000
180 / − / 180
KOMPAKT-L workbenches with TÜV / GS kitemark
93
Practical, well-designed workbenches for precision engineering, electrical and mechanical operations in precision
tool manufacture etc., also for vocational colleges and teaching workshops in the corresponding disciplines.
Individual workbenches (sizes ...L, ...M, ...R) can

be bolted together at the frames thus forming
a solid assembled unit.
The bench top:

50 mm thick, non- Feet:
warping beech marine Made of hollow rectan-
ply, with waterproof gular section steel with
glue; finished with steel height adjustment
clear varnish. screws.
With leg room,

for working
when seated
93
The drawers:
1300 1200 1300 With Delrin 100 low Door:
▶
(1900) ▶
▶ (1800) ▶
▶
(1900) ▶
friction rollers − load Of sheet steel,
700 with pocket on
capacity up to 100 kg.
With slots for drawer inside for drawings.
dividers on the inner With handy slide
faces. handle for safe,
convenient and
quick access.
Size L Size M Size R

= left workbench top = middle workbench = right workbench top
overhangs 100 mm top has no overhang overhangs 100 mm
to the left to the right

50 100 kg 1200 kg
25
850


Mechanic's workbench right side
93 2000 4 drawers, left side open (870,55) (854,45) (846,40) (854,45)
_1500
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 1300×700 1200×700 1300×700
Weight kg 124 119 116 119
1 each drawer of front height mm − / 60 93 2000_1500
− / 100
− / 140
− / 240 Also available with other drawer configurations.
1 height-adjustable shelf (left / right) pieces 1/− Price on request.
With 5 drawers, 1 door, 1 shelf

Mechanic's workbench, left side
93 2100 5 drawers, right side 1 cupboard (1025,80) (1007,40) (999,35) (1007,40)
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 1300×700 1200×700 1300×700
Weight kg 134 128 125 128
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 / −
60 / − 93 2100_1500
60 / −
120 / −
240 / −
Also available with other drawer configurations.
1 door with height (left / right) mm − / 540 Price on request.
1 height-adjustable shelf (left / right) pieces −/1
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i 50
850
25
100 kg 1200 kg

With 9 drawers
Mechanic's workbench
93 2500 (1219,–) (1202,90) (1193,70) (1202,90)
with 9 drawers
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 1300×700 1200×700 1300×700
Weight kg 151 146 143 146
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 / 60
60 / 100 93 2500_1500
60 / 140
120 / 240 Also available with other drawer configurations.
240 / − Prices on request.
93 With 4 drawers, 1 full-width drawer, 1 door

Mechanic's workbench, right side
93 2600 4 drawers, left side 1 cupboard, (1192,55) (1177,60) (1168,40) (1177,60)
underneath 1 full-width drawer
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 1300×700 1200×700 1300×700
Usable area of full-width drawer (W ×D ) mm 1090×520
Weight kg 135 129 126 129
1 each drawer of front height (left / right) mm − / 60
− / 80 93 2600_1500
− / 100
− / 120 Also available with other drawer configurations.
140 Prices on request.
1 door with height (left / right) mm 380 / −

Mechanic's workbench
93 2700 (1483,50) (1475,45) (1466,25) (1475,45)
_2000 with 9 drawers, centre part open
Worktop (L×D) mm 2000×700 1900×700 1800×700 1900×700
Weight kg 195 192 189 192
1 each drawer of front height 60 / − / 60
(left / centre / right) mm 60 / − / 100
93 2700_2000
60 / − / 140
120 / − / 240
240 / − / −
1 height-adjustable shelf Prices on request.
(left / centre / right) pieces −/1/−
With 5 drawers, 1 shelf, 1 door

Mechanic's workbench, left side
93 2800 5 drawers, right side 1 cupboard (1290,30) (1281,10) (1273,05) (1281,10)
centre part open
Worktop (L×D) mm 2000×700 1900×700 1800×700 1900×700
Weight kg 174 170 167 170
1 each drawer of front height 60 / − / −
93 2800_2000
(left / centre / right) mm 60 / − / −
60 / − / −
120 / − / −
240 / − / −
1 door with height (left / centre / right) mm − / − / 540 Prices on request.
1 height-adjustable shelf
(left / centre / right) pieces −/1/1
Continued ▶
Mobile KOMPAKT-L workbenches with TÜV / GS kitemark
▶ Continued
i 50
850
100 kg 1200 kg
Version: Undercarriage is fitted with 2 castors and 2 fixed wheels (100 mm) with solid rubber tyres.
The bench is evenly raised or lowered.
This gives high stability at the point of use combined with ease of transport on 4 wheels.
Undercarriage load capacity up to 400 kg (workbench incl. contents).
The drawers lock automatically so that they do not come open during transport.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, drawers and doors signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.

Size = Worktop length mm 1500
Mobile workbench
93 3050 (1061,45)
with 4 drawers
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700
Weight kg 137
1 each drawer of front height mm − / 60
− / 100
93
− / 140
− / 240
1 height-adjustable shelf pieces 1/− Price on request.
With 3 drawers, 2 doors

Mobile workbench
93 3060 (1092,50)
with 3 drawers and 2 doors
Weight kg 137
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 / −
80 / 140
1 each cupboard with door height mm 380 / 380
With 1 drawer, 1 door

Version:
93 3070 – With integral swing away vice No. 874000_120 and
height adjuster No. 874900.
Mobile fitters workbench with
93 3070 1 drawer and 1 door with (1386,90)
vice and height adjustment unit
Mobile fitters workbench with
93 3080 1 drawer and 1 door without (811,90)
vice and height adjustment unit
Weight kg 127
1 cupboard with door height mm − / 380
96 0030 96 0040
divider
93 3960
96 1325
Continued ▶
Mobile KOMPAKT-L workbenches with TÜV / GS kitemark
▶ Continued
i 1.0
30
850
100 kg 1000 kg

With 1 drawer, 1 or 2 doors, 1 shelf
Mobile workbench
93 3200 (707,25)
with 1 drawer and 1 door
Mobile workbench
93 3210 (801,55)
with 1 drawer and 2 doors 93 3200_1100
Sub-frame (L×D) mm 1030×630 ⌀ 160 mm solid rubber treadless tyres with
parking
Drawer usable area (W×D) mm 490×520 brake
Weight kg 90
1 door with height (left / right) (93 3200) mm − / 380
1 each door with height (left / right) (93 3210) mm 540 / 380
93 1 height-adjustable shelf (left / right) pieces 1/−

93 3200_1100 93 3210_1100
With 3 drawers, with or without door, 1 shelf

Mobile workbench with
93 3220 (807,30)
3 drawers
93 3230 (903,90)
3 drawers and 1 door
Weight kg 98 93 3230_1100

− / 160
− / 240
1 door with height (left / right) (93 3230) mm 540 / −
1 height-adjustable shelf pieces 1/−
93 3220_1100 93 3230_1100
With 4 drawers, with or without door, 1 shelf

93 3240 (884,35)
4 drawers
93 3245 (975,20)
4 drawers and 1 door
Weight kg 98 93 3245_1100

− / 100
− / 140
− / 240
1 door with height (left / right) (93 3245) mm 540 / −
1 height-adjustable shelf pieces 1/− 93 3240_1100 93 3245_1100
96 0130 96 1210 96 1325
Individual components of a KOMPAKT-L workbench with TÜV / GS kitemark
Example: Composition of a GARANT KOMPAKT-L workbench
Workbench tops No. 93 5550 − 93 3580
Drawer units Cabinet

3 open
2
Drawers No. 93 3730 / 3760 4 Cabinet with doors
Base frame 1
The tag numbers make it easier for you to find the individual components on the following pages.
Individual parts of a KOMPAKT-L workbench with TÜV / GS kitemark
25
1 Base frames 93
Suitable for:
Size 600 – 1 drawer block size 600
Size 1030 – 1 each drawer blocks sizes 430 and 600 _600
Size 1200/1L; 1200/1R – 1 drawer block 600 and 1 open block
with recessed bottom size 600
Size 1200/2 – 2 drawer blocks size 600
Size 1800/2 – 2 drawer blocks 600 and 1 open block
with recessed bottom size 600
Colour: Base frame RAL 7035 light grey, powder-coated. _1030
Application: For supporting block units No. 93 4750 − 93 4860.
_1200/1L
_1200/1R _1200/2
_1800/2 _1800/3
Size = Width mm 600 1030 1200/1L 1200/1R 1200/2 1800/2 1800/3

Base frame
93 4700 (81,65) (109,25) (134,55) (134,55) (112,93) (188,03) (140,88)
for workbench
Width×depth×height mm 600×630×200 1030×630×200 1200×630×200 1200×630×200 1200×630×200 1800×630×200 1800×630×200
1 Base frames with undercarriages

Suitable for:
Size 1030 – 1 each drawer blocks sizes 430 and 600
Version: Base frame including undercarriage with 2 castors and 2 fixed wheels
(100 mm ⌀) with solid rubber tyres.
Undercarriage load capacity up to 400 kg (workbench incl. contents).
Colour: Base frame and undercarriage RAL 7035 light grey, powder-coated.
Application: Supports drawer unit shells No. 93 4770 − 93 4860.
Note: For safety reasons, for each drawer of a mobile workbench

an additional individual drawer lock No. 93 4730 must be added!
Size = Width mm 1030 1200/2 1800/3

Base frame with
93 4720 (263,35) (269,10) (362,25) _1200/2
undercarriage
⌀ 100 mm solid rubber treadless tyres
Width×depth×height mm 1030×630×200 1200×630×200 1800×630×200
Continued ▶
Individual drawer lock
For safety reasons every drawer

in a mobile workbench must
be fitted with an individual
safety lock !

▶ Continued
100 kg
1.0
Individual drawer lock

93 Version: This locks the drawer automatically on closing, so that it cannot open accidentally during
transport. The lock is an additional charge item and is factory fitted in the grip handle
when a new drawer is ordered.
Application: For incorporation in the aluminium grip handle of drawers No. 93 3730 and 93 3760.
93 4730
Individual
93 4730 (10,35)
drawer lock
2 Cabinet shell open with 1 recessed or 1 full depth shelf

Suitable for:
93 4750 – For base frame No. 93 4700 size 1200/1L, 1200/1R and 1800/2
93 4770 – For base frame No. 93 4700 size 600, 1030, 1200/2, 1800/3 and
base frame with undercarriage No. 93 4720
Version:
93 4750 – With recessed bottom and one recessed,
height-adjustable shelf for adequate legroom.
93 4770 – With full depth bottom and one recessed 93 4750_600
height-adjustable shelf.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035 powder-coated

Cabinet shell with
93 4750 — (108,79)
recessed bottom
Cabinet shell with
93 4770 (109,71) (141,45)
full depth bottom
Width×depth×height mm 430×630×600 600×630×600
1 height-adjustable shelf pieces - 1
93 4770_600
3 Drawer unit shell without drawers

Suitable for: Base frame No. 93 4700 size 600, 1030, 1200/2, 1800/3 and
base frame with undercarriage No. 93 4720.
Version: Of sheet metal with drawer mountings at 20 mm intervals.
Can be locked centrally with cylinder lock.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035 powder-coated
Note: When fitting out the cabinet with drawers, check that the sum of the heights
of all individual drawers corresponds to the usable height for the cabinet.

Drawer unit shell without
93 4800 (127,08) (129,95)
drawers
Usable height for drawers mm 540 540
suitable drawers No. 93 3730 No. 93 3760 93 4800_600
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
100 kg
1.0
3 Drawer unit shell without drawers, with 1 door

Suitable for: Base frame No. 93 4700 size 600, 1030, 1200/2, 1800/3
and base frame with undercarriage No. 93 4720.
Version: With central locking and cylinder lock. Door can
be locked by GARANT slide handle with cylinder lock.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, door signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.
of all individual drawers corresponds to the usable height for the cabinet.

Drawer unit shell
93 4820 with right hinged door
without drawers or shelves
Drawer unit shell
(185,73) (192,63)
93
93 4830 with left hinged door (185,73) (192,63)
without drawers or shelves
Drawer usable height mm 140 140 93 4820_600
suitable drawers No. 93 3730 No. 93 3760
Usable height of door mm 380 380
suitable shelves − No. 93 3770 / 3775
4 Cabinet shell with cupboard and 1 shelf

Suitable for: Base frame No. 93 4700 and base frame with undercarriage No. 93 4720.
Version: Cabinet shell with 1 cupboard and 1 height-adjustable shelf.
Cupboard can be locked by GARANT slide handle with cylinder lock.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, door signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.

Cabinet shell
93 4850 with right hinged door (219,08) (223,68)
and 1 shelf
Cabinet shell
93 4860 with left hinged door (219,08) (223,68)
and 1 shelf
93 4850_600
Usable height of door mm 540 540
suitable shelves − No. 93 3770 / 3775
Vices and height adjusters can be found in the main catalogue
87 4000
87 1000
▶
▶
87 4100 ▶
▶
▶
▶ 360°
▶
▶
360°
87 1500
87 4300
87 9000
KOMBI workbenches with TÜV / GS kitemark
93
Modular workbenches. These provide a large number of possible variations and can be combined in any arrangement;
the drawers and drawer units can be fitted on the right, left or in the middle. (You will find all individual parts from
No. 93 3550 − 93 3990). The workbenches in the GARANT KOMBI range are particularly suitable for lighter assembly
tasks, repair and inspection work, for mechanical, precision mechanical and electrical workshops, as well as for
training colleges in these sectors.
93 3575
93 3780
93 3605 93 3630 Worktop (50 mm thick):

 Of beech marine ply,  With plastic coating
waterproof glue, (Eluplan) and ABS
clear varnish. veneer on all edges.
Illustration shows workbench No. 93 3370_1500/3B 93 3620

93
with storage shelf No. 93 3605_1500 and
2 side panels for support legs No. 93 3620.
Door: Drawers:
Of sheet metal, with With Delrin 100 low
pocket on inside for friction rollers − load
drawings, and handy capacity up to 100 kg.
slide handle for safe, With slots for drawer
convenient and quick dividers on the inner
access. faces.
The supports can be bolted together Support:

thus forming a solid assembled unit.
Of sheet steel,
canted (80 mm
wide), with cross bracing.

50 400 kg
1.0 850
Colour: Body and support light grey RAL 7035,

Without drawers
Size = Worktop length mm 1000 1500 2000
Universal workbench
93 3250 (269,10) (343,85) (432,40)
with beech marine ply worktop
Universal workbench
93 3255 (289,80) (377,20) (448,50) 93 3250_1500
with Eluplan worktop
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700
800 kg
Weight kg 43.5 56.5 69.5
With rear panel, without drawers

Universal workbench with rear panel
93 3260 (350,75) (435,85) (539,35)
and beech marine ply worktop
Universal workbench with rear panel
93 3265 (370,30) (470,35) (556,60)
and Eluplan worktop
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700
93 3260_1500
Weight kg 50.0 67.0 83.5

Continued ▶
KOMBI workbenches with TÜV / GS kitemark 430 mm wide
▶ Continued
i 1.0
50
850
100 kg

With 2 or 3 drawers in 430 mm wide drawer unit
400 kg
Size = Worktop length mm / model 1000S2A 1000S2C 1500S2A 1500S2C 2000S2A 2000S2C
Universal workbench
93 3270 with drawers (494,50) (561,20) (573,85) (634,80) (662,40) (725,65)
Universal workbench
93 3275 with drawers (520,95) (581,90) (608,35) (668,15) (681,95) (741,75)
and Eluplan worktop
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700 ▶
▶
Drawer unit (W×D×H) mm 430×630×300 430×630×300 430×630×300 430
Usable drawer area (W×D) mm 320×520 320×520 320×520
Weight kg 65.0 68.5 78.0 81.5 91.0 94.5
1 each drawer of front height mm 80 60 80 60 80 60
93 3270_1500S2C
160 80 160 80 160 80
− 100 − 100 − 100
With rear panel and 2 or 3 drawers in 430 mm wide drawer unit

93 Size = Worktop length mm / model 1000S2A 1000S2C 1500S2A 1500S2C 2000S2A 2000S2C 800 kg
Universal workbench
93 3280 with rear panel and drawers (581,90) (645,15) (668,15) (730,25) (772,80) (833,75)
Universal workbench
93 3285 with rear panel and drawers (603,75) (663,55) (701,50) (763,60) (788,90) (848,70)
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700
Drawer unit (W×D×H) mm 430×630×300 430×630×300 430×630×300 ▶
Usable drawer area (W×D) mm 320×520 320×520 320×520 430 ▶
Weight kg 71.5 75.0 88.5 92.0 105.0 108.5

160 80 160 80 160 80
− 100 − 100 − 100 93 3280_1500S2C
With 5, 6 or 7 drawers in 430 mm wide drawer unit

Size = Worktop length mm / model 1000S7A 1000S7B 1000S7H 1500S7A 1500S7B 1500S7H 1000 kg
Universal workbench
93 3290 with beech marine ply worktop (769,35) (836,05) (702,65) (842,95) (909,65) (777,40)
Universal workbench
93 3295 with Eluplan worktop (788,90) (855,60) (724,50) (875,15) (943,–) (810,75)
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700
Drawer unit (W×D×H) mm 430×630×800 430×630×800
Usable drawer area (W×D) mm 320×520 320×520
Weight kg 84.5 87.5 82.5 97.5 100.5 95.5
80 60 80 80 60 80
100 80 100 100 80 100
120 80 120 120 80 120
160 100 360 160 100 360 93 3290_1500S7A
200 140 − 200 140 −
− 200 − − 200 − ▶
430 ▶
With 5, 6 or 7 drawers in 430 mm wide drawer unit

Size = Worktop length cm / model 150S7AB 150S7AH 150S7BH 1000 kg
Universal workbench
93 3300 with beech marine ply worktop (1408,75) (1277,65) (1343,20)
Universal workbench
93 3305 with Eluplan worktop (1443,25) (1308,70) (1376,55)
Drawer unit (W×D×H) mm 430×630×800
Weight kg 142.0 137.0 140.0
1 each drawer of front height (left / right) mm 60 / 60 60 / 60 60 / 60
80 / 60 80 / 80 60 / 80
100 / 80 100 / 100 80 / 100
120 / 80 120 / 120 80 / 120
160 / 100 160 / 360 100 / 360 ▶
430 ▶
200 / 140 200 / − 140 / −
− / 200 − / − 200 / −
▶
93 3300_150S7AH 430 ▶
96 0030
Slotted
divider 96 0040
Plain divider
93 3910 96 1220

Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i 1.0
50
850
100 kg

With 1 drawer in 600 mm wide drawer unit 400 kg

Universal workbench
93 3310 with 1 drawer (437,–) (494,50) (601,45)
Universal workbench
93 3315 with 1 drawer (457,70) (543,95) (617,55) ▶
and Eluplan worktop 600 ▶
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700

Weight kg 59.0 72.0 85.0
93 3310_1500
Supplied with 1 drawer of front height mm 140 140 140
With rear panel and 1 drawer in 600 mm wide drawer unit 800 kg

93
Universal workbench
93 3320 with rear panel and 1 drawer (517,50) (606,05) (708,40)
Universal workbench
93 3325 with rear panel and 1 drawer (539,35) (635,95) (725,65) ▶
600 ▶
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700
Weight kg 65.5 82.5 99.0
Supplied with 1 drawer of front height mm 140 140 140 93 3320_1500
With 2 drawers in 600 mm wide drawer unit 400 kg
Size = Worktop length mm / model 1000/2A 1000/2B 1500/2A 1500/2B 2000/2A 2000/2B
Universal workbench
93 3330 with 2 drawers (515,20) (509,45) (589,95) (586,50) (680,80) (676,20)
Universal workbench
93 3335 with 2 drawers (537,05) (533,60) (623,30) (619,85) (695,75) (692,30)
and Eluplan worktop
▶
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700 600 ▶
Drawer unit (W×D×H) mm 600×630×300 600×630×300 600×630×300
Weight kg 69.0 82.0 95.0
93 3330_1500/2A
160 120 160 120 160 120
With rear panel and 2 drawers in 600 mm wide drawer unit 800 kg
Universal workbench
93 3340 with rear panel and 2 drawers (596,85) (594,55) (685,40) (681,95) (787,75) (783,15)
Universal workbench
93 3345 with rear panel and 2 drawers (618,70) (615,25) (717,60) (714,15) (805,–) (801,55)
with Eluplan worktop ▶
600 ▶
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700
Weight kg 75.5 92.5 109.0
1 each drawer of front height mm 80 120 80 120 80 120 93 3340_1500/2A
160 120 160 120 160 120
For accessories see No. 93 3910−93 3990, 96 0030−96 0180 and No. 96 0900−96 1500
92 0230 96 1460_1
93 3950 92 0240 96 1426

Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i 1.0
50
850
100 kg

Size = Worktop length mm / model 1000/2C 1000/2D 1500/2C 1500/2D 2000/2C 2000/2D
Universal workbench
93 3350 with 3 drawers (585,35) (585,35) (658,95) (658,95) (747,50) (747,50)
Universal workbench
93 3355 with 3 drawers (606,05) (606,05) (692,30) (692,30) (764,75) (764,75)
and Eluplan worktop ▶
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700 600 ▶

Weight kg 73.0 86.0 99.0
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 80 60 80 60 80 93 3350_1500/2C
80 80 80
93 100
80
80 100
80
80 100
80
80
Universal workbench
93 3360 with rear panel, 3 drawers (665,85) (665,85) (753,25) (753,25) (855,60) (855,60)
Universal workbench
and Eluplan worktop
▶
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700 600 ▶
Weight kg 79.5 96.5 113.0
80 80 80 80 80 80
100 80 100 80 100 80
With 4 drawers in 600 mm wide drawer unit

400 kg
Universal workbench
93 3370 with 4 drawers (668,15) (664,70) (742,90) (739,45) (832,60) (829,15)
Universal workbench
93 3375 with 4 drawers (690,–) (686,55) (776,25) (772,80) (848,70) (845,25)
and Eluplan worktop
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700
Drawer unit (W×D×H) mm 600×630×420 600×630×420 600×630×420 ▶
Usable drawer area (W×D) mm 490×520 490×520 490×520 600 ▶
Weight kg 83.5 96.5 109.5

60 80 60 80 60 80
80 100 80 100 80 100
160 120 160 120 160 120
With rear panel and 4 drawers in 600 mm wide drawer unit

800 kg
Universal workbench
Universal workbench
and Eluplan worktop
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700
Usable drawer area (W×D) mm 490×520 490×520 490×520 ▶
600 ▶
Weight kg 90.0 107.0 123.5
60 80 60 80 60 80
80 100 80 100 80 100
160 120 160 120 160 120
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i 1.0
50
850
100 kg

Universal workbench
93 3390 with 5 drawers (745,20) (748,65) (818,80) (822,25) (908,50) (911,95)
Universal workbench
93 3395 with 5 drawers (765,90) (770,50) (852,15) (855,60) (925,75) (929,20)
and Eluplan worktop
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700
Weight kg 92.0 105.0 118.0
600
80 60 80 60 80 60
100 80 100 80 100 80
120 80 120 80 120 80
120 200 120 200 120 200
93
Universal workbench
Universal workbench
93 3405 with rear panel, 5 drawers (847,55) (851,–) (946,45) (951,05) (1032,70) (1037,30)
and Eluplan worktop
Worktop (L×D) mm 1000×700 1500×700 2000×700
Weight kg 98.5 115.5 132.0
600
80 60 80 60 80 60
100 80 100 80 100 80
120 80 120 80 120 80
120 200 120 200 120 200
With 6 or 7 drawers in 600 mm wide drawer unit 1000 kg
Size = Worktop length mm / model 1500/7A 1500/7B 2000/7A 2000/7B

Universal workbench
93 3410 (886,65) (960,25) (976,35) (1049,95)
Universal workbench
93 3415 (921,15) (992,45) (992,45) (1064,90)
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 2000×700
Weight kg 113.0 117.0 126.0 130.0
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 60 60 60
80 60 80 60
100 80 100 80 93 3410_1500/7A
120 80 120 80
160 100 160 100
200 140 200 140
600
200 200
1000 kg
With drawers / cupboard combined in 600 mm wide drawer unit
Size = Worktop length mm / model 1500/T2 1500/T3 2000/T2 2000/T3
Universal workbench
93 3410 (700,35) (738,30) (790,05) (826,85)
Universal workbench
93 3415 (733,70) (771,65) (807,30) (844,10)
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 2000×700
Weight kg 99.0 100.0 112.0 113.0
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 60 60 60
100 100 100 100
160 160 93 3410_1500/T2
1 cupboard with door height mm 540 380 540 380
Height adjustable shelf pieces 1 − 1 − 600

KOMBI workbench with TÜV / GS kitemark 600 mm wide
▶ Continued
i 50 100 kg 1000 kg
1.0 850
Version: Strong steel channel support.

Drawer unit with 720 mm
usable height and central
lock. Fitted with 5 drawers
(single extension). 50 mm
60
thick worktop made of beech
marine ply. 100
Colour: Body and support light grey
RAL 7035, drawers signal blue
Drawer front height in mm:

RAL 5005, powder-coated.
Price on request for other 140
paint finishes.
Application: Drawer unit can be
mounted on right or
left side. 180
93 240
Size = Worktop length mm / model 1500/7S

n
Aktio
Universal workbench
93 3393 1500 mm long, (727,95)
with 5 drawers in a unit
Worktop (L×D×T) mm 1500×700×50
Weight kg 136
1 each drawer of front height mm 60, 100, 140, 180, 240
Divider set 19 pieces for usable drawer area 490×520 mm

Suitable for: For fitting all workbenches and roller cabinets No. 931000 − 93 3900.
Supplied with: 1 moulded plastic insert, 7 pieces No. 96 0130
6 slotted dividers No. 96 0030
12 plain dividers No. 96 0040
not subdivided
1. Drawer 60 mm
3. Drawer 140 mm
5. Drawer 240 mm
2. Drawer 100 mm
4. Drawer 180 mm
Size = Type 1500/4S

n
93 3394 Divider set
19 pieces
90,85 Aktio
Vices and height adjusters can be found in the main catalogue

▶ Continued
i 1.0
50
850
100 kg 1000 kg

With 6 or 7 drawers in 600 mm wide drawer unit

Size = Worktop length mm / model 2M/7A+B 2M/7A+A 2M/7B+B
Universal workbench
93 3410 (1591,60) (1520,30) (1665,20)
_2M/7A+A Universal workbench
93 3415 (1608,85) (1537,55) (1681,30)
Usable drawer area (W×D) mm 490×520 ▶
600 ▶
Weight kg 187.0 183.0 191.0 ▶
600
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 / 60 60 / 60 60 / 60 93 3410_2M/7A+B ▶
80 / 60 80 / 80 60 / 60
100 / 80 100 / 100 80 / 80
120 / 80 80 / 80
160 / 100
200 / 140
120 / 120
160 / 160
200 / 200
100 / 100
140 / 140
93
− / 200 200 / 200
With drawers / cupboard combined in 600 mm wide drawer unit

Size = Worktop length mm / model 2M/7AT2 2M/7AT3 2M/7BT2 2M/7BT3
Universal workbench
93 3410 (1334,–) (1370,80) (1406,45) (1444,40)
Universal workbench
93 3415 (1351,25) (1388,05) (1423,70) (1460,50)
▶
Weight kg 169.0 170.0 173.0 174.0 600 ▶
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 / 60 60 / 60 60 / 60 60 / 60 ▶
600
80 / 100 80 / 100 60 / 100 60 / 100 933410_2M/7AT2 ▶
100 / − 100 / 160 80 / − 80 / 160

120 / − 120 / − 80 / − 80 / −
160 / − 160 / − 100 / − 100 / −
200 / − 200 / − 140 / − 140 / −
200 / − 200 / −
1 cupboard with door height mm − / 540 − / 380 − / 540 380
Height adjustable shelf pieces 1 − 1 −
With 6 or 7 drawers in 600 mm wide drawer unit, and a fold-out vice 360°▶
▶
▶
Version: Forged steel vice No. 874000 size 120 Height adjustable between 25
and 160 mm above the worktop
with fold-out height adjustment.
▶
Size = Worktop length mm / model 1500/7A 1500/7B 2000/7A 2000/7B

Universal workbench
with beech marine ply worktop,
93 3420 (1631,85) (1704,30) (1721,55) (1794,–)
vice and height adjustment
Universal workbench
with Eluplan worktop,
93 3425 (1665,20) (1737,65) (1737,65) (1811,25)
vice and height adjustment ▶
600 ▶
▶
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×700 2000×700 375 ▶
Weight kg 157.0 161.0 170.0 174.0
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 60 60 60 Fold-away
80 60 80 60 vice underneath
100 80 100 80 the bench worktop
120 80 120 80
160 100 160 100
200 140 200 140
200 200

KOMBI workbenches with TÜV / GS kitemark 27×36 E
50 75 kg 100% 1000 kg
1.0 850

Workbench, worktop depth 800 mm with drawer unit 27×36 E

Version: With 1 drawer unit 27×36 E with full extension drawers
and 1 support leg.
▶
Size = Worktop length mm / model 1500/6 1500/7 2000/6 2000/7 1500 ▶
▶
Workbench, 1 support / 800

▶
93 3435 1 drawer unit 27×36 E 1053,40 1128,15 1152,30 1225,90
with beech ply worktop
Workbench, 1 support /
93 3440 1 drawer unit 27×36 E 1091,35 1164,95 1176,45 1250,05
Worktop (L×D) mm 1500×800 2000×800
Weight of the complete workbench kg 145 150 160 165
50 50 50 50
93 1 each drawer of front height mm
75
100
50
75
75
100
50
75
100 75 100 75 93 3620
125 100 125 100 94 2941_700/6
250 150 250 150 For further options see
− 200 − 200 No. 94 2906 − 94 2941.
Workbench, worktop depth 800 mm with drawer units 27×36 E

Version: With 2 drawer units 27×36 E with full extension drawers.
Size = Worktop length mm / model 2000/6 2000/7 2000/67

▶
2000 ▶
Workbench, ▶
800
93 3445 2 drawer unit 27×36 E 1838,85 1987,20 1912,45 ▶
with beech ply worktop
Workbench,
93 3450 2 drawer unit 27×36 E 1863,– 2011,35 1937,75
Drawer units (W×D×H) mm 565×725×800
Weight of the complete workbench kg 210 220 215
1 each drawer of front height (left/right) mm 50 / 50 50 / 50 50 / 50
75 / 75 50 / 50 75 / 50 93 3445_2000/6
100 / 100 75 / 75 100 / 75 For further options
see No. 94 2906 − 94 2941
100 / 100 75 / 75 100 / 75
125 / 125 100 / 100 125 / 100
250 / 250 150 / 150 250 / 150
− 200 / 200 − / 200
Workstations and storage
Practical example:
A practical example of a project handled

by the Hoffmann Group.
Just contact us − we can develop special

solutions for you too.
KOMBI hexagonal workbenches with TÜV / GS kitemark 600 mm wide
i 1.0
50
850
100 kg 2000 kg

drawers and cupboards signal blue RAL 5005 powder−coated.
Two-part worktop.
Tongue and groove joint
with connector clip.
With 6 or 7 drawers per unit

Size = Model
93 3500 Hexagonal workbench
250/7A
(5472,85)
250/7B
(5865,–) 93
Drawer unit W×D×H mm 600×630×800 600×630×800
Usable drawer area W×D mm 490×520 490×520
Weight of the complete workbench kg 455 480
Each unit with drawers of front heights mm 60, 80, 100, 120, 60, 60, 80, 80,
160, 200 100, 140, 200
93 3500_250 / 7B
Supplied as separate parts. Drawer units
With 2 or 3 drawers, 1 cupboard per unit can be placed on the left or the right.
Size = Model 250/7T2 250/7T3

93 3500 Hexagonal workbench (4436,70) (4646,–)
Drawer unit W×D×H mm 600×630×800 600×630×800
Usable drawer area W×D mm 490×520 490×520
Weight of the complete workbench kg 400 420
Each unit with drawers of front heights mm 60, 100 60, 100, 160
Each unit with 1 cupboard of front height mm 540 380
Height adjustable shelf per unit pieces 1 −
Power island for hexagonal workbench

Can also be supplied with narrow 93 3500_250 / 7T3
Version: Made of sheet metal with beech marine ply top. drawer units. Price on request.
Each workplace has 2 sockets 230 V, fully wired.
Additional sockets on request.
Power island for

93 3510 (577,30)
hexagonal workbench
93 3510
Metal edge protector for hexagonal worktop
Version: Edge protector of angle section for hexagonal
worktops of workbench No. 93 3500.
Note: The metal edge protector is a chargeable option for the
hexagonal workbench and is supplied fully fitted with the
workbench. It cannot be retrofitted.
Metal edge protector for

93 3520 (224,25)
hexagonal workbench 93 3520
divider 96 0040
96 0030
96 0130 96 1200

Workbench tops
How to select your optimum worktop:

The universal one: Beech − marine ply
Worktops for general requirements. Of peeled beech veneer, with multiple cross layers, glued, non-
warping and waterproof. The edges are smoothed, the surface is sanded and sealed with clear UV varnish.
Beech marine ply is resistant to sprayed water and to dirt, and largely resistant to oil, grease, solvents and
chemicals. (These do however affect the appearance of the surface).
Optional: With galvanised sheet steel or stainless sheet steel covering.
Plywood core
The robust one: Beech − glued strips

Worktops for heavy work such as in machine tool building or steelwork fabrication. Of solid beech
block board, waterproof glued (with comb profile on the long edges). The edges are smoothed, the
surface is sanded and sealed with clear UV varnish.
Beech wood worktops are resistant to sprayed water and to dirt, and largely resistant to oil, grease,
solvents and chemicals. (These do however affect the appearance of the surface).
93 Optional: With inlaid metal edge protection strip (50×50×4 mm), powder-coated.
Solid wood blocks with comb profile on the long edges
The technical one: Eluplan plastic covering (linoleum covering)

Worktops for assembly, inspection and laboratory work. The surface
consists of a medium-hard covering that is permanently anti-static
and highly wear-resistant, 2 mm thick. A central core of plywood and
a matching bottom face covering ensure a non-warping worktop. The
end faces are provided with a pale grey PVC edge strip, 3 mm thick.
Eluplan worktops are largely resistant to oil, grease, strong acids and
alkalis. (These do however affect the appearance of the surface).
PVC edge strip

3 mm thick Plywood core Plastic covering
2 mm thick
The specialist: Eterlux (melamine / phenolic resin)

Worktops for laboratory (suitable for decontamination) − electronics
optics and office workplaces. The surface consists of a highly
scratch-resistant and heat-resistant covering 2.7 mm thick. A central
core of plywood and a matching bottom face covering ensure a non-
warping worktop. The end faces are provided with a pale grey PVC
edge strip, 3 mm thick. Eterlux worktops are immensely wear-resis-
tant, provide resistance to oil, grease, weak acids and alkalis, and also
heat-resistant for short periods to naked flames and molten solder.
(These do however affect the appearance of the surface).
PVC edge strip
3 mm thick Plywood core Melamine
phenolic resin
covering
2.7 mm thick
Wood and Eluplan are natural products. Variations in colour and discolorations can occur.
Fluctuations in temperature and in atmospheric humidity can lead to variations in shape and dimensions.
Practical example:
On request, we will gladly quote for worktops in special shapes.
Worktops 50 mm thick
Version: Holes are provided on the underside of the worktop for
securing drawer units and support legs (KOMBI range).
Note: Special sizes available on request. Worktop: Worktop:

Up to max. 3,000 mm length and 1,000 mm width 50 mm thick, glued 50 mm thick, like
available as single pieces. beech wood strips, No. 93 3550, but with
clear varnish. additional metal edge
protection on 3 sides.
93 3550 93 3555
Size = Worktop length mm 1000 1200 1300 1500 1800 1900 2000 2500
Worktop of
93 3550 (190,90) (226,55) (247,25) (281,75) (340,40) (357,65) (363,40) (466,90)
glued beech wood strips
Worktop of
93 3555 glued beech wood strips — — — (350,75) — — (456,55) —
with edge protection
Length×depth mm 1000×700 1200×700 1300×700 1500×700 1800×700 1900×700 2000×700 2500×700
Thickness mm 50

Up to max. 3,000 mm length and 1,000 mm width 50 mm thick with 50 mm thick light
plastic coating (Eluplan) grey laminate covering
available as single pieces.
The Eluplan plastic covering is not colour-fast.
No complaints will be accepted for changes in
and ABS edge strip all
round
2.7 mm thick,
(melamine / phenolic
resin) on a plywood
93
colour due to exposure to sun and light. core.
93 3560 / 93 3565 93 3570
Worktop with
93 3560 (177,68) (227,70) (247,25) (265,65) (334,65) (353,05) (339,25) (493,35)
plastic coating (Eluplan)
Worktop (800 mm deep)
93 3565 — — — 308,20 — — 395,60 —
with plastic surface (Eluplan)
Worktop with
93 3570 — — — (303,60) — — (397,90) —
Eterlux surface
Length×depth (93 3560, 93 3570) mm 1000×700 1200×700 1300×700 1500×700 1800×700 1900×700 2000×700 2500×700
Length×depth (93 3565) mm − − − 1500×800 − − 2000×800 −
Thickness mm 50

Up to max. 2,500 mm length and 1,080 mm 50 mm thick, non- 50 mm thick, like
width available as single pieces. warping beech marine No. 93 3550, but with
ply, with waterproof additional 2 mm thick
glue; finished with galvanised sheet steel
clear varnish. covering.
93 3575 / 93 3578 93 3580
Worktop of
93 3575 (156,98) (188,60) (202,98) (231,15) (293,25) (305,90) (320,85) (409,40)
beech marine ply
Worktop (800 mm deep)
93 3578 — — — 267,95 — — 371,45 —
of beech marine ply
Worktop of
93 3580 beech marine ply with — — — (356,50) — — (485,30) —
sheet metal surface
Length×depth (93 3575, 93 3580) mm 1000×700 1200×700 1300×700 1500×700 1800×700 1900×700 2000×700 2500×700
Length×depth (93 3578) mm − − − 1500×800 − − 2000×800 −
Thickness mm 50
Joint connection
Suitable for: Workbench top No. 93 3550 − 93 3580.
Added charge for joint connection

93 3585 (75,90)
(pair of joint strips with Lamello plates)
93 3585
Edging strip
Version:
93 3590 – Of plywood, clear varnish.
Cross-section 90×11 mm. 93 3590
93 3595 – Chipboard core with grey Resopal covering
and edge strip on 3 sides. 93 3595
Cross-section 90×13 mm.
Size = Strip length mm 1000 1200 1300 1500 1800 1900 2000 2500
93 3590 Edging strip (12,42) (13,69) (13,69) (13,69) (16,45) (16,45) (16,45) (31,97)
93 3595 Edging strip (10,29) — — (15,53) — — (20,53) —
KOMBI workbench accessories and individual parts
1.0
Sheet metal shelves

Suitable for: For installation between support legs No. 93 3620 / 3625 / 3627.
Version: Made of folded sheet metal, 25 mm high.
93 3600
Size = for worktop length mm 1000 1500 2000

93 3600 Storage shelf 1- part (41,06) (47,38) (54,40)
93 3605 Storage shelf 2- part (82,11) (94,76) (108,79)
93 Length
Depth 1-part (93 3600)
Depth 2-part (93 3605)
mm
mm
mm
840 1340
315
630
1840

Distributed loading (93 3600) kg 200 150 100 
Distributed loading (93 3605) kg 400 300 200
93 3605
Sheet metal rear panel

Suitable for: For installation between support legs No. 93 3620 / 3625 / 3627.
Version: Made of folded sheet metal, 25 mm high. 
Application: As back wall, modesty board, visual element and
additional strengthening. 93 3610
Note: Fitting a rear panel increases the load capacity

of the workbench by 400 kg.

Size = for worktop length mm 1000 1500 2000
93 3610 Rear panel 1- part (41,06) (47,38) (54,40)

93 3615 Rear panel 2- part (82,11) (94,76) (108,79)
Length mm 840 1340 1840
Height 1-part (93 3610) mm 315
Height 2-part (93 3615) mm 630 93 3615
Support legs
Version: Steel channel, with cross braces.
With 2 threads M10 for optional fitting of height
adjustment screws No. 93 0100 size M10.
93 3625 – Height adjustable at 25 mm intervals from 650 − 950 mm. 93 3620 93 3625
Height adjustable
▶
93 3620 Support leg 800 mm high (56,24)
93 3625 Support leg height adjustable (87,17)

▶
Width x depth mm 80×660

Height (93 3620) mm 800 ▶ ▶
580 580
Height adjustment range (93 3625) mm 650 − 950 ▶ ▶
Clear width Clear width
Continued ▶
KOMBI workbench accessories and individual parts
▶ Continued
1.0
Height adjustable
Recessed support legs
Version: Steel channel, with cross braces.
With 2 threads M10 for optional fitting of height
adjustment screws No. 93 0100 size M10.
Recessed workbench support for free movement
of legs, e.g. in corner situations.
93 3626 – Height adjustable at 25 mm intervals from 650 − 950 mm. 93 3622 93 3626
Note: Because of their reduced stability, recessed support legs

may only be used in combination with support legs
No. 93 3620 / 3625 !
Size = for worktop depth mm 700 800

Recessed support leg
93 3622 800 mm high
Recessed support leg
(65,78)
(95,68)
(68,31)
(97,98)
93
93 3626 height adjustable
Width x depth mm 80×350 / 630 80×350 / 730
Height (93 3622) mm 800 800
Height adjustment range (93 3626) mm 650 − 950 650 − 950
Mobile support leg

Version: Made of folded sheet metal, with cross braces,
wheel ⌀ 125 mm with grey solid rubber treadless tyres.
Size 1 – With fixed wheels
Size 2 – With castors with parking brake and swivel head locking.
Note: For reasons of stability, mobile support legs may only be used in
combination with storage shelf No. 93 3600 / 3605, rear panel
No. 93 3610 / 3615 or stabilising plate No. 93 3628.
Size = Type 1 2
93 3627 Mobile support leg (129,38) (166,18)
Height mm 800 800
Wheel ⌀ mm 125 125
Loading capacity of each support kg 150 150
Stabilising plate for support leg

Version: Made of folded sheet metal.
▶ 110 mm
▶
Application: For additional stabilisation of the support legs.
▶
Supplied with: Screws

Note: The support legs are ready drilled on the inner faces to Assembly example
accept stabilising plates. 110 mm
▶
Stabilising plate
93 3628 (6,96)
for support leg
Side panel for support leg No. 93 3620 / 3625 / 3627

Version: Made of folded sheet metal, with 9×9 mm square holes at 37 mm
intervals for mounting hooks and holders No. 96 1325 − 96 1430
and perforated panel accessories No. 961440 − 961500.
Colour: Signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
(supplied
without
support legs)
Side panel
93 3630 (23,46)
for support leg
Continued ▶
Kombi workbench accessories and individual parts
▶ Continued
1.0
Paper dispenser for support leg No. 93 3620 / 93 3625 / 93 3627

Application: For the additional use of support legs as paper dispensers -
paper wipes ready to hand at the workplace.
(supplied without
Note: Suitable paper wipes can be found under No. 08 9100 / 08 9120 support legs and
in the main catalogue. without paper roll
Paper dispenser for support leg

93 3640 (53,71)
(without paper roll)
Corner worktops for support leg No. 93 3620 / 93 3625

Version:
Size 700 – Size 1000×1000×50 mm with 45° cut-off
to match the 700 mm worktop depth.
Size 800 – Size 1000×1000×50 mm with 45° cut-off
93 to match the 800 mm worktop depth.
Worktop (50 mm thick):
 Of beech marine ply,  With plastic coating
waterproof glue, (Eluplan) and ABS
clear varnish. veneer on all edges.
Size = for worktop thickness mm 700 800 1000

mm
Corner worktop 1000 mm
93 3650 (334,65) (334,65)
beech marine ply
Corner worktop m
93 3655 (374,90) (374,90) 0m
Eluplan − 80
93 3650 700
Supports for corner worktops

Version: Made of folded sheet metal.
Support 800 mm high

93 3660 (22,71)
Height adjustable
for corner worktop
Support, height-adjustable
93 3661 (35,65)
for corner worktop
Height (93 3660) mm 800
Height adjustment range (93 3661) mm 650 − 950
Fixing brackets for bolting to support leg No. 93 3620 / 93 3625

Version: Made of folded sheet metal. 93 3661
Application: For screwing to support legs, the edge support accepts the load of 93 3660
further connection worktops; loading capacity 400 kg distributed.
Supplied with: Screws
Note: 2 pieces = 1 set fixing brackets are required for the corner worktop!
93 3664
Fixing bracket set, 2 pieces
93 3664 (20,93)
for corner worktop
Assembly example
Corner worktop
Fixing brackets Fixing brackets
Stabilising plate
Rear panel
Storage shelves
Support leg
Support leg
Continued ▶
KOMBI workbench individual parts with TÜV / GS kitemark
▶ Continued
100 kg
1.0
Support block with fold-away vice, TÜV / GS kitemark

Version: Made of sheet steel with fold away vice. Underneath is a drawer, lockable
with a cylinder lock. Forged steel vice (No 874000 size 120) with fold away
height adjustment.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, drawer signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.
Application: Vice can be swung up and down, adjusted for height above the worktop
between 25 and 160 mm and rotated through 360°.
Support
93 3700 (805,–)
complete with fold away vice
W×D×H mm 375×630×800
Power unit
Version: Casing of sheet steel with 2 light-current sockets and 1 CEE power socket
93
400 V / 16 A prewired, and 1 compressed air quick-release socket.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, front panel blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.
93 3710 Power unit (340,40)

W×D×H mm 275×630×800
Power block supports with hose or cable roll-up drum

Version: Sheet steel body with slots to accept modules No. 92 0225.
Connections to the modules are routed through knock-outs in the back panel.
Hose and cable roll-up drum is secured with bolts to the floor of the cabinet.
Colour: Body and modules light grey RAL 7035,
front panel signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
Size = 93 3712 Width×depth×height Description Rated power

Type Type
Power block
support mm 93 3712_240V 93 3712_LUFT
2 three-pin sockets
with cover flaps
240V (593,40) 275×630×800 240 V / 16 A AC
1 cable roll-up drum
10 m long
2 three-pin sockets
240 V / 16 A AC
with cover flaps
LUFT (576,15) 275×630×800 3/8″ compressed air socket,
1 hose roll-up drum
up to 10 bar
8 m long
2 three-pin sockets
with cover flaps
240 V / 16 A AC
1 hose roll-up drum
240V/LUFT (940,70) 430×630×800 3/8″ compressed air socket,
8 m long
up to 10 bar
1 cable roll-up drum
10 m long
93 3712_240V/LUFT
For accessories see No. 92 0225
Continued ▶
KOMBI workbench individual parts with TÜV / GS kitemark 430 mm wide
▶ Continued
100 kg
1.0
Drawer unit shell 430 mm wide with TÜV / GS kitemark

Version: Sheet metal cabinet with drawer mountings at 20 mm intervals.
Drawers can be locked centrally by the cylinder lock.
of all individual drawers correspond to the usable height for the cabinet.
Size = Usable height mm 240 720

Cabinet for drawer units
93 3720 (98,67) (156,98)
without drawers
W×D×H overall mm 430×630×300 430×630×800
93 3720_240 93 3720_720
93
Size = Usable height mm 720T 720T2 720T3

Cabinet for drawer units
93 3720 (223,10) (242,65) (228,28)
without drawers
W×D×H overall mm 430×630×800
Usable height for drawers mm - 160 320
1 cupboard with door height mm 720 540 380 93 3720_720T 93 3720_720T3
Drawers with TÜV / GS kitemark

Suitable for: Drawer unit cabinet No. 93 3720
Version: Sheet metal drawers with aluminium grip handles and labelling strips.
Smooth-running drawers, Delrin 100 wheels ⌀ 28 mm with very good
damping characteristics and silent opening − 90 % extendable.
Inner faces have slots for dividers.
Note: Drawers 360 mm to accept suspension files.

Sliding drawer
93 3730 (66,24) (66,24) (66,24) (66,24) (69,69) (69,69) (69,69) (71,53)
with runners
Shell height mm 40 40 80 80 120 120 160 250
Working height mm 45 65 85 105 125 145 185 345
Usable area (W×D) mm 320×520
Pull-out / fixed shelves

Suitable for: Shells No. 933720, 933740 and 934820 − 934860, 430 mm wide
(only for cabinets with doors).
Version: Smooth-running sheet metal drawers, Delrin 100 wheels ⌀ 28 mm
with very good damping characteristics and silent opening −
can be pulled out 90%.
93 3732
Usable area (W×D)

Pull-out shelf
93 3732 (65,78) 325× 540 mm
with runners
Fixed shelf
93 3734 (21,39) 415× 590 mm
with 4 brackets 93 3734
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
100 kg
1.0
Drawer units 430 mm wide complete with drawers or door with TÜV / GS kitemark
Version: Shell as described under No. 95 3720.
Drawers as described under No. 93 3730.
Size = Model S2A S2C S7A S7B S7H

Drawer unit
93 3740 complete with drawers (233,45) (295,55) (557,75) (625,60) (493,35)
(cupboard)
Overall height mm 300 300 800 800 800
Usable height of drawers / door mm 240 / − 240 / − 720 / − 720 / − 720 / −
Weight
1 each drawer of front height
kg
mm
22
80
25
60
50 53
60
48
60 60
93
160 80 80 60 80
− 100 100 80 100
− − 120 80 120
− − 160 100 360
− − 200 140 −
− − − 200 −
933740_S2C 933740_S7A
Size = Model S7T2 S7T3

Drawer unit
93 3740 complete with drawers (363,40) (422,05)
(cupboard)
Usable height of drawers / cupboard mm 160 / 540 320 / 380
Weight kg 42 43
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 60
100 100
− 160
1 cupboard with door height mm 540 380
Number of storage shelves No. 93 3734 pieces 1 −
933740_S7T2 933740_S7T3
Base 430 mm wide

Suitable for: Workbenches No. 93 3290 − 93 3305 and drawer units No. 93 3712_240/LUFT
430 mm
and No. 93 3720 − 93 3740.
Version: Made of sheet steel.
Size = Height mm 50 100

Base for drawer units
93 3742 (42,55) (47,15)
430×630 mm
96 0040
96 0030
96 1180
96 0120
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
100 kg
1.0
Drawer unit shell 600 mm wide with TÜV / GS kitemark

Version: Of sheet steel with drawer mountings at 20 mm intervals.
Can be locked centrally with cylinder lock.
doors signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
Note: When fitting the cabinet with drawers, check that the sum of the heights
of all individual drawers correspond to the usable height for the cabinet.
When fitting cabinet variants with doors, check the heights of the drawers
within the cabinet.
Size = Usable height mm 240 360 480

Drawer unit shell
93 3750 (100,05) (108,10) (116,73)
without drawers
W×D×H overall mm 600×630×300 600×630×420 600×630×540 93 3750_360 93 3750_720
93 Size = Usable height

Drawer unit shell
mm 720
(164,45)
720T
(229,43)
720T2
(247,25)
93 3750 without drawers
Usable height for drawers mm 720 − 160
1 cupboard with door height mm − 720 540
Size = Usable height mm 720T3

Drawer unit shell
93 3750 (232,30)
without drawers
Usable height for drawers mm 320
1 cupboard with door height mm 380 93 3750_720T 93 3750_720T2
Drawers with TÜV / GS kitemark

Suitable for: Drawer unit shell No. 93 3750 and 93 3820.
Version: Sheet metal drawers with aluminium grip handles and labelling strips.
Smooth-running drawers, Delrin 100 wheels ⌀ 28 mm with very good
damping characteristics and silent opening − 90 % extendable.
Inner faces of drawers have slots for dividers.
Colour: Signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated. 93 3760
Size = Front height mm 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 240 300 360
Sliding drawer (74,98) (74,98) (74,98) (74,98) (78,89) (78,89) (78,89) (78,89) (78,89) (83,49) (83,49)
93 3760 with runners
Shell height mm 40 40 80 80 120 120 160 160 200 200 200
Usable height mm 45 65 85 105 125 145 165 185 225 285 345
Pull-out / fixed shelves

Suitable for: Cabinet No. 93 3750 and 93 3820 (only for cabinets with doors).
Version: Smooth-running sheet metal shelves, Delrin 100 wheels ⌀ 28 mm with very
good damping characteristics and silent opening − 90 % extendable. 93 3770
Pull-out shelf (68,77)

93 3770 with runners
Usable area (W×D) 490×540 mm
Fixed shelf (23,12)
93 3775 with 4 brackets
Usable area (W×D) 585×590 mm 93 3775
divider 96 0040
96 0030
96 0130 96 1200
Continued ▶
▶ continued
100 kg
1.0
Drawer units 600 mm wide complete with drawers or door with TÜV / GS kitemark
Version: Sheet metal cabinet with drawer mountings at 20 mm intervals. Can be locked
centrally with cylinder lock. Doors of sheet metal, separately lockable.
Sheet metal drawers with wide aluminium grip handles and labelling strips − can be
pulled out 90 %. Inner faces of drawers have slots for dividers. 93 3780_1A
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, drawers and doors signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.
Size = Type 1A 1B 2A 2B 2C 2D 3A
Drawer unit
93 3780 complete with (170,20) (238,05) (250,70) (244,95) (317,40) (317,40) (403,65)
drawers (door)
Usable height of drawers / cupboard mm 140 / − 140 / − 240 / − 240 / − 240 / − 240 / − 360 / −
Weight kg 16 19 26 26 30 30 40 93 3780_2A
1 each drawer of front height mm 140 60 80 120 60 80 60
− 80 160 120 80 80 60
− − − − 100 80 80
− − − − − − 160
Size = Type 3B 4C 4D 7A 7B 7T2 7T3 93
Drawer unit
93 3780 complete with (397,90) (478,40) (483,–) (603,75) (676,20) (416,30) (453,10)
drawers (door)
Usable height of drawers / cupboard mm 360 / − 480 / − 480 / − 720 / − 720 / − 160 / 540 320 / 380
Weight kg 40 49 49 66 70 52 53
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
80 80 60 80 60 100 100
100 100 80 100 80 − 160
120 120 80 120 80 − −
120 200 160 100 − −
− − 200 140 − − 93 3780_7A
− − − 200 − −
1 cupboard with door height mm − − − − − 540 380
Height adjustable shelf piece − − − − − 1 −
KOMBI sheet steel tool cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark

100 kg
1.0
Version: Casing of sheet metal. The units are designed with drawer runner mountings
at 20 mm intervals. With sheet metal cover plate, anti-roll lip on 3 sides and
ribbed rubber top. Centrally lockable drawers, inner faces of drawers have slots
for dividers. Drawer extend lock − only one drawer can be opened at a time;
prevents tipping over.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, drawers and doors signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.
Size = Cabinet model W7A W7B W7T2 W7T3 W9A W9B W9T2 W9T4
Sheet metal (687,70) (756,70) (487,60) (526,70) (747,50) (956,80) (547,40) (683,10)
93 3810 tool cabinet 93 3810_W7B
Overall height including cover mm 830 1030
Drawer usable height mm 720 720 160 320 920 920 180 360
Door usable height mm − − 540 380 − − 720 540
Weight kg 72 76 55 57 83 95 61 73
1 each drawer of front height mm 60 60 60 60 60 60 80 60
80 60 100 100 80 60 100 80
100 80 − 160 120 60 − 100
120 80 − − 160 80 − 120
160 100 − − 200 80 − −
200 140 − − 300 100 − −
− 200 − − − 120 − −
− − − − − 160 − −
− − − − − 200 − −
1 cupboard with door height mm − − 540 380 − − 720 540
Number of storage shelves No. 93 3775 piece − − 1 − − − 1 1
93 3810_W7T2
For locking systems see No. 96 0000 − 96 0024

96 0020
SECURITY CARD
96 0000
Barrel insertion and removal tool
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
100 kg
1.0
Tool cabinet frames

Suitable for: Drawers No. 93 3760.
Version: As described under No. 93 3810.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, doors signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
Note: When fitting the cabinet with drawers, check that the sum of the heights
of individual drawer fronts corresponds to the usable height for the cabinet.
When fitting out cabinet variants with doors, check the heights of the drawers 93 3820_W7
within the cabinet.
Size = Cabinet model W7 W7T2 W9 W9T2 W9T4

Tool cabinet frame
93 3820 (251,85) (324,30) (303,60) (380,65) (373,75)
93 Footprint (W×D)
without drawers
mm 600×630
Overall height including cover mm 830 1030
Usable height for drawers mm 720 160 920 180 360
Usable height cupboard with door mm − 540 − 720 540
Weight kg 31 39 38 45 44
93 3820_W7T2
Base 600 mm wide

Suitable for: Workbenches No. 93 3410 − 93 3415 and drawer units No. 93 3750 − 93 3820.
Size = Height mm 50 100

Base
93 3832 (45,43) (49,91)
for drawer units 600×630 mm
93 3832
KOMBI sheet steel roller cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark

100 kg
1.0
Version: Casing of sheet steel with 2 ball-bearing castors and 2 ball-bearing fixed
wheels with solid rubber tyres, ⌀ 100 mm (with parking brake). Ribbed rubber
top, anti-roll lip on 4 sides, and pushing handle. Central locking. The drawers
lock automatically so that they do not come open during transport.
Size 520; 720 – Cabinet without drawers, for suitable drawers see No. 93 3760.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, drawers signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
Note: Size 520, 720 are supplied in combination with drawer No. 93 3760,
automatically including individual drawer locking. 93 3900_720
Size = Usable height mm / Number of drawers 520 720 520/5 720/6

Sheet metal
93 3900 (409,40) (466,90) (790,05) (924,60)
roller cabinet
_720/6
Usable height mm 520 720 520 720
Usable drawer area (W×D) mm 490×520 Individual locking
Weight kg 35 39 71 84
Carrying capacity of top tray kg 100
1 each drawer of front height mm − − 60 60
80 80
100 100
120 120
160 160 93 3900_720/6
200
Continued ▶
Power track configuration
We will gladly configure the power tracks to your requirements. Compressed air and electrical accessories
Price on request. can be found in the main catalogue part 0.
08 0240
08 1145
08 0250
KOMBI workbench accessories
1.0
Power tracks
Version: With 2 light-current sockets (230 V) fully wired and pre-drilled
for the user to install 2 quick-release compressed air sockets.
93
Note: With screw-on base for screwing on to the workbench surface.

Not suitable for mounting between support columns.
Size = for workbenches with worktop length mm 1200 1300 1500 1800 1900 2000
Power track
93 3910 (118,45) (118,45) (118,45) (129,38) (129,38) (129,38)
of sheet steel
Height above workbench×depth mm 210×75
Power block
Version: With 2 light-current sockets (230 V) fully wired and 1 quick-release compressed
air socket. For screwing to workbench tops.
Power block
93 3920 (109,71)
of sheet steel
93 3920
W×D×H mm 105×105×330
PC bracket
Version: Of steel hollow section, adjustable for height and width.
For fitting underneath worktops.
Adjustment range 390 to 500 mm
Colour: Silver
Application: For space-saving accommodation of the PC underneath Upright installation of
the worktop (also reduces the exposure to dirt). PC tower unit
Permits unrestricted legroom.
Horizontal installation
of desktop PC unit
93 3922 PC bracket (108,10) Adjustment range 135 to 245 mm
Continued ▶
Installation example: Attachments to support columns
Pair of brackets 3 12 Equipment track

11
Cross braces 2 Lighting unit
Shelf with
steel hoops Add-on cabinet
5
6
Support columns pair 1
4 Perforated rear panel
Monitor stand 10 8 Storage Support columns pair 1

container rack
Swivel arm 9 7
Storage shelves
6 Power tracks
The tag numbers make it easier for you to find the individual components:
System workplace components No. 92 0205 − 92 0278 KOMBI workbench components No. 93 3925 − 93 3990
93 KOMBI workbench accessories
1.0
1 Tubular steel support columns
▶
Version: Pair of support columns of steel hollow section 2 mm thick.
Insertion slots at 50 mm intervals on the front and rear as well as threaded
sockets on the front and inside for holding other modules / components
(No. 92 0205 − 92 0255, 92 0275 and 92 0280 / 92 0285).
93 3925 Size 1365; 1443 – Suitable for mounting pair of brackets 93 3940.
93 3926 Size 1365/M; 1443/M – Suitable for mounting pair of brackets 93 3940.
Application:
93 3925 – For screwing to workbench tops with lengths 1000, 1500 or 2000 mm.
93 3926 – For fitting components on both sides, only applicable as a central support. H
Note: Fit at spacings of 920 mm, 1420 mm or 1920 mm!
Size = Overall height (H) mm 481 962 1365 1443

93 3925 Pair of support columns (51,52) (76,82) (93,84) (97,52)
▶
maximum configuration of
perforated panels No. 93 3944/3946 pieces 1 2 3 3 93 3925
max. 240 mm
Size = Overall height (H) mm 481/M 962/M 1365/M 1443/M
93 3926 Central support column (57,50) (82,80) (99,82) (103,50) 93 3926

maximum configuration of
perforated panels No. 93 3944/3946 pieces 1 2 3 3
2 Cross bracing for support columns

Version: Steel hollow section struts for bolting between support columns No. 93 3925 /
3926 for stabilisation. They are required if no perforated panel is fitted.
Size = Length mm 1000 1500 2000

Cross bracing
93 3930 (15,87) (20,30) (24,61) 93 3930
for support columns
Height×length mm 110×920 110×1420 110×1920
3 Pair of brackets for support columns No. 93 3925 / 3926 /_1365 / _1443
Version: Sturdy tubular steel design. Fitted in pairs, to carry the lighting
unit No. 92 0260 and equipment track No. 92 0265.
Pair of brackets
93 3940 (54,40)
for support columns 93 3940
Projection mm 600
Continued ▶
KOMBI workbench accessories
▶ Continued
1.0
4 Perforated panels □ 9×9 mm in a 37 mm grid

Version: Of sheet steel, for well arranged tool storage.
Perforated panel in double-sided version can
accept components on either side independently.
Application: Fir fitting between support columns.
93 3944
Size = Type 1000 1500 2000
Perforated panel of sheet steel
93 3944 (36,46) (54,86) (74,75)
single-sided
Perforated panel of sheet steel
93 3946 (72,91) (109,71) (149,50)
double-sided
W×D×H mm 920×30×481 1420×30×481 1920×30×481
Safe working load kg 100 100 100
Intervals Square holes 9×9 mm, grid 37 mm.
Weight (93 3944) kg 6 9 12
Weight (93 3946) kg 12 18 24
Perforated rear panels □ 9×9 mm in a 37 mm grid 93

Version: Pair of support columns of steel tube 60×40×2 mm.
Insertion slots at 50 mm intervals on the front and the rear
as well as threaded sockets on the front for holding other
modules / components (No. 92 0205 − 92 0240, 92 0275).
Perforated sheet steel panel between the columns.
Application: For screwing to worktops of lengths 1000, 1500 and 2000 mm.
Supplied with: 40 40
93 3950 – Consisting of 1 pair support columns + 1 perforated panel
▶ ▶
▶ ▶
93 3955 – Consisting of 1 pair support columns + 2 perforated panels
Size = Overall length mm 1000 1500 2000

Perforated rear panel
93 3950 481 mm high (pair of support (86,94) (103,96) (125,35)
columns + 1 perforated panel)
Perforated rear panel
93 3955 962 mm high (pair of support (148,35) (185,73) (224,83)
columns + 2 perforated panels)
Overall height (93 3950) mm 481 481 481
maximum load capacity kg 200 200 200 93 3955
5 Top cabinets for support columns No. 93 3925

Version: Cabinet of sheet steel with double rear wall (dust protection).
Inner sides perforated with square holes 9×9 mm on a 37 mm grid.
Door swings forward horizontally to open.
For attachment between support columns No. 93 3925.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, doors signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
Size = Length mm 1000 1500 2000

93 3960 Add-on cabinet (493,35) (501,40) (514,05)
W×D×H mm 920×230×481 1420×230×481 1920×230×481
Usable area (W×D×H) mm 880×150×440 1380×150×440 1880×150×440
Load capacity kg 140 120 100
93 3960
Installation example
▶
Add-on cabinet
93 3960
Support columns
▶
860
Perforated 93 3925
panel
93 3944
481
Back wall
93 3610
▶
Support leg Frame suitable for wall-mounting.

93 3620 ▶ 230 ▶
▶ 445
▶
Continued ▶
KOMBI workbench accessories for the packing table
▶ Continued
6 Storage shelves for the packing table
Version: Sheet steel, with galvanised steel hoops. 2.0
For attachment to support columns No. 93 3925.
Colour: RAL 7035 light grey powder-coated,
hoops hot-dip galvanised.
Size = Length mm 1000 1500 2000

93 3970 Sheet steel shelf with steel hoops (111,78) (146,05) (166,75)
Usable area W×D mm 855×300 1355×300 1855×300
Assembly height mm 365
Hoop ⌀ / height mm 8 / 330
Number of steel hoops piece 4 5 6 93 3970
Load capacity, evenly distributed kg 25 25 25
Roller dispenser for the packing table

Version: Mountings of sheet steel, with fastenings. 2.0
Tubular steel cross-rail with roll restraints.
Colour: RAL 7035 light grey powder-coated.
93 Size = Length
93 3980 Roller dispenser for packing table
mm 1500
(124,20)
2000
(127,08)
Maximum roll width mm 1130 1630
Cross rail ⌀ mm 40 40
93 3980
Cutter for the packing table
Version: Sturdy cutter head with replaceable circular blade for accident
prevention, cuts in both directions. The cutter slides are positively
mounted on roller bearings on a ground shaft (very low resistance).
A guide rail gives additional stability to the cutter slides.
Colour: RAL 3003, no other paint finishes available.
Application: For cutting corrugated card, paper, film and foam film
up to 10 mm thick.
93 3990 Cutter for packing table (496,80)

W×D×H mm 1225×210×200 93 3990
Cut width mm 1000
Installation example: KOMBI workbench as packing table

KOMBI workbenches are "quick-change artists".
A comprehensive range of accessories provides a solution for every requirement.
Sheet steel shelf

93 3970
Special accessories on request:

Perforated panel
93 3944
Roller containers
Support columns for materials or
93 3925 waste
Cutter
93 3990
Workbench top
93 3575
Drawer unit
93 3780
Roller cabinets
for packets
Support leg
93 3620
Roller dispenser
93 3980
Sheet steel workbenches with TÜV / GS kitemark
For training and use by all vocations in the craft and industry sectors. Worktop:
40 mm thick beech
marine ply, finished
with clear varnish.
The frame:
Welded sheet steel casing,
with central locking and
PVC floor pads.
The door:
Sheet metal door with
plastic grip, opening angle
180° and self-closing
hinges.
Paint finish: Body: RAL 7035 light grey powder-coated.

Fronts available in:
The drawers:
With Delrin low-friction
93
RAL 5018 turquoise blue, rollers and load capacity
RAL 7016 anthracite grey, up to 100 kg.
RAL 5005 signal blue, powder-coated.
No other paint finishes are available.

40 100 kg 700 kg
20
1.5 850
Colour: Body RAL 7035,

Fronts available in: RAL 5005 signal blue,
RAL 5018 turquoise blue,
RAL 7016 anthracite grey powder-coated.
Optional accessories: See No. 93 4180 for suitable storage shelves.
ion
93 4100 Workbench
(556,60) Akt
with 2 drawers and 2 swing doors
Drawer usable area (W×D) mm 490×520 93 4100
Weight kg 81

ion
93 4110 Workbench
(611,80) Akt
with 4 drawers and 1 swing door
Weight kg 92
180 / − 93 4110
180 / −
1 each cupboard with door height mm − / 360

ion
93 4120 Workbench
(492,20) Akt
with 1 drawer and 2 swing doors
Weight kg 76
93 4120
* Only valid for indicated colours, special colours not possible.

Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i 40 100 kg
20
1.5 850
700 kg
Colour: Body RAL 7035, fronts available in:
RAL 5005 signal blue, RAL 5018 turquoise blue,

ion
Akt
Workbench
93 4130 (576,15)
Weight kg 80
1 each drawer of front height mm 180 / − 93 4130
180 / −
180 / −
One door of front height mm − / 540
93 900 kg
ion
Akt
Workbench
93 4140 (715,30)
Weight kg 113
1 each drawer of front height 180 / − / −
mm 180 / − / −
180 / − / −
93 4140
One door of front height mm − / − / 540
900 kg
ion
Akt
Workbench
93 4150 (737,15)
Weight kg 113
1 each drawer of front height mm 180 / − / 180
1 each cupboard with door height mm 360 / 540 / 360
93 4150
900 kg
ion
Akt
Workbench
93 4160 (755,55)
Weight kg 117
1 each drawer of front height mm − / 180 / −
− / 180 / −
− / 180 / −
1 each cupboard with door height mm 540 / − / 540 93 4160
93 3910 93 3925

Continued ▶
Sheet steel workbench with TÜV / GS kitemark
▶ Continued
i 1.5
40
850
20
100 kg 900 kg
Colour: Body RAL 7035, fronts available in:

RAL 5005 signal blue; RAL 5018 turquoise blue;

ion
Akt
Workbench
93 4170 (814,20)
Drawer usable area (W×D) mm 490×520 93 4170
Weight kg 122
1 each drawer of front height mm − / 180 / 180
− / 180 / −
− / 180 / −
1 each cupboard with door height mm 540 / − / 360
Version: Of sheet steel, capacity of up to 100 kg.

Fits behind 540 mm high doors and in the open centre part. 93
No other paint finishes available.
ion
93 4180 Fixed shelf with 4 brackets (25,19) Akt 93 4180
Usable surface (width×depth) mm 515×590
Work table with 1500 mm top length

30 250 kg
850
Version: Worktop made of 30 mm thick, non-warping beech marine ply,

waterproof glued and with UV finish colourlessly varnished.
Base of bolted rectangular tubular frame (30×30 mm), with
plastic floor pads.
Colour: Base frame RAL 7035 light grey powder-coated.
No special paint finishes available.
ion
93 4190 Work table (295,55) Akt
Weight kg 30
Folding workbenches
Version: Sturdy, non-warping marine ply worktop, waterproof glued.
Worktop with metal edge protection strip on all sides
(shock/splinter-proof ).
Frame of steel hollow section with centre brace.
Workbench folds away for transport (no loose parts).
No special paint finishes are available.
Size = Worktop length mm 1000 1200

Folding
93 4195 206,43 247,25
installation workbench Easy to transport
Worktop (L×D×thickness) mm 1000×700×30 1200×700×40 when folded;
just unfold the legs to
Height of the workbench mm 820 830 set it up.
Weight kg 36 42
96 1050 96 1110 96 1040 96 1030

Configuration examples − Tool cabinets
94
Range overview − Tool cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark
Advantages:
Knock-out holes:
 Clearly arranged The tops of Group 94 cabinet shells
 Space-saving (1 cabinet with 9 drawers offers a storage space are fitted with 4 knock-out holes.
of approx. 3.3 m2 in a footprint of approx. 0.5 m2) They make it easier to attach bank
 High load capacity of drawers (up to 200 kg) tops or top-mounted cabinets.
 Protected storage
Version:
Casing:
 Drawer mountings at 25 mm intervals
 Cabinet can be locked centrally (cylinder lock)
 Accepts locking systems − mechanical and electronic.
The lock plate with cylinder lock or a slide handle permits
easy retrofitting of the GARANT electronic locking system.
 Anti-tilt device means that only 1 drawer can be open
at a time. (The cabinet is largely secured against tipping).
Drawer:
 Bottom has holes on a 17 mm grid
 Walls slotted on the inside all round at 17 mm pitch
 Drawer fronts have extruded aluminium pull grips.
(Labelling strips and protective film are supplied.)
 Non-traversing differential runners have been fitted since August 2008.
This allows full extension of drawers of all front heights (from 50 mm).
 The load capacities can be selected to suit individual storage requirements
(75 kg and 200 kg). Technical changes introduced in August 2008 mean that
shells and drawers from that date are not compatible with those from earlier dates.
wers
All dra tendable
e x
fully
Available cabinet types:
Dividing units
Usable drawer area
Cabinet type Variants Page 94
Base area
27×36 E Tool cabinet

80 –
W×D 459×612 mm Auxiliary cabinet
82
W×D 565×725 mm Roller cabinet
H = 800 H =1000
82 –
36×27 E 83
W×D 612×459 mm Auxiliary cabinet and
W×D 717×595 mm 95 –
99
Tool cabinet 82 –
36×36 E Auxiliary cabinet 86
W×D 612×612 mm Drawer / shelf and
W×D 717×725 mm combination unit 95 –
(incl. racking ladder) 99
H =700 H = 800 H =1000 H =1150 H =1325 H =1450 H =1625
88 –
54×27 E 89
Tool cabinet
W×D 918×459 mm and
Roller cabinet
W×D 1024×572 mm 95 –
99
H =1000 H =1450
90 –
Tool cabinet
54×36 E 91
Drawer / shelf
W×D 918×612 mm and
combination unit
W×D 1024×725 mm 95 –
(incl. racking ladder)
99
H =1000 H =1325
36 E
▶ ▶
Tool cabinet
78×36 E Corner cabinet
92 –
W×D 1326×612 mm Drawer / shelf
99
W×D 1434×725 mm combination unit
(incl. racking ladder)
H =1000 H =1325
Note: Accessories can be found on pages 140 to 149.
Tool cabinet shell with TÜV / GS kitemark 27×36 E
i
100%
1.2
Suitable for: Drawers No. 94 2926 / 94 2931.

Version: For drawer runner mountings at 25 mm intervals. Cabinet can be locked centrally.
The lock plate with cylinder lock allows conversion to the GARANT electronic
locking system. An anti-tilt device prevents more than one drawer being
opened at a time.
Note:  When fitting out the cabinet with drawers, check that the sum of the heights
 In August 2008 the drawer cabinet and racking range was redesigned.
The old and new versions are not compatible with each other.
Size = Usable height of cabinet mm 700 900

Tool cabinet frame
94 2906 27×36 E (284,05) (319,70)
without drawers
Weight kg 39 42
Accessories 27×36 E
Suitable for: Tool cabinet frames No. 94 2906, 94 2941 and 94 2951.
Version:
94 94 2910 – With anti-roll lip on 3 sides, black (H = 25 mm)
including ribbed rubber coating.
Width×depth
mm 94 2910
Sheet steel worktop
94 2910 27×36 E 84,87 565×725
with anti-roll lip on 3 sides
Worktop of laminated wood 94 2915
94 2915 27×36 E 73,14 565×725
approx. 15 mm thick
Worktop of ribbed rubber
94 2920 27×36 E 19,90 565×725
3 mm thick 94 2920
Drawers with TÜV / GS kitemark 27×36 E

Suitable for: Tool cabinet frame No. 94 2906.
Version: Base perforated at 17 mm intervals, slotted walls all round the inside
(17 mm intervals). Drawer front with aluminium handle strip.
94 2926 – Full extension drawers 100 % extendable, load capacity 200 kg.
94 2931 – Full extension drawers 100 % extendable, load capacity 75 kg.
94 2931

Full extension
94 2926 27×36 E — (126,50) (130,53) (136,28) (141,45) (159,28) (170,20) (185,15)
drawer 200 kg
Full extension
94 2931 27×36 E (80,50) (83,26) (85,10) (86,25) (92,46) (100,97) (103,50) (114,31)
drawer 75 kg
Usable height (94 2926) mm − 54 79 104 129 179 229 279
Usable height (94 2931) mm 36 61 86 111 136 186 236 286
Shell height mm 33 52 77 77 127 177 227 277
Weight (94 2931) kg 7.8 8.6 9.3 9.4 10.4 11.6 12 14
Bases 27×36 E
Suitable for: Tool cabinets No. 94 2906, 94 2941 and 94 2951.
Version: Of sheet steel, 50 mm high, set back 30 mm in front.
Colour: Standard light grey RAL 7035 powder-coated.
Width×depth
mm
Standard base
94 2935 27×36 E 48,19 565×695 94 2935
50 mm high
Continued ▶
Tool cabinet with TÜV / GS kitemark 27×36 units
▶ Continued
i
100%
1.2
Version: Cabinet as described under No. 94 2906.

Drawers as described under No. 94 2926 / 2931.
Usable area of drawers 459×612 mm.
wers
All dra tendable
Colour: Body RAL 7035 light grey,
Drawers RAL 5005 signal blue powder-coated. e x
fully
Note: When lifting and transporting the cabinet, make sure

the drawers are well secured within the casing.
Size = Usable height mm / Number of drawers 700/6 700/7 900/7

Tool cabinet
94 2941 27×36 E 770,50 846,40 916,55
_700/6 Overall height mm 800 800 1000
Footprint (W×D)
Weight
mm
kg
565×725
65
565×725
74
565×725
111 94
Roller cabinet with drawers 27×36 units
75 kg 100%
1.2
Version: With 2 ball-bearing fixed wheels and 2 castors (⌀ 100 mm), lockable.
With all-round anti-roll lip, ribbed rubber worktop and 2 handles.
Size 860/0 – Cabinet without drawers, for suitable drawers see No. 94 2926, 94 2931.
Size 860/4; 860/6 – With 4 or 6 drawers, can be locked centrally with cylinder lock.
Full extension drawers as described under No. 94 2931, fitted with
individual locking − prevents drawer opening during movement. wers
All dra tendable
x
fully e
Usable drawer area: width 459 mm, depth 612 mm.
drawers RAL 5005 signal blue powder-coated.
Note:
Size 860/0 – Supplied automatically with individual drawer locking in combination 94 2946_860/0
with drawer fitments from No. 94 2926, 94 2931. 94 2946_860/4
Size = Height mm / Number of drawers 860/0 860/4 860/6

94 2946 Roller cabinet 27×36 E (593,40) 937,25 1091,35
Footprint (W×D) mm 565×725 565×725 565×725
Number×front height of drawers Piece×mm − 1× 75 2× 50
1×100 1× 75 94 2946_860/6
1×125 1×100
1×300 1×125
1×200
Weight kg 56 97 110
Maximum overall loading capacity kg 450 450 450
Individual locking
For accessories and divider sets see No. 96 0190 − 96 0700 and No. 96 0900 − 96 1290
Auxiliary cabinet with TÜV / GS kitemark 27×36 E
i
75 kg 100%
1.2
Version: With 3 drawers, can be locked centrally with cylinder lock. Underneath a cupboard with a
shelf. The shelf can be adjusted at 25 mm intervals. Further storage shelves can be added.
Doors have separate locks in their slide handles.
wers
Cabinet body similar to No. 94 2906. All dra tendable
y e x
Full extension drawers like No. 94 2931. full
Usable area: width 459 mm, depth 612 mm.
An anti-tilt device prevents more than one drawer being opened at a time.
drawers and door RAL 5005 signal blue powder-coated.
Auxiliary cabinet with

94 2951 27×36 E 731,40
3 drawers and 1 storage shelf
Number×front height of drawers Piece×mm 1× 50
1×100
1×150
Door height mm 600
Weight kg 64
94 2955 Additional storage shelf 57,96

W×D mm 500×619
Machine auxiliary cabinet with swing doors with TÜV / GS kitemark 36×27 E and 36×36 E
1.2
94 Version: With reinforced swing doors, lockable by slide handle with cylinder lock.
With anti-roll lip on 3 sides and ribbed rubber covering.
Drawer and pull-out shelf runner mountings at 25 mm intervals on both sides.
The cabinet bodies are equipped with a drawer extension lock.
Size 1020/A – 595 mm deep, see No. 94 2973 / 2978 for suitable drawers;
see No. 94 2981 / 2986 for suitable pull-out shelves.
Size 1020/B – 748 mm deep, see No. 94 3011 / 3021 for suitable drawers;
Colour: Body RAL 7035 light grey, doors RAL 5005 signal blue powder-coated.
Sheet steel storage tray, black, with anti-roll lip (H = 25 mm).
Size = overall height mm / model 1020/A 1020/B

Machine auxiliary cabinet
94 2961 (508,30) (527,85)
with swing doors (without drawers)
Internal height (usable height) mm 900 900
Footprint (Width×Depth) mm 717×595 717×748 Installation example:
Divider units E every 17 mm 36×27E 36×36E No. 94 2961 size 1020 / B
fitted with drawers
Weight kg 52 61.5
No. 94 3011 / 3021.
Bases 36×27E
Suitable for: Machine auxiliary cabinet No. 94 2961 size 1020/A.
Version: Of sheet steel. Fork lift / pallet truck base 100 mm high
with removable covers at front and back for transport.
Note: Bases for machine auxiliary cabinet No. 94 2961 size 1020/B,
can be found on page 84, No. 94 3080.
Width x depth (mm)

Fork lift / pallet truck base
94 2963 36×27 E (90,85) 717×542
100 mm high
NC tool storage
See group 97 on page 180ff for a comprehensive range of tool storage equipment.
Continued ▶
Machine auxiliary cabinet with sliding doors with TÜV / GS kitemark 36×27 E and 36×36 E
▶ Continued
i 1.2
Version: With centre partition and ball-bearing mounted sliding doors,

lockable by slide handle with cylinder lock, with anti-roll lip on
3 sides and ribbed rubber covering.
Drawer and pull-out shelf runner mountings at 25 mm intervals
on both sides. No drawer extension lock.
Size 1020/A – 627 mm deep, see No. 94 2973 / 2978 for suitable drawers;
Size 1020/B – 780 mm deep, see No. 94 3011 / 3021 for suitable drawers;
Colour: Body RAL 7035 light grey, doors RAL 5005 signal blue powder-coated.
Sheet steel storage tray, black, with anti-roll lip (H = 25 mm).
Note: Fitted machine auxiliary cabinets with sliding door for NC tool storage,
can be found on page 186.
Size = overall height mm / model 1020/A 1020/B

Machine auxiliary cabinet
94 2965 (830,30) (864,80)
with sliding doors (without drawers)
Internal height (usable height) mm 900 900
Footprint (Width×depth) mm 1430×627 1430×780
Divider units E every 17 mm double sided 36×27E double sided 36×36E
Weight kg 95 109
Drawers with TÜV / GS kitemark 36×27 E 100%
Version: Traverse-less differential full extension runners.

Drawer bottom (No. 94 2973 / 2978) perforated on a 17 mm grid.
All-round slotted side walls on the inside (pitch 17 mm).
Drawer fronts with aluminium handle strips.
94 2973 – Full extension drawers 100 % extendable, load capacity 200 kg
Colour:
Note:
Signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated
 See No. 94 3011 / 3021 for drawers 36×36 units.
94
 Drawers are suitable only for cabinet frames from build year 08/2008.
 Only exception − cabinet frame No. 94 2965_1020/B, here the new
drawers are also suitable for the older cabinet frame.
 See pages 147-149 for drawer dividers.

94 2973 Full extension drawer 200 kg 36×27 E — (123,63) (150,08) (155,25) (160,43) (168,48) (174,23) (181,70)
94 2978 Full extension drawer 75 kg 36×27 E (100,28) (103,96) (128,80) (135,70) (140,30) (156,98) (160,43) (170,78)
Working height (94 2973) mm − 54 79 104 129 179 229 279
Working height (94 2978) mm 36 61 86 111 136 186 236 286
Shell height mm 33 52 77 77 127 177 227 277
Usable area (width x depth) mm 612×459
Weight (94 2978) kg 7.8 8.6 9.3 9.4 10.4 11.6 12 14
Pull-out shelves with TÜV / GS kitemark 36×27 E and 36×36 E 100%
Version:
94 2981/2991 – Full extension 100 % extendable, load capacity 200 kg
94 2986/2996 – Full extension 100 % extendable, load capacity 75 kg
Colour: Signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated
Note:  Pull-out shelves are suitable only for cabinet frames from build year 08/2008.
 Only exception − cabinet frame No. 94 2965, here the new pull-out shelves
are also suitable for the older cabinet frame.
Usable area
94 2981 Full extension shelf 200 kg 36×27 E (138,58)
612×459 mm
Usable area
612×459 mm
Usable area
612×459 mm
Usable area
612×459 mm
Bases 36×27 E and 36×36 E

Suitable for: Machine auxiliary cabinets No. 942965.
Version: Of sheet steel. Fork lift / pallet truck base 100 mm high
with removable covers at front and back for transport.
Size = suitable for No. 94 2965 / model 1020/A 1020/B
94 2998 Fork lift / pallet truck base (119,03) (120,75)
Footprint (width×depth) mm 1430×542 1430×695
Tool cabinet casing with TÜV / GS kitemark 36×36 E
i
100%
1.2
Suitable for: Drawers No. 94 3011 and 94 3021

The lock plate with cylinder lock allows conversion to the GARANT electronic locking system.
A drawer extension lock prevents more than one drawer being opened at a time.
Note:  When fitting out the cabinet with drawers, check that the sum of the heights of all the
individual drawer fronts corresponds to the usable height for the cabinet.
 In August 2008 the design of the drawer cabinet und racking range was revised.
Size = Usable cabinet height mm 600 700 900 1050 1225 1350 1525
Tool cabinet casing
94 3001 36×36 E (340,40) (361,10) (382,95) (414,–) (445,05) (448,50) (504,85)
without drawers
Overall height mm 700 800 1000 1150 1325 1450 1625
Footprint (W×D) mm 717×725 717×725 717×725 717×725 717×725 717×725 717×725
Weight kg 36.5 39 46 50 58 63 66
Suitable for: Tool cabinets No. 94 3001, 94 3201 and 94 3211
Version:
94 3030 – With anti-roll lip on 3 sides, black (H = 25 mm)
Width×depth mm 94 3030
94 94 3030 Sheet steel worktop

with anti-roll lip on 3 sides
36×36 E 90,62 717×725
Worktop of laminated wood
94 3060 36×36 E 76,59 717×725 94 3060
15 mm thick
Work mat of ribbed rubber
94 3070 36×36 E 21,28 717×725
3 mm thick
94 3070
Drawers with TÜV / GS kitemark 36×36E
Suitable for: Tool cabinet frame No. 94 3001 and machine auxiliary cabinets No. 94 2961 and 94 2965,
in each case size 1020/B.
Version: Base perforated at 17 mm intervals, slotted walls all round the inside (pitch 17 mm).
Drawer fronts with aluminium handle strip.
94 3011 – Full extension drawer 100 % extendable, load capacity 200 kg
Note: Drawers can be fitted with tool drawer insert No. 970700 for storing arbors such as
BT / SK, HSK, and VDI.
94 3011
Size = Front height mm 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 250 300 400
Full extension
94 3011 36×36 E — (130,53) (135,70) (137,43) (144,90) (146,63) (158,70) (161,–) (177,68) (186,88)
drawer 200 kg
Full extension
94 3021 36×36 E (91,08) (92,46) (96,60) (97,98) (104,88) (108,56) (117,30) (119,03) (141,45) —
drawer 75kg
Working height (94 3011) mm − 54 79 104 129 154 179 229 279 379
Working height (94 3021) mm 36 61 86 111 136 161 186 236 286 −
Shell height mm 33 52 77 77 127 127 177 227 277 277
Weight (94 3011) kg − 14.5 15.4 15.8 16.3 17.1 18.5 18.9 21.2 22.5
Bases 36×36E
Suitable for: Tool cabinets No. 94 3001, 94 3201, 94 3211
and machine auxiliary cabinet No. 94 2961 size 1020/B.
Version: Made of sheet steel
94 3040 – Standard base 50 mm high, set back 30 mm from front of cabinet 94 3040
94 3080 – Fork lift / pallet truck base 100 mm high with removable covers
at front and back for transport.
Width×depth mm
Standard base
94 3040 36×36 E 48,88 717×695
50 mm high
94 3080 36×36 E 90,16 717×695 94 3080
100 mm high
Continued ▶
Tool cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark 36×36 E
▶ Continued
i 1.2
100%
Version: Cabinet as described under No. 94 3001. wers

All dra tendable
Drawers as described under No. 94 3011 / 3021. x
Usable area of drawers 612×612 mm. fully e
Note:  See page 143 for divider sets for the complete range of tool cabinets
No. 94 3201 sizes 900/7, 900/8, 900/9, 900/10.
 When lifting and transporting the cabinet, make sure the drawers are
well secured within the casing.
Usable height 900 mm − total height 1000 mm 36×36 E

Arrangement of the drawers:
Size = Usable height mm / model 900/6 900/7 900/8 900/9 900/10

Tool cabinet
94 3201 36×36 E 1192,55 1262,70 1373,10 1488,10 1661,75
_900/10 Footprint (W×D) mm 717×725 717×725 717×725 717×725 717×725
Weight kg 141 148 160 174 196

94
Size = Usable height mm / model 1050/7 1050/8 1050/9 1050/11 1050/12

Tool cabinet
94 3201 36×36 E 1238,55 1429,45 1537,55 1693,95 1946,95
Footprint (W×D) mm 717×725 717×725 717×725 717×725 717×725
Weight kg 146 169 180 196 230

Size = Usable height mm / model 1225/10 1225/11 1225/12 1225/13

Tool cabinet
94 3201 36×36 E 1719,25 1827,35 1897,50 1984,90
Footprint (W×D) mm 717×725 717×725 717×725 717×725
Weight kg 207 219 225 234
Continued ▶
Tool cabinet with 7 drawers with TÜV / GS kitemark 36×36 E
▶ Continued
i 75 kg 100%
1.2 50
75
Version: For drawer runner mountings at 25 mm intervals.
Cabinet can be locked centrally.
The lock plate with cylinder lock allows conversion to the Garant 100
electronic locking system.
A drawer extend lock prevents more than one drawer being
opened at a time. Drawer bottom has holes on a 17 mm grid.
All-round slotted side walls on the inside (pitch 17 mm). 125
Drawer fronts with aluminium handle strip.
Full extension drawers 100 % extendable, load capacity 75 kg.
150
Colour: In stock − body light grey RAL 7035,
drawers signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated
Note:  Price valid only for the listed paint colours. 150
 When lifting and transporting the cabinet, make sure the drawers
are well secured within the casing.
n
Size = Usable height mm / model 900/7S Aktio
Tool cabinet complete with 250
94 3211 782,–
7 drawers (without dividers)
Working height mm 900
rs
Footprint (W×D) mm 717×725 rawe ble
All d extenda
Drawer usable area (width×depth) mm 612×612
ful l y
Weight kg 135
Divider set, 148 pieces
94 Application: For tool cabinet No. 94 3211 size 900 / 7S.

Reflecting experience of practical requirements.
One set is sufficient for 6 of the 7 drawers.
4. Drawer
125 mm
Supplied with: 16 plastic throughs No. 96 0620 (3 sizes sorted)

68 dividers No. 96 0630
13 slotted dividers No. 96 0500
51 plain dividers No. 96 0550 − 96 0570
1. Drawer 5. Drawer
50 mm 150 mm
2. Drawer
75 mm 6. Drawer
150 mm
3. Drawer
100 mm
7. Drawer
250 mm
not subdiv
ided
n
Aktio
Size = Type 900/6S
Divider set, 148 pieces
94 3220 162,73
for cabinet No. 94 3211 size 900/7S
Practical examples: Equipment projects handled by the Hoffmann Group.

Just contact us − we develop special solutions for you as well.
94
. . . and on request we will assemble

these for you professionally.
i
100%
1.2

locking system. A drawer extension lock prevents more than one drawer being
opened at a time.
 In August 2008 the design of the drawer cabinet und racking range was
revised. The old and new versions are not compatible with each other.
 See page 144 for divider sets for complete drawers.

Tool cabinet frame
94 3231 54×27 E (389,85) (442,75)
without drawers
Footprint (W×D) mm 1024×572 1024×572
Weight kg 53 76
Suitable for: Tool cabinet casing No. 94 3231
Supplied with:
94 Width×depth
(mm)
94 3235
Sheet steel worktop

94 3235 54×27 E 110,17 1024×572
with anti-roll lip on 3 sides 94 3240
Worktop of
94 3240 54×27 E 91,54 1024×572
laminated wood 15 mm thick
94 3245 54×27 E 26,45 1024×572
3 mm thick 94 3245

Suitable for: Tool cabinet frame No. 94 3231
Version: Base with holes at 17 mm intervals, slotted walls on the inside
(pitch 17 mm). Drawer fronts with aluminium handle strip.
94 3251
Size = Front height mm 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 250 300
Full extension
94 3251 54×27 E — (149,50) (151,23) (154,10) (155,25) (156,40) (167,90) (170,78) (181,70)
drawer 200 kg
Full extension
94 3256 54×27 E (107,87) (109,71) (114,31) (117,30) (121,90) (124,20) (132,25) — —
drawer 75 kg
Working height (94 3251) mm − 54 79 104 129 154 179 229 279
Working height (94 3256) mm 36 61 86 111 136 161 186 − −
Shell height mm 33 52 77 77 127 127 177 227 277
Weight (94 3251) kg − 12 13 13 15 15 17 18 19
Bases 54×27 E
Suitable for: Tool cabinet frame No. 94 3231 and tool cabinets No. 94 3261
94 3280 – Standard base 50 mm high, set back 30 mm in front.
94 3285 – Fork lift / pallet truck base, 100 mm high with removable
covers at front and back. Forklift access from front or rear. 94 3280
Width×depth
(mm)
Standard base
94 3280 54×27 E 70,84 1024×542
50 mm high 94 3285
94 3285 54×27 E 113,62 1024×542
100 mm high
▶ Continued
i
100%
1.2
wers
Version: Cabinet as under No. 94 3231. All dra tendable
y e x
Drawers as under No. 94 3251 / 3256. full
Usable area of drawers 918×459 mm.
Drawers RAL 5005 signal blue powder-coated.
Note:  See page 144, No. 96 0371 − 96 0378 for divider sets for complete drawers.
 When lifting and transporting the cabinets, make sure the drawers are well
secured within the casing.

Size = Usable height mm / model 900/6 900/7 900/8

Tool cabinet
94 3261 54×27 E 1299,50 1385,75 1523,75
Footprint (W×D) mm 1024×572 1024×572 1024×572
Weight kg 140 149 157
Usable height 1350 mm − total height 1450 mm 54×27 E 94


Tool cabinet
94 3261 54×27 E 1805,50 1905,55 2038,95
Footprint (W×D) mm 1024×572 1024×572 1024×572
Weight kg 209 216 227
Roller cabinet with drawers 54×27 E
i 200 kg 100%
1.2
Version: With 2 ball-bearing fixed wheels and 2 castors (⌀ 100 mm), lockable.
With anti-roll lip on 3 sides, ribbed rubber worktop and 2 handles. Individual locking
Cabinet can be locked centrally. Drawers as described under No. 94 3251,
full extension drawers (load capacity 200 kg) additionally fitted with
individual locking system − preventing the drawers opening during
movement. Usable area of drawers W×D: 918× 459 mm.
Size = Height mm / Number of drawers 860/5

wers
94 3501 Roller cabinet
54×27 E 1459,35 All dra tendable
complete with drawers ll y e x
fu
Number×front height of drawers Piece×mm 2× 75
1×100
1×150
1×200
Weight kg 142
Maximum overall loading capacity kg 450
i
100%
1.2

opened at a time.
Size = Usable height of cabinet mm 900 1225 1350

Tool cabinet frame
94 3601 54×36 E (442,75) (501,40) (514,05)
without drawers
Footprint (W×D) mm 1024×725 1024×725 1024×725
Weight kg 60.5 71 73
94 3630
Suitable for: Tool cabinet casing No. 94 3601 and 94 3701
Version:
Width×depth mm
94 94 3630 Steel worktop with

anti-roll lip on 3 sides
54×36 E 126,50 1024×725
94 3660
94 3660 54×36 E 112,47 1024×725
15 mm thick
94 3670 54×36 E 32,09 1024×725
3 mm thick 94 3670

Suitable for: Tool cabinet casing No. 94 3601
(pitch 17 mm). Drawer fronts have aluminium handle strip.
94 3611
Size = Front height mm 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 250 300
Full extension
94 3611 54×36 E — (165,60) (169,05) (170,20) (177,68) (180,55) (185,73) (188,03) (209,30)
drawer 200 kg
Full extension
94 3621 54×36 E (114,31) (118,45) (123,63) (126,50) (133,40) (135,70) (144,90) — —
drawer 75 kg
Working height (94 3611) mm − 54 79 104 129 154 179 229 279
Working height (94 3621) mm 36 61 86 111 136 161 186 − −
Shell height mm 33 52 77 77 127 127 177 227 277
Weight (94 3611) kg − 18.9 20.3 20.6 21.8 22.1 23.4 25.0 26.6
Bases 54×36 E
Suitable for: Tool cabinets No. 94 3601 and 94 3701
94 3640 – Standard base 50 mm high, set back 30 mm from cabinet front
94 3650 – Fork lift / pallet truck base 100 mm high with removable covers
at front and rear. Fork lift access from front or rear. 94 3640
Width×depth mm
Standard base
94 3640 54×36 E 67,85 1024×695
50 mm high
Fork lift / pallet
94 3650 truck base 54×36 E 99,36 1024×695 94 3650
100 mm high
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i
100%
1.2

wers
All dra tendable
Drawers as described under No. 94 3611 / 3621.
Usable area of drawers 918×612 mm. ll y e x
fu


Tool cabinet
94 3701 1472,– 1565,15 1708,90 2061,95
_900/7
Footprint (W×D)
complete
with drawers
54×36 E
mm 1024×725 1024×725 1024×725 1024×725

94
Weight kg 191 205 221 258


Tool cabinet
94 3701 complete 54×36 E 1819,30 2027,45 2117,15 2766,90
with drawers
Footprint (W×D) mm 1024×725 1024×725 1024×725 1024×725
Weight kg 243 262 277 345
i
100%
1.2
Suitable for: Drawers No. 94 4011
opened at a time.

Tool cabinet frame
94 4001 78×36 E (546,25) (611,80)
without drawers
Weight kg 72 80
Suitable for: Tool cabinets No. 94 4001 and 94 4101
Version:
94 4030 – With anti-roll lip on 3 sides, black (H = 25 mm),
including ribbed rubber covering.
94 4030
Width×depth mm
Steel worktop with
94 4030 151,23
94 94 4060
anti-roll lip on 3 sides
78×36 E
78×36 E 154,10
1434×725
1434×725
94 4060
15 mm thick
94 4070 78×36 E 47,50 1434×725
3 mm thick 94 4070

Suitable for: Tool cabinet body No. 94 4001.
(pitch 17 mm), drawer fronts have extruded aluminium pull grips.
Full extension drawers 100 % extendable, load capacity 200 kg
Size = Front height mm 75 100 125 150 200

Full extension
94 4011 78×36 E (230,–) (242,65) (244,95) (255,30) (270,25)
drawer 200 kg
Working height mm 54 79 104 129 179
Shell height mm 52 77 77 127 177
Weight kg 24 27 28 29 32
Bases 78×36 E
Suitable for: Tool cabinets No. 94 4001 and 94 4101.
94 4040 – Standard base 50 mm high, set back 30 mm from cabinet front.
94 4050 – Fork lift / pallet truck base 100 mm high with removable
covers at front and rear. Fork lift access from front or rear.
Colour: Light grey RAL 7035 powder-coated 94 4040
Width×depth mm
Standard base
94 4040 78×36 E 88,09 1434×695
50 mm high
94 4050 78×36 E 111,55 1434×695 94 4050
100 mm high
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i
200 kg 100%
1.2
Version: Cabinet as described under No. 94 4001. wers

All dra tendable
Drawers as described under No. 94 4011. x
Usable area of drawers 1326×612 mm. fully e


Tool cabinet
94 4101 78×36 E 2019,40 2219,50 2434,55
Footprint (W×D) mm 1434×725 1434×725 1434×725
Weight kg 246 266 289

Arrangement of the drawers: 94

Tool cabinet
94 4101 78×36 E 2592,10 2795,65 2998,05
Footprint (W×D) mm 1434×725 1434×725 1434×725
Weight kg 314 336 356
Corner cabinet with TÜV / GS kitemark

Version: With two swing doors, can be locked by slide handle
with cylinder lock. Cabinet has one fixed shelf internally.
Colour: Body RAL 7035 light grey, 1.2
doors RAL 5005 signal blue powder-coated.
Application: The corner solution for all tool cabinets with depth 36 E.
Size = for cabinets with usable height mm 900

Corner cabinet complete
94 5000 (759,–)
with shelf
Width×depth mm 850×850
Weight kg 65
Base for corner cabinet

94 5040 – Standard base 50 mm high, set back 30 mm from cabinet front.
94 5080 – Base 100 mm high to match corner cabinet height to adjacent
tool cabinets if these are placed on fork lift type bases
(No. 94 3080, 94 3650, 94 4050).
Colour: Light grey RAL 7035, powder-coated
Standard base for corner cabinet

94 5040 (117,30)
50 mm high
Standard base for corner cabinet
94 5080 (121,90)
100 mm high
Drawer / shelf combination units
Drawer / shelf combination units are versatilely applicable − for a made-to-measure racking system within
a HGV or container, for storage of large, heavy single components or many small parts in drawers.
We will gladly plan your new installation.
94
Drawer / shelf combination units with TÜV / GS kitemark
Drawer / shelf combination units make optimal usage of space. They combine the benefits of a tool cabinet with
the advantages of a rack, i.e. a single unit allows tool storage and small part storage in drawers with bulky
items placed in open areas, making full use of the available height.
The tag numbers make it easier for you to find the
individual components on the following pages.
15
8 16
14
5
6
7
13
12 10
3 2
94
4
1
see No. 96 6290 − 96 6298

on page 99 11
Ask for our shelf planning form. We will prepare a proposal with a 3D drawing (front view,
plan view and perspective) according to your instructions, tailor-made to your requirements.
Drawer / shelf combination units 730 mm deep (36 units)

Available bay widths:
36 E = 661 mm
54 E = 967 mm
78 E = 1376 mm
Drawer / shelf combination units 577 mm deep (27 units)
Available bay widths:
36 E = 661 mm
54 E = 967 mm
Five steps to realise

your individual wishes:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Our equipment experts will Using CAD images of all Our tailor-made equipment You can rely on the You will be amazed how
develop a solution with you components, you can proposals give you not only Hoffmann Group 100% quickly your individual
that perfectly matches your immediately view a virtual the right quality but also the for prompt and complete equipment system is
working requirements. image of your individual right price. delivery. installed and ready to use.
equipment.
For installation of your shelving system we recommend professional assembly by our installation team.
We will be pleased to quote for your requirements.
i 1.2
1 Column frames single

Version: Sheet steel with bracing, securely welded. The vertical support rails have
slots at 25 : 25 mm intervals, for fitting drawers, pull-out shelves and storage
shelves. Base flange with threaded inserts for height adjustment and for
anchoring to the floor.
Size = Height mm 2000 2200 2500 3000 Depth mm

Column frames
94 6000 36 E (147,78) (169,05) (177,68) (200,68) 706
for bay depth
Column frames
94 6002 27 E (141,45) (155,83) (166,18) (179,98) 553
for bay depth
Column width mm 53 53 53 53
2 Sheet metal panels for column frames

Version: Made of quality sheet metal with welded clips for attaching column frame covers:
preventing access to adjoining shelves from the side. Recommended when
racking is enclosed in units that have swing doors, sliding doors or roller shutters.
Note:  To cover both sides of a column frame, two sheet metal panels are required.
Prevents access to adjoining shelves from the side.
 For covering the outer ends of the racking you require wide walls
No. 94 6300 or 94 6302.
94 6000 94 6150
94 Size = for column frame
94 6150 Sheet metal panel

for column frame, depth
size
36 E
2000
(102,81)
2200
(114,54)
2500
(114,54)
3000
(156,40)
Depth mm
598
Sheet metal panel
94 6152 27 E (112,24) (141,45) (143,75) (159,85) 445
for column frame, depth
3 Drawers of sheet metal 100%
Suitable for: Shelving systems No. 94 6000 and following. wers

All dra tendable
Version: Made of high quality sheet metal, base with holes at 17 mm intervals, ll y e x
fu
all-round slotted side walls on the inside (pitch 17 mm) for multiple division,
drawer front with aluminium extrusion handle (labelling strip and protective
film supplied). Traverse-less differential runners.
94 6011/6031/6051/6071/6081 – Full extension drawer 100 % extendable, load capacity 200 kg
94 6021/6041/6073/6083 – Full extension drawers 100 % extendable, load capacity 75 kg
Note:  For dividers see No. 96 0190 − 96 0700 and No. 96 0900 − 961290.
 Drawers can be fitted with tool drawer insert No. 970700 for storing
BT / SK, HSK, and VDI tools.
 In August 2008 the design of the drawer cabinet und racking range was revised.
Size = Front height mm 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 250 300 400
Full extension drawer
94 6011 36×36 E — (130,53) (135,70) (137,43) (144,90) (146,63) (158,70) (161,–) (177,68) (186,88)
200 kg, W×D
94 6021 36×36 E (91,08) (92,46) (96,60) (97,98) (104,88) (108,56) (117,30) (119,03) (141,45) —
75 kg, W×D
94 6031 54×36 E — (165,60) (169,05) (170,20) (177,68) (180,55) (185,73) (188,03) (209,30) —
200 kg, W×D
94 6041 54×36 E (114,31) (118,45) (123,63) (126,50) (133,40) (135,70) (144,90) — — —
75 kg, W×D
94 6051 78×36 E — (230,–) (242,65) (244,95) (255,30) — (270,25) — — —
200 kg, W×D
94 6071 36×27 E — (123,63) (150,08) (155,25) (160,43) — (168,48) (174,23) (181,70) —
200 kg, W×D
94 6073 36×27 E (100,28) (103,96) (128,80) (135,70) (140,30) — (156,98) (160,43) (170,78) —
75 kg, W×D
94 6081 54×27 E — (149,50) (151,23) (154,10) (155,25) (156,40) (167,90) (170,78) (181,70) —
200 kg, W×D
94 6083 54×27 E (107,87) (109,71) (114,31) (117,30) (121,90) (124,20) (132,25) — — —
75 kg, W×D
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i 1.2
4 Pull-out shelves of sheet metal

Suitable for: Shelving systems No. 94 6000 and following.
Version: Robust sheet metal construction traverse-less differential runners.
Open in front, shell height at sides 46 mm, installation height 75 mm.
Full extension pull-out shelves 100 % extendable, load capacity 200 kg.
Colour: Signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.
94 6061
Usable surface (width×depth) mm 100%

Full extension shelf (149,50)
94 6061 W×D 36×36 E 612×612
Full extension shelf (167,33)
94 6141 W×D 54×36 E 918×612
Full extension shelf
94 6145 W×D 36×27 E (127,08) 612×459
Full extension shelf
94 6147 W×D 54×27 E (121,33) 918×459
4 Storage shelves
Version: Of sheet metal with cross-bracing on the underside. The storage shelves serve as cross-bracing
for the side frames. Up to height 2200 mm, 2 storage shelves are sufficient for stiffening (bottom
No. 94 6310 − 94 6330 for shelf depth 36 units or No. 94 6340 − 94 6344 for shelf depth 27 units and
top No. 94 6100 − 94 6120 for shelf depth 36 units or No. 94 6122 − 94 6124 for shelf depth 27 units);
from 2500 mm a further storage shelf in the middle (No. 94 6100 − 94 6120 for shelf depth 36 units
or No. 94 6122 − 94 6124 for shelf depth 27 units) is necessary. Further storage shelves may be
94 6100_50
added if required.
Size 50 – Standard storage shelf and uppermost storage shelf for bolting in.
Carrying capacity 200 kg.
Size 100 – The middle storage shelf for bolting in if swing doors are installed in the upper and lower parts
of a bay; or for visual balance if a storage shelf with a 100 mm front height is being similarly used
in the adjacent bays. Carrying capacity 200 kg.
94 6100–6110 Size 25 – Affordable standard storage shelf (not for use as uppermost storage shelf )
94
for insertion. Carrying capacity 150 kg.
Colour: Light grey RAL 7035, powder-coated. 94 6100_100
Note: Where central locking (No. 94 6400, 94 6430 or 94 6420, 94 6435) is fitted, the storage shelves are
factory modified to accept cylinder locks in a lock plate.
Size = Front height mm 25 50 100 Width mm Depth mm

94 6100 Storage shelf W×D 36×36 E (52,56) (68,77) (73,37) 661 701
94 6110 Storage shelf W×D 54×36 E (65,09) (79,58) (84,64) 967 701
94 6120 Storage shelf W×D 78×36 E — (95,45) (100,51) 1376 701
6 Rear panels of sheet metal

Colour: Light grey RAL 7035, powder-coated.
Application: Absolutely necessary for bracing of each shelving bay.
Suitable for fitting in racking 36 units und 27 units deep.
Size = for frame height mm 2000 2200 2500 3000

94 6200 Back panel for width 36 E (93,84) (100,28) (114,54) (129,95)
94 6210 Back panel for width 54 E (140,30) (149,50) (158,13) (174,23) 94 6200 − 6220
94 6220 Back panel for width 78 E (166,75) (172,50) (183,43) (201,83)
7 8 9 Intermediate bridging rail / end bridging rail / cover rail of sheet metal
Application:
94 6230/6260 – Intermediate bridging rail for covering the space between 2 storage shelves.
94 6240/6262 – End bridging rail for covering the space between a storage shelve and the side wall.
94 6250/6264 – Cover bridging rail as side frame cover between the two uppermost storage shelves
or the uppermost storage shelf and the side wall. 94 6230
Length mm Width mm 94 6240
94 6230 Intermediate bridging rail 36 E (15,47) 597 52 94 6250

94 6240 End bridging rail for bay depth 36 E (11,39) 597 82
94 6250 Cover bridging rail for depth 36 E (18,80) 700 52
94 6260 Intermediate bridging rail 27 E (14,84) 447 52
94 6262 End bridging rail for bay depth 27 E (12,65) 447 82
94 6264 Cover bridging rail for depth 27 E (17,83) 547 52
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i 1.2
10 Side panels of sheet metal

Application: For covering the fronts of the side walls, sheet steel angle plate, 30 mm wide.
Depth
Size = For frame height Size 2000 2200 2500 3000
mm
94 6300 Side panel for bay depth 36 E (145,48) (156,98) (174,23) (185,73) 730
94 6302 Side panel for bay depth 27 E (138,–) (141,45) (148,35) (154,68) 577
94 6300
11 Base frame and covers as bottom shelf
Version:
94 6310/6340 – Sturdy frame of angle iron with cross bracing, rigidly welded.
Front height 50 mm. Use as bottom shelf for each shelving bay.
Can be used with No. 94 6330 or 94 6344 as the lowest storage shelf.
94 6320/6342 – Front cover is used when the lower part of the unit is fitted with drawers.
94 6330/6344 – Full covering is used if no drawers are fitted (lowest storage shelf fully visible).
94 6310
Size = For bay width 36E 54E 78E
94 6310 Base frame without cover, depth 36 E (67,16) (75,44) (88,55)
94 6320 Front cover for base frame, depth 36 E (11,73) (14,78) (17,77) 94 6320
94 6330 Full cover for base frame, depth 36 E (56,58) (60,03) (74,29)
94 6340 Base frame without cover, depth 27 E (102,58) (70,38) —

94 94 6342 Front cover for base frame, depth 27 E (11,73) (14,78) —
94 6344 Full cover for base frame, depth 27 E (86,02) (59,11) —
12 13 Central locks 94 6330
Version: Consisting of a lock plate with cylinder lock with 2 keys and locking bars,
complete for storage shelves No. 94 6100 − 6120 for bay depth 36 units,
complete for storage shelf No. 946122, 946124 for bay depth 27 units.
Note:  Central locking is available for the following usable heights:

600 / 700 / 900 / 1050 / 1225 / 1350 / 1525 mm.
The central lock cannot be retrofitted.
 Please supply drawings of shelf arrangement when ordering.
Central lock Locking bar acts

94 6400 36 E (84,64) Working height
1 sided for bay depth downwards Working height
94 6420 36 E (200,68)
2 sided for bay depth downwards and upwards
94 6430 27 E (80,50)
1 sided for bay depth downwards
Central lock Locking bar acts 94 6400, 94 6430
94 6435 27 E (194,35)
2 sided for bay depth downwards and upwards
14 Sliding doors of sheet metal

Version: The doors are reinforced on the inside and run on rails on ball bearing guides.
Lockable by slide handle with cylinder lock.
The shelf bays behind the sliding doors can be fitted with storage shelves, drawers 94 6420, 94 6435
and pull-out shelves (exception: behind sliding doors No. 94 6520 (78 units wide)
only storage shelves can be fitted, no drawers or pull-out shelves).
Colour: Frame light grey RAL 7035,
Size = Overall height including frame mm 1000

Sliding door set
94 6500 2×36 E (460,–)
for bay width
Sliding door set
94 6510 2×54 E (552,–)
for bay width
Sliding door set
94 6520 1×78 E (445,05)
for bay width
Internal height mm 900
Depth mm 70
94 6500
Continued ▶
▶ Continued
i 1.2
15 Roller shutters with plastic segments

Version: Roller shutters of light grey plastic segments, lockable with a cylinder lock.
Cabinet is opened by pushing the shutter up into the top of the casing.
Colour: Cabinet frame light grey RAL 7035 powder-coated.
Note: Shutters available for intermediate heights.
Price on request.
Size = For column frame size 2000

Roller shutter
94 6560 54 E (657,80)
for bay width
Depth of guide rails mm 50
16 Swing doors of sheet metal

Version: The doors are reinforced on the inside, lockable by slide handle with
cylinder lock. The shelf bays behind the sliding doors can be fitted
with storage shelves, drawers and pull-out shelves. 94 6560
Colour: Frame light grey RAL 7035,
Note: Doors are available for intermediate heights.
Price on request.
Size = Overall height including frame
94 6600 Swing door set

for bay width
36 E
mm 1000
(359,95)
1200
—
1500
—
94
Swing door set
94 6610 54 E (368,–) (379,50) (430,10)
for bay width
Swing door set
94 6620 78 E (466,90) (481,85) (526,70)
for bay width
Internal height mm 900 1100 1400
Depth mm 50 50 50 94 6600
Racking ladders mobile

Version: Mobile wide-runged ladder for fitting to racking.
Each ladder is made to order.
The maximum vertical attachment height must always be stated.
Application: The racking ladder allows safe access to all items. Even in the top drawer.
When not in use the ladder can be pushed back out of the way.
Size = Number of steps pieces 6 8 10 12 14 16

96 6290 Mobile racking ladder (457,70) (499,10) (547,40) (584,20) (629,05) (680,80)
maximum vertical attachment height up to m 2.09 2.61 3.14 3.66 4.19 4.72
Accessories for racking ladder

Suitable for: Racking ladder No. 96 6290.
Application: Items No. 96 6292; 96 6294; 96 6296 und 96 6298 are required
to build a ladder support rail system.
Attention:
An intermediate bracket is required every 1.00 m of rail.
Light alloy rail ⌀ 30 mm,

96 6292 (41,98)
3000 mm long, anodised
96 6294 Light alloy intermediate bracket (13,23)
Light alloy bracket
96 6296 (20,13)
with end stop, right
Light alloy bracket
96 6298 (20,13)
with end stop, left
Configuration examples − cabinets
95

Range overview − Cabinets − with TÜV / GS kitemark
Flexible − versatile − can be combined as required: GARANT cabinets cover every need. You have a choice of plain sheet metal
or viewing window doors, swing doors or sliding doors, aluminium roller shutters or as open cabinet variants without doors.
This concept is of interest to all trades and is suitable for the storage of tools or provision of parts in the workshop, as well as
for the storage and archiving of office material / files.
Version:
Body:
 Storage shelves, drawers, drip trays and abrasive disc carriers can be mounted at 20 mm intervals.
 The cabinets have holes to allow them to be bolted together side by side.
 All cabinets up to 1200 mm high can be fitted with castors and a push handle.
Doors:
 Safety edges prevent doors twisting.
 Cabinets are available optionally with swing doors or sliding doors, doors can be plain metal or with polycarbonate viewing window.
Roller shutters:
 Made of anodised aluminium profiles.
 Easy to open and close as they run on slide rails.
 Double back wall protects the roller shutters and prevents jamming.
Locks:
 Centrally locked with slide handle or lock plate with cylinder lock (with 2 keys each).
The lock plate with cylinder lock or a slide handle permits easily retrofitting of the Garant electronic locking system.
 Suitable for a mechanical or electronic integrated locking system / shared keys or individual keys.
Drawers:
 With telescopic action allowing shelves to be pulled out 100 %.
 Walls slotted on the inside all round at 17 mm pitch.
 Drawer fronts have aluminium extrusion handle and are supplied with labelling strips and protective film.
Storage shelves:
 Galvanised sheet metal with safety edges.
 Shelves extend right up to the side walls (no gaps for small parts to fall into).
Cabinet type Variants Page
Computer cabinets 102 –

mobile + stationary 105
Swing door cabinets

(W×D×H):
950×430×1950
1000×400×2000
Shelving cabinets
(W×D×H): 106 –
95
750×275× 800 109
750×275×1000
750×275×2000
Wall cabinets:
Width = 500 − 2000 mm
D×H = 325×600 mm
Top housing
arrangement of the lock
System cabinets: on the bottom of the door
Depth = 550 mm,
Height = 500 – 2000 mm
110 –
(Swing doors: Base cabinet
124
500 – 1200 mm;
Sliding doors:
1200 – 2000 mm)
Heavy-duty cabinets: 125 –

Depth = 725 mm 126
Upright cabinets 127 –

Garment lockers 131
Note: See page 192, Group 98 for other cabinets, such as oil cabinets, hazardous substances cabinets.

Computer workstations with TÜV / GS kitemark 725 mm deep
IP
225°
0.9 41
Version: Cupboard with separately lockable double swing doors with polycarbonate
windows, equipped with divider (can be mounted on the left or right), pull-out
shelf size 750 load capacity 45 kg, with cable strain relief and galvanised storage
shelf for the tower compartment. All locks use the same key.
The fixed electrical installation includes multi-way socket (6-way, 250 V / 16 A
with ON / OFF switch), 1.2 m connecting cable, a 5 m extension cable and a fan
for protection against overheating.
All electrical items are fitted so that they do not protrude and are easily accessible.
The computer workstation is available either with or without mobile unit (2 fixed
and 2 electrically conductive castors with brakes ⌀ 125 mm as well as a push
handle). Top surface of beech marine ply.
Electrical protection:
Dustproof and splashproof to IP41 to DIN / VDE / 0470 / EN 60529.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, 95 1150
doors, drawers and pull-out shelves signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
95 1100 Computer workstation (1015,45) 95 1100 95 1150
Computer workstation,
95 1150 (1198,30)
mobile
tible
W×D mm 1000×725 c o mpa s
s
ions net inet
Overall height (95 1100) mm 1000 ens cabi cab
Overall height (95 1150) mm 1150 Dimh tool y duty
wit heav
Internal height of cupboard mm 640 and
Internal width of cupboard (left / right) mm 665 / 220
Weight (95 1100) kg 65.5
Weight (95 1150) kg 69.5
Version: Like computer workstations No. 951100 / 951150, but

 Cabinet underneath has plain metal doors without polycarbonate windows.
 Additionally with top-mounted housing with lockable swing door and
95 polycarbonate window for CRT monitors up to 21" and second fan.
95 1300 Computer workstation (1335,15)

95 1350
Computer workstation,
95 1350 (1516,85)
mobile
W×D mm 1000×725
Overall height (95 1300) mm 1700
Internal height / width of monitor housing mm 599 / 654
Internal height of cupboard mm 640
Weight (95 1300) kg 93
Weight (95 1350) kg 97
95 1300 95 1350
Fork lift truck base / pallet truck base
95 1410 (146,63)
for No. 951100 / 951300 / 951450
Height mm 150 95 1410
Keyboard drawer:
 Space for keyboard, mouse pad and mouse.
 Space for handheld scanner or Aqurado boxes.
 Keyboard secured against slipping.
 With ergonomic wooden palm rest.
 Locks in extended position
 Built-in strain relief for the cables.
 With handle which can be labelled.
 Also suitable for laptops.

▶ Continued
IP 95 1460
225°
0.9 41
Version: As for computer workstation No. 951100 / 951150, but with
space-saving TFT monitor housing for flat-screen monitors up
to 19″, lockable, with shelf. Self-supporting steplessly adjustable
lift door with polycarbonate window.
drawers and pull-out shelf signal blue RAL 5005
powder-coated.
95 1460 Computer workstation, mobile (1492,70)

95 1450
W×D mm 1000×725
Internal height×W×D monitor housing mm 460×690×230
Weight (95 1450) kg 88 95 1460
Weight (95 1460) kg 92 95 1450
Computer workstation with TÜV / GS kitemark 550 mm deep
0.9 225°
Version: Monitor housing with fan for monitors up to 19″, with height adjustable, galvanised storage shelf.
Swing door with polycarbonate window, lockable.
Keyboard drawer locks in full travel position. Three height adjustments at 60 mm intervals
(1058 / 1118 / 1178 mm), lockable, with palm rest made of wood, cable strain relief and mouse pad.
Computer housing with fan and 1 height adjustable galvanised shelf, 6-way socket outlet
with ON / OFF switch and cable slot for a tidy cable layout. All locks use the same key.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, doors and drawer front signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
Note: The dimensions of the computer workstation are compatible with system cabinets
No. 95 6000 − 95 6860 and can be combined with them as required.

95
Height mm 2000
Width mm 750
Depth mm 550
Weight kg 77.5
Monitor housing
Internal height×W×D mm 599×684×508
maximum screen diagonal inches 19
Viewing window (H×W) mm 552×552
Number of storage shelves pieces 1
maximum storage shelf load (distributed load) kg 100
Computer housing
Internal height×W×D mm 840×628×520
Number of cupboards pieces 1
maximum storage shelf load (distributed load) kg 100
ible
mpat
n s io ns co
Dime cabinets 956860
▶
with 95 6000 –
No.
▶
Individual height adjustment Workstation ergonomics

Keyboard drawer adjustable to 3 heights − The palm rest made of wood enables
can be changed in seconds. comfortable, non-fatiguing working.

▶ continued
IP
225°
0.9 41
Version: Keyboard drawer locks in full travel position, with ergonomic wooden
palm rest and cable strain relief. Computer housing with fan and an
adjustable galvanised shelf. The permanent electrical installation
includes a 6-way multiple socket outlet (250 V / 16 A with ON- / OFF
switch), connection cable 1.2 m.
Worktop is of beech plywood.
95 1610 – With mobile unit composed of 2 fixed and 2 electrically
conductive castors with brakes ⌀ 125 mm and push handle.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, 95 1600
drawers and doors signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated

Computer workstation
95 1610 (1010,85)
mobile
W×D mm 750×550
Internal height of cupboard mm 640 95 1600
Internal width of cupboard mm 628
Weight kg 58
Version: TFT- monitor housing for flat screen monitors up to 19″, lockable,
with fixed shelf. Self-supporting steplessly adjustable lift door with
polycarbonate window. Computer housing with fan and an
adjustable galvanised shelf. The permanent electrical installation
includes a 6-way multiple socket outlet (250 V / 16 A with ON / OFF
switch), connection cable 1.2 m. Worktop of beech plywood.
95 1625 – With mobile unit composed of 2 fixed and 2 electrically
conductive castors with brakes ⌀ 125 mm and push handle.
drawers and doors signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated 95 1620
95 1620 Computer workstation TFT (1124,70)

Computer workstation TFT,
95 1625 (1217,85)
95 W×D
mobile
mm 750×550
Internal height×width ×depth of monitor housing mm 460×690×230
Internal width of cupboard mm 628
95 1625
Weight kg 70 95 1620
TFT monitor housing:

 Space for keyboard and mouse
 Space for handheld scanner
 Dustproof and dripping water proof to IP41
 Self-supporting steplessly adjustable lift door, lockable using a cylinder lock incorporated within a slide handle
 Brush strip protects against dust, permitting use of the keyboard and mouse when the door is closed
Continued ▶

Computer workstation −individual parts 550 mm deep
▶ Continued
0.9
Version: TFT monitor housing for flat screen monitors up to 19″,

lockable, with fixed shelf. Self-supporting steplessly
adjustable lift door with polycarbonate window.
lift door signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
95 1630 TFT monitor housing (366,85) 95 1630

W×D (top / bottom) mm 750×200 / 275
Internal height×W×D (top / bottom) mm 490×690×150 / 230
Weight kg 21
Version: Keyboard drawer in the top-mounted housing with beech 95 1632

plywood top surface. The keyboard drawer registers when fully
extended, can be locked, has a wooden palm rest and has cable
strain relief. Single-hand operation. The front automatically folds
upwards when the keyboard is pulled out.
95 1632 Keyboard drawer in the top-mounted housing (494,50) Detail −

Single keyboard drawer pulled out
W×D×H keyboard drawer mm 690×475×90
Clear height of the top-mounted housing mm 200
Weight kg 24.5
Version: Computer housing with fan and an adjustable galvanised shelf.

The integral electrical installation includes 6-way multiple socket
outlet (250 V / 16 A with ON / OFF switch), connection cable 1.2 m.
95 1635 Computer housing (419,75)

225°
W×D mm 750×550
Internal height×W×D
Weight
mm
kg
640×628×520
39 95
Suitable for: For bolting to cabinet housings and workbench tops.
Application: For notices and for displaying plans, drawings etc.,
up to size DIN A4, suitable for writing using board markers.
95 1640 Information board (83,72) 95 1640

W×H (information board) mm 220×330
W×H×Length (support frame) mm 30×30×548
Individual solutions for customers
We will gladly prepare a quotation for computer workstations to your specifications.
Workbench with computer housing + TFT monitor housing. Special solution

Swing door cabinet 1950 mm high with TÜV / GS kitemark 430 mm deep
80 kg
0.9 500 kg 225°
Version: Body and doors of 0.9 mm sheet metal, storage shelf mountings at
20 mm intervals. Doors reinforced on the inside, can be locked by
push handle with cylinder lock.
Complete with 4 shelves of galvanised sheet metal.
Size = Cabinet height mm / model 1950/A

Swing door cabinet
95 4000 (354,20)
with storage shelves
W×D mm 950×430
Usable height mm 1830
Number of storage shelves No. 95 4010 pieces 4
Weight kg 74
Additional shelf of galvanised sheet metal

Suitable for: Swing door cabinet No. 95 4000 size 1950/A.
Additional storage shelf

95 4010 (22,02)
938×398×30 mm
Swing door cabinets 2000 mm high with TÜV / GS kitemark 400 mm deep
65 kg
0.9 500 kg 225°
Version: Body and doors of 0.9 mm sheet metal, storage shelf mountings at
40 mm intervals. Doors reinforced on the inside, can be locked with
push handle with cylinder lock. For more information on locks,
95 see No. 96 0000−96 0020.
Complete with 4 shelves of galvanised sheet metal.
95 4100 – With plain sheet metal swing doors
95 4110 – With viewing window in swing doors (polycarbonate windows)
95 4120 – Without doors, as open cabinet
Swing door cabinet with plain sheet

95 4100 (316,25)
metal swing doors
Swing door cabinet
95 4110 (516,35)
with viewing window swing doors
Cabinet
95 4120 (261,05)
without doors
W×D mm 1000×400
Number of storage shelves No. 95 4011 pieces 4
Weight (95 4100) kg 69

Suitable for: Swing door cabinets No. 95 4100 − 95 4120. 95 4110
Additional storage shelf

95 4011 (22,02)
994×352×30 mm

Shelf cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark 275 mm deep
80 kg
0.9 500 kg 225°
Version: Mountings for shelves at 20 mm intervals.

Doors reinforced on the inside, can be locked
by slide handle with pin cylinder lock.
Note:  For individual open storage bins, see No. 96 1510.
 For individual storage shelves, see No. 95 4750 / 4755.
Shelf cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark

Version:
95 4600/4650 – With plain sheet metal swing doors
95 4610/4660 – With viewing window in swing doors (polycarbonate windows) 95 4610
95 4620/4670 – Without doors, as open shelf cabinet
Size = Cabinet height mm / type 1000/F 1000
Cabinet with
95 4600 (388,70) (262,20)
plain sheet metal swing doors
Cabinet with
95 4610 (420,90) (295,55)
viewing window swing doors
Cabinet
95 4620 (290,95) (162,73)
without doors
W×D mm 750×275 750×275
Number of storage shelves No. 95 4750/4755 pieces 2/2 −
Number of storage bins No. 96 1510 SB6 / SB5 / SB4: pieces 12 / 12 / 12 −
Weight (95 4600) kg 36 30
Size = Cabinet height mm / type 2000/F 2000

Cabinet with
95 4650 (647,45) (353,05)
Cabinet with
95 4660 (725,65) (431,25)
Cabinet
95 4670 (512,90) (216,78)
without doors
W×D mm 750×275 750×275
Number of storage shelves No. 95 4750/4755
Number of storage bins No. 96 1510 SB6 / SB5 / SB4:
Weight (95 4650)
pieces
pieces
kg
4/6
36 / 36 / 20
68
−
−
53
95 4660 95 4670 95
Accessories for shelf cabinets
Suitable for: Cabinets No. 95 4600 − 95 4670.
95 4750
Storage bins
for
Storage shelf flat
95 4750 (14,95) 4 open storage bins
738×233×21 mm
No. 96 1510 SB4
for 6 each
Storage shelf stepped
95 4755 (14,95) open storage bins 95 4755
738×233×100 mm
No. 96 1510 SB6 and SB5
Tips for small parts storage

Examples for storage of small parts can be found in Group 91 drawer units No. 91 3610, also suitable for wall mounting. Group 92 for modular
workstations includes mobile solutions using storage trolleys No. 92 0170 or system trolleys No. 92 0155. System cabinets of Group 95 can be
fitted with rack panels No. 95 7060 for open storage bins No. 96 1510. Or you can choose the ready-fitted cabinets No. 95 4760 to 95 4770.
Front view Installation example: Installation example

91 3610_40 92 0170_1460 92 0155_1645 with rear panels No. 95 7060. 95 4765

Wall cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark 325 mm deep
65 kg
0.9 250 kg
Version: Mountings for shelves at 20 mm intervals.

Rear wall with 9×9 mm holes at 37 mm intervals for
mounting hooks and supports No. 961325 − 96 1430.
If required, the rear wall can be closed off with a cover.
Please enquire about this.
Supplied with: The following fastenings are supplied:
4 plugs S8, 4 distance pieces of plastic, 4 hexagon bolts M6×40.
Other walls may require different fastenings. The customer should 95 4711
check requirements before installation.
225°
Note: Open cabinets and cabinets with swing doors allow space for files.
Cabinets with sliding doors do not allow sufficient depth for files.
Cabinets can be fitted with open storage bins No. 96 1510. 95 4721
See No. 95 4752 and 95 4757 for individual shelves and stepped shelves.
Size = Cabinet width mm/type 500/F 750/F 1000/F

Wall cabinet with
95 4701 (207,58) (333,50) (374,90)
Wall cabinet with
95 4711 (229,43) (370,30) (416,30)
Wall cabinet
95 4721 (136,28) (213,33) (248,40)
without doors
W×D×H mm 500×325×600 750×325×600 1000×325×600
Usable cabinet depth mm 300 300 300
Usable shelf depth mm 250 250 250 95 4711
Number of storage shelves No. 95 4752 pieces 1 1 1
Weight (95 4701) kg 20 28 35
Hooks and brackets

No. 96 1325 − 96 1430 can be
used for attaching fittings to
95 Size = Cabinet width mm / type 1500/F 2000/F

perforated panels.
Wall cabinet with

95 4702 (723,35) (770,50)
plain sheet metal sliding doors
Wall cabinet with
95 4712 (779,70) (854,45)
viewing window sliding doors
Wall cabinet
95 4722 (464,60) (495,65)
without doors
W×D×H with centre partition mm 1500×325×600 2000×325×600
Working height mm 499 499
Usable shelf / cabinet depth mm 250 250
Number of storage shelves No. 95 4752 pieces 1/1 1/1
Weight (95 4702) kg 64 78 95 4712
Accessories for wall cabinets

95 4752
Suitable for:
Size 500 – Cabinets No. 95 4701, 95 4711, 95 4721 size 500/F.
Size 750 – Cabinets No. 95 4701, 95 4711, 95 4721 size 750/F; 95 4702, 95 4712, 95 4722 size 1500/F.
Size 1000 – Cabinets No. 95 4701, 95 4711, 95 4721 size 1000/F; 95 4702, 95 4712, 95 4722 size 2000/F.
95 4757
Size = Width mm 500 750 1000

95 4752 Flat storage shelf (16,68) (20,47) (24,27)
95 4757 Stepped storage shelf (16,68) (20,47) (24,27)

W×D×H (95 4752) mm 488×250×21 738×250×21 988×250×21
Height of stepped storage shelf mm 100 100 100
suitable for storage bins No. 96 1510 SB4 (95 4752) 3 4 6
suitable for storage bins No. 96 1510 SB5 (95 4757) 4 6 8
suitable for storage bins No. 96 1510 SB6 (95 4757) 4 6 8 Installation examples
Continued ▶

Configuration example with wall cabinets
Storage shelf for wall cabinets

▶ Continued
Suitable for: For installation underneath wall cabinets No. 95 4701, 95 4711, 95 4721 and
No. 95 4702, 95 4712, 95 4722.
Version: Side panels of sheet metal, shelf of 22 mm plywood.
Load capacity 15 kg.
Size = for cabinet width mm 500 750 1000

95 4759 Storage shelf (78,20) (89,24) (101,43)
W×D×H mm 500×325×200 750×325×200 1000×325×200
Storage cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark 275 mm deep
0.9 500 kg 225°

95
Version: Doors reinforced on the inside, can be locked with push handle with cylinder lock.
Transparent boxes of ABS plastic for dust-free storage.
Tilt the transparent box to remove stored goods.
Boxes can be removed and stacked for assembly purposes.
95 4760 – With plain sheet metal swing doors
95 4765 – With viewing window in swing doors (polycarbonate windows)
95 4770 – Without doors, as open storage cabinet
Size = Number of transparent boxes pieces 45 69 97

Storage cabinet with
95 4760 (934,95) (972,90) (1012,–)
Storage cabinet with
95 4765 (1020,05) (1056,85) (1092,50)
Storage cabinet
95 4770 (801,55) (838,35) (874,–)
without doors
W×D×H mm 750×275×2000
Fitted with transparent boxes 12 / 100× 93× 84 27 / 50× 42× 46 36 / 50× 42× 46 95 4765
(pieces / W×D×H) mm 15 / 152×113×129 12 / 100× 93× 84 36 / 100× 93× 84
12 / 190×142×165 10 / 152×113×129 25 / 152×113×129
6 / 220×192×190 20 / 190×142×165
Weight kg 80 79 79 95 4770

System cabinets 550 mm deep with TÜV / GS kitemark 500 mm high
i
100 kg
0.9 1000 kg 225°
Colour: Standard paint finish: body light grey RAL 7035,

Note: For storage shelves and accessories for system cabinets
see No. 957000 − 957100.
Top-mounted
cabinets without
doors on request
System cabinets 500 mm high / 500 mm wide
Size = Width mm / model 500/F 500

System cabinet with Add-on
95 6000 (182,85) (169,63)
plain sheet metal swing door cabinet
95 6005 (197,80) (185,73)
viewing window swing door cabinet
W×D×H mm 500×550×500
Usable height mm 340 Base cabinet
No. 95 6490
Number of storage shelves No. 95 7000 size 500 pieces 1 −
Weight (95 6000) kg 18 17
95 6020
95 Size = Width mm / model

750/F
(299,–)
750
(277,15)
95 6020 plain sheet metal swing doors cabinet
95 6025 (326,60) (305,90)
viewing window swing doors cabinet
W×D×H mm 750×550×500
Number of storage shelves No. 95 7000 size 750 pieces 1 − No. 95 6520
Weight (95 6020) kg 26 23
95 6045

95 6040 (332,35) (309,35)
plain sheet metal swing doors cabinet
95 6045 (359,95) (336,95)
W×D×H mm 1000×550×500 Base cabinet
Usable height mm 340 No. 95 6550
Weight (95 6040) kg 32 28
Continued ▶

▶ continued
i 0.9
100 kg
1000 kg
Colour: Standard paint finish: body light grey RAL 7035, 95 6065
doors signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.

see No. 957000 − 957100.

95 6060 (604,90) (580,75)
plain sheet metal sliding doors cabinet
95 6065 (640,55) (617,55) Base cabinet
viewing window sliding doors cabinet No. 95 6740
W×D×H mm 1200×550×500
Weight (95 6060) kg 45 40
Top-mounted cabinets
without doors on request
Size = Width mm / model

1500/F 1500 95
95 6080 (688,85) (648,60)
95 6085 (736,–) (694,60)
viewing window sliding doors cabinet
Usable height mm 320 No. 95 6765
Weight (95 6080) kg 59 53
95 6100

95 6100 (726,80) (680,80)
95 6105 (791,20) (746,35)
W×D×H mm 2000×550×500
Base cabinets without
Usable height mm 320 doors on request
Weight (95 6100) kg 74 65
Continued ▶

▶ continued
i 0.9
60 kg 100 kg
1000 kg 225°

doors and drawers signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.

see No. 957000 − 957100.
Size = Width mm / model 500/F 500/FS 500 95 6120

System cabinet with plain Base
95 6120 (197,23) (300,15) (184,58)
sheet metal swing door cabinet
Cabinets without doors
System cabinet with viewing Base on request
95 6125 (217,35) (320,85) (204,13)
window swing door cabinet
System cabinet with plain Add-on
95 6130 (197,23) (300,15) (184,58)
sheet metal swing door cabinet
System cabinet with viewing Add-on
95 6135 (217,35) (320,85) (204,13)
window swing door cabinet
W×D×H mm 500×550×800
Number of storage shelves No. 95 7000 size 500 pieces 1 1 −
Number of drawers No. 95 7022 size 120 pieces − 1 −
Weight (95 6120) kg 23 30 22
95 6165
Size = Width mm / model 750/F 750/FS 750

95 95 6150 System cabinet with plain
sheet metal swing doors
Base
cabinet
(313,95) (419,75) (294,40)
System cabinet with viewing Base
95 6155 (336,95) (438,15) (316,25)
window swing doors cabinet Base cabinet
System cabinet with plain Add-on No. 95 6330
95 6160 (313,95) (419,75) (294,40)
sheet metal swing doors cabinet
95 6165 (336,95) (438,15) (316,25)
window swing doors cabinet
W×D×H mm 750×550×800
Usable height mm 640 95 6150
Weight (95 6150) kg 32 40 29

System cabinet with plain Base 95 6195
95 6180 (334,65) (445,05) (311,65)
95 6185 (384,10) (491,05) (361,10)
System cabinet with plain sheet Add-on
95 6190 (334,65) (445,05) (311,65)
metal swing doors cabinet
95 6195 (384,10) (491,05) (361,10)
window swing doors cabinet Base cabinet
W×D×H mm 1000×550×800 No. 95 6550
Weight (95 6180) kg 40 52 36
Continued ▶

▶ continued
i
60 kg 100 kg
0.9 1000 kg

doors and drawers signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated. 95 6220
see No. 957000 − 957100.

95 6210 (630,20) (609,50)
sheet metal sliding doors cabinet
System cabinet with sliding doors Base
95 6215 (691,15) (668,15)
with viewing window cabinet
95 6220 (630,20) (609,50)
System cabinet with sliding doors Add-on
95 6225 (691,15) (668,15)
with viewing window cabinet Base cabinet
No. 95 6580
W×D×H mm 1200×550×800
Weight (95 6210) kg 55 49
1500/F 1500/FS 1500

95 6240 System cabinet with plain

sheet metal sliding doors
System cabinet with sliding doors
Base
cabinet
Base
(725,65) (937,25) (685,40)
95
95 6245 (805,–) (1015,45) (762,45)
95 6250 (725,65) (937,25) (685,40)
95 6255 (805,–) (1015,45) (762,45)
W×D×H mm 1500×550×800
Number of storage shelves No. 95 7000 size 750 pieces 2 2 − 95 6245
Weight (95 6240) kg 72 88 66
Cabinets without doors on request

2000/F 2000/FS 2000

95 6270 (762,45) (982,10) (717,60)
System cabinet with sliding doors Base
95 6275 (870,55) (1091,35) (825,70)
95 6280 (762,45) (982,10) (717,60)
95 6285 (870,55) (1091,35) (825,70)
W×D×H mm 2000×550×800
Usable height mm 620 Base cabinet Base cabinet
Number of storage shelves No. 95 7000 size 1000 pieces 2 2 − No. 95 6360 No. 95 6365
Weight (95 6270) kg 87 110 78
Continued ▶

▶ continued
i 0.9
60 kg 100 kg
1000 kg 225°

see No. 957000 − 957100.

System cabinet with Base
95 6300 (219,08) (324,30) (195,50)
System cabinet with Base 95 6300
_500/FS 95 6305 (250,70) (354,20) (227,13) Cabinets without doors
viewing window swing door cabinet on request
95 6310 (219,08) (324,30) (195,50)
95 6315 (250,70) (354,20) (227,13)
W×D×H mm 500×550×1000
Weight (95 6300) kg 29 35 25
Size = Width mm / model 750/F 750/FS 750 95 6330
95 95 6330 System cabinet with

Base
cabinet
(343,85) (450,80) (305,90)
95 6335 (369,15) (472,65) (328,90)
95 6340 (343,85) (450,80) (305,90)
Roller shutters 95 6380
System cabinet with Add-on of anodised
95 6345 (369,15) (472,65) (328,90)
viewing window swing doors cabinet aluminium
W×D×H mm 750×550×1000 profiles!
Weight (95 6330) kg 38 47 32
1000/F 1000/FS 1000

95 6360 (372,60) (480,70) (327,75)
95 6365 (431,25) (539,35) (387,55)
95 6370 (372,60) (480,70) (327,75)
95 6375 (431,25) (539,35) (387,55)
viewing window swing doors cabinet Base cabinet
System cabinet with No. 95 6360
95 6380 (993,60) (1095,95) (947,60)
aluminium roller shutters
Usable height (95 6360, 95 6365, 95 6370, 95 6375) mm 840 No. 95 6360
Usable height (95 6380) mm 730
Weight (95 6360) kg 50 62 41

▶ continued
i 0.9
60 kg 100 kg
1000 kg
Cabinets without doors on request
see No. 957000 − 957100.

95 6400 (668,15) (621,–)
95 6405 (746,35) (698,05)
95 6410 (668,15) (621,–)
95 6415 (746,35) (698,05)
W×D×H mm 1200×550×1000
Number of storage shelves No. 95 7000 size 1200 pieces 2 − No. 95 6400
Weight (95 6400) kg 64 54
1500/F 1500/FS 1500

95 6430 (791,20) (1002,80) (709,55)
95 6435
System cabinet with
cabinet
Base
cabinet
(886,65) (1095,95) (805,–)
95
95 6440 (791,20) (1002,80) (709,55)
95 6445 (886,65) (1095,95) (805,–)
W×D×H mm 1500×550×1000
Number of drawers No. 95 7024 size 120 pieces − 2 − 95 6435
Weight (95 6430) kg 87 103 75
2000/F 2000/FS 2000

95 6460 (838,35) (1056,85) (747,50)
95 6465 (977,50) (1192,55) (886,65)
95 6470 (838,35) (1056,85) (747,50)
95 6475 (977,50) (1192,55) (886,65)
W×D×H mm 2000×550×1000
Number of drawers No. 95 7026 size 120 pieces − 2 − 95 6460
Weight (95 6460) kg 106 129 88
Continued ▶

▶ continued
i 0.9
60 kg 100 kg
1000 kg 225°

see No. 957000 − 957100.

System cabinet with Base Cabinets without doors
95 6490 (226,55) (328,90) (199,53) on request
95 6495 (265,65) (366,85) (238,05)
95 6500 (226,55) (328,90) (199,53)
95 6505 (265,65) (366,85) (238,05)
W×D×H mm 500×550×1200
Weight (95 6490) kg 32 39 29
95 Size = Width mm / model
95 6520 System cabinet with

Base
cabinet
750/F
(371,45)
750/FS
(473,80)
750
(331,20)
95 6520

95 6525 (420,90) (523,25) (379,50)
System cabinet with Add-on Installation example
95 6530 (371,45) (473,80) (331,20)
plain sheet metal swing doors cabinet fitted with wheels
System cabinet with Add-on and push handle
95 6535 (420,90) (523,25) (379,50) No. 95 7070.
W×D×H mm 750×550×1200
Weight (95 6520) kg 48 56 42

95 6550 (387,55) (494,50) (340,40)
95 6555 (461,15) (569,25) (417,45)
95 6565
95 6560 (387,55) (494,50) (340,40)
95 6565 (461,15) (569,25) (417,45)
W×D×H mm 1000×550×1200
Number of storage shelves No. 95 7000 size 1000 pieces 2 2 − No. 95 6360
Weight (95 6550) kg 55 67 46
Continued ▶

▶ continued
i 0.9
60 kg 100 kg
1000 kg

see No. 957000 − 957100.

95 6580 (685,40) (634,80)
95 6585 (777,40) (729,10)
95 6590 (685,40) (634,80)
plain sheet metal sliding doors cabinet 95 6585
95 6595 (777,40) (729,10)
W×D×H mm 1200×550×1200
Top-mounted cabinets without doors on request
Weight (95 6580) kg 70 59
1500/F 1500/FS 1500
95 6610 System cabinet with

System cabinet with
Base
cabinet
Base
(814,20) (1024,65) (731,40)
95
95 6615 (933,80) (1143,10) (852,15)
95 6620 (814,20) (1024,65) (731,40)
95 6625 (933,80) (1143,10) (852,15)
W×D×H mm 1500×550×1200
Weight (95 6610) kg 94 111 82

Base cabinets without doors on request
2000/F 2000/FS 2000

95 6640 (864,80) (1084,45) (773,95)
95 6645 (1033,85) (1251,20) (941,85)
95 6650 (864,80) (1084,45) (773,95)
95 6655 (1033,85) (1251,20) (941,85)
W×D×H mm 2000×550×1200
Weight (95 6640) kg 115 139 97
95 6640
Continued ▶

▶ continued
i
60 kg 100 kg
0.9 1000 kg 225°

Note:  For storage shelves and accessories for system cabinets see No. 957000 − 957100.
 System cabinets for use as cleaning materials and broom lockers with hooks,
can be found in Group 98.
750/F 750/FS 750

95 6670 (484,15) (741,75) (380,65)
95 6675 (562,35) (819,95) (460,–)
W×D×H mm 750×550×2000
Number of storage shelves pieces 5 3 −
Weight (95 6670) kg 75 94 60 95 6670

Roller shutters of
anodised alumi-
nium profiles!
95 Size = Width mm / model 1000/F 1000/FS 1000

95 6690 (557,75) (852,15) (446,20)
_1000/F 95 6695 (695,75) (985,55) (583,05)
95 6700 (1279,95) (1569,75) (1170,70)
aluminium roller shutters cabinet
W×D×H mm 1000×550×2000 95 6695
Usable height (95 6690, 95 6695) mm 1840
Weight (95 6690) kg 89 114 66
95 6700

95 6720 (654,35) (535,90)
95 6725 (807,30) (688,85)
W×D×H mm 1200×550×2000
Usable height mm 1840 95 6720
Weight kg 116 90
95 6725
Continued ▶

▶ continued
i 0.9
60 kg 100 kg
1000 kg

Note: For storage shelves, drawers, dividers and accessories
for system cabinets see No. 957000 − 957100.
95 6740
95 6740 (883,20) (762,45)
95 6745 (1035,–) (915,40)
W×D×H mm 1200×550×2000
Weight (95 6740) kg 112 86
1500/F 1500/FS 1500 95

95 6760 (1076,40) (1355,85) (872,85)
95 6765 (1279,95) (1555,95) (1075,25)
W×D×H mm 1500×550×2000 95 6765
Weight (95 6760) kg 139 158 109 Top-mounted cabinet No. 95 6100
2000/F 2000/FS 2000
Size = Width mm / model 2000/F 2000/FS 2000 Cabinets without doors on request

95 6780 (1219,–) (1549,05) (993,60)
95 6785 (1520,30) (1805,50) (1297,20)
W×D×H mm 2000×550×2000
Weight (95 6780) kg 182 207 137

System cabinets 550 mm deep with TÜV / GS kitemark
+ =
Empty system cabinets
No. 95 6850 _750 and _1000 can be fitted individually
with drawers No. 95 7024 / 7026.
i
60 kg 100%
0.9
Version: For drawer (No. 957024 / 7026) runner mountings at 20 mm intervals.

Cabinet can be locked centrally. Only one drawer can be opened at a
time due to the drawer extend lock. Drawers are 100 % extendable.
Bottom and inner sides are slotted all round (17 mm division) for
multiple subdivision.
Note: Note that the sum of the individual drawer heights corresponds with
the cabinet's usable height, when fitting out the cabinet with drawers.

System cabinet
95 6850 (348,45) (362,25)
without drawers
W×D×H mm 750×550×1000 1000×550×1000
Weight kg 34.8 48.2
System cabinet complete, usable height 860 mm − overall height 1000 mm

95 Drawers as described under No. 957024 / 7026.
With telescopic action allow drawers to be pulled out 100 %.
Usable drawer area:
No. 95 6860_750: 612×445 mm / 36×26 units,
No. 95 6860_1000: 850×445 mm / 50×26 units.
le
dab
e x ten %
ly 00
Ful ers 1
w
dra
Size = Width mm 750/5 750/6 1000/5 1000/6

System cabinet
95 6860 with fully extendable drawers (898,15) (999,35) (934,95) (1044,20)
and drawer extend lock
W×D×H mm 750×550×1000 1000×550×1000
Weight kg 75 78.9 88.4 92.3
For accessories and divider sets see No. 96 0800 − 96 0840

Accessories for system cabinets
Storage shelves of galvanised sheet metal 95 7000
Size = for cabinet / compartment width mm 500 750 1000 1200 100 kg
Storage shelf
_1000 95 7000 (13,97) (22,77) (24,96) (26,57)
with brackets
Storage shelf, slotted,
95 7005 (16,68) (26,57) (30,25) (32,78)
with brackets
W×D×H mm 488×453×35 738×453×35 988×453×35 1188×453×35
suitable for system cabinets size 500 750 / 1500 1000 / 2000 1200
95 7005
Vertical dividers of galvanised sheet metal

Suitable for: For storage shelves No. 957005.
95 7008 Vertical divider (35,77)

W×D×H mm 17×453×340
Storage shelf with carrying capacity 200 kg 95 7008
Suitable for: System cabinets of sizes 1000 / 2000.

Colour: Universal tool carriers RAL 7035 powder-coated, galvanised storage shelf.
Supplied with: 1 pair universal tool carriers with 2-part storage shelf.
Size = For cabinet / compartment width mm 1000 200 kg

Storage shelf with
95 7010 (85,10)
200 kg carrying capacity
W×D×H mm 988×453×40 95 7010
Drawers of sheet metal

Version: With telescopic action, 100 % extendable.
Base and walls slotted all round on the inside (pitch 17 mm).
For multiple divisions. Drawer fronts have extruded aluminium pull grips.
Size = Front height mm 80 120 140 160 200 300 60 kg 100%

95 7022 suitable for (106,49) (106,49) (107,41) (109,25) (109,25) (115,58)
cabinet width 500 mm
95 7024
suitable for (109,25) (109,25) (111,55) (111,55) (111,55) (118,45)
95
95 7026 suitable for (114,31) (114,31) (116,15) (117,30) (117,30) (123,63)
Working height mm 66 106 126 146 186 286
Shell height mm 62 102 122 142 182 282
Usable area (units 17 mm) (95 7022) mm/E 374×445 / (22×26 units)
Weight (95 7022) kg 5.9 6.7 7.1 7.6 8.6 11.4
Weight (95 7024) kg 7.5 8.5 9.1 9.7 10.9 14.4 95 7024_120
Weight (95 7026) kg 9.0 10.3 11 11.7 13.1 17.2
to fit system cabinet Size 500
to fit system cabinet Size 750/1500
to fit system cabinet Size 1000/2000
For accessories and divider sets see No. 96 0900 − 96 1170, 96 1260 − 961275
96 1260
Example
96 1270
Continued ▶

▶ Continued
Pull-out shelves 60 kg 100%
Version: With telescopic action, 100 % extendable.

Size = for cabinet / compartment width mm 500 750 1000

Pull-out shelf
95 7028 (114,31) (118,45) (127,65)
with full 100 % extension
Usable area mm 391×442 595×442 799×442
Shell height / overall height mm 56 / 100 56 / 100 56 / 100
suitable for system cabinets Size 500 750 / 1500 1000 / 2000
95 7028_750
Suspension file insert of sheet metal

Suitable for: Drawer front height 300 mm.
Version: Suspension file insert (as a pair) to complete drawers
No. 957022 − 957026 size 300, (without folders).
Colour: Anthracite grey RAL 7016 powder-coated.
95 7032 Suspension file insert (29,67) 95 7032
Grinding wheel carrier Example
Suitable for: System cabinets size 750 / 1000 / 1500 / 2000.

Version: Pair of swing-out arms each with 12 sockets ⌀ 11 mm to accept individual
grinding wheels. Aluminium joints with steel bushes and automatic restraints
prevent the arm from swinging out when not intended. When the grinding
wheel is swung back into place an end stop protects it against damage.
95 7055_750
Size = for cabinet / compartment width mm 750 1000

95 7055 Grinding wheel carrier (336,95) (451,95)
Loading capacity per carrier arm kg 30 30 95 7055_1000
maximum grinding wheel ⌀ per carrier mm 450 450
95 Grinding wheel mounting

Suitable for: Grinding wheel carrier No. 957055.
Version: The base carrier is made of sheet metal, powder-coated RAL 7035.
Three variably positioned mounting pins of POM secure the grinding
wheel either at the mounting hole or at the circumference.
Small grinding wheels can be mounted directly on the mounting pin.
Size = Type mm V
Grinding wheel mounting
95 7056 (57,16)
variable
Pin length mm 30
Pin ⌀ mm 10 95 7056
⌀ adjustable from − to mm 24 − 240 Steplessly adjustable
Overall ⌀ mm 235 from 24 − 240 mm.
Installing fittings on rack panels

Items for mounting on rack panels within system cabinets can
be found under No. 96 1325 − 96 1430 and 96 1510.
_SB6
96 1340_50×40 96 1380 96 1495 96 1510 _SB5

Hook Screwdriver holder Tool clips Open storage bins
Continued ▶

▶ Continued
Rack panels for plain sheet metal doors

Version: Of sheet metal for holding hooks or open storage bins. The rack 0.9
panels are screwed to the inside of swing doors, using the screws
provided. Only for cabinets with plain sheet metal swing
doors of minimum size 750 mm wide and 1000 mm high.
Cabinets with a height of 2000 mm can take 2 panels per swing door.
Size L – With 9×9 mm square holes at 37 mm intervals for mounting
hooks and supports No. 961325 − 96 1430.
Size S – With slots to accept open storage bins No. 961510.
Note: Open storage bins and wide projecting tools cannot be arranged
in the height of storage shelves.
with rack panels.
Size = Type L S
Rack panels
95 7060 (45,08) (45,08)
for plain sheet metal doors
Width×height×thickness mm 248×792×28 248×792×28
95 7060_S 95 7060_L
Accessories for system cabinets up to 1200 mm high

Version: 2 sheet metal cross beams complete with wheel set and handle
for screwing to system cabinets (holes are pre-drilled).
Size L – With 4 castors (2 with brakes)
Size L/B – 2 steerable castors with brakes and 2 fixed wheels.
Colour: Anthracite RAL 7016 powder-coated.
95 7070_L/B
95
Size = Type L L/B
95 7070 Wheels and push handle (123,05) (97,98)
Carriage height mm 150 150
Wheel ⌀ mm 125 125
suitable for cabinets No. 95 6120 − 95 6660 95 6120 − 95 6660 Installation example
with wheels and push
handle.
Base of sheet metal

Version: Base of sheet metal. 0.9
95 7075 – Pallet truck base 150 mm high with 2 stabilising cross struts
and removable covers at front and rear for transport.
95 7077 – Base 100 mm high, hot-dip galvanised of sheet steel folded all round.
Not suitable for transport with a pallet truck.
Rust-resistant base for matching heights when installed in a row of
tool cabinets No. 94 2906 − 94 5000, which incorporate a 100 mm base.
95 7075
Size = For cabinet width mm 500 750 1000 1200 1500 2000
Pallet truck base Pallet truck base for
95 7075 — (216,78) (232,30) (246,10) (264,50) (294,40) system cabinets.
150 mm high
Rust-resistant base
95 7077 (140,30) (144,33) (147,20) (150,08) (153,53) (159,85)
100 mm high
W×D mm 500×550 750×550 1000×550 1200×550 1500×550 2000×550
Height (95 7075) mm − 150 150 150 150 150
Height (95 7077) mm 100 100 100 100 100 100
95 7077
suitable for system cabinets Size 500 750 1000 1200 1500 2000
Continued ▶

Use our eForm planner to
We will gladly prepare a plan your rigid foam inserts.
quotation for counter solutions
to your specifications.
Examples for storage of heavy

tools can be found in group 94.
Example: Counter for data management and

planning. The corner solution uses two 2 corner
segments 45° No. 957080.

▶ Continued
Corner segments 45 °
Version: Suitable for system cabinets 1000, 1200 and 2000 mm high (for 2000 mm 0.9
cabinet height use 2 corner segments size 1000). For creating corner and
star arrangements. For a 90° angle, two segments are required.
Only available without doors and internal fittings.
Size = Overall height mm 1000 1200

95 7080 Corner segment 45° (127,65) (136,28)
Weight kg 14 15
Example − Insertion of 95 7080

a corner segment
95 Covers and tops for system cabinets
Cover tops of ribbed rubber or plywood

Version:
95 7090 – Of 3 mm thick ribbed rubber, black;
suitable for the top of system cabinets.
95 7095 – Made of 22 mm thick plywood, 95 7090
for system cabinets 95 6000 − 95 6660.
Size = for cabinet width mm 500 750 1000 1200 1500 2000
Ribbed rubber 95 7095
95 7090 (21,28) (23,92) (25,42) (27,37) (32,20) (36,80)
cover top
Plywood
95 7095 (51,98) (68,08) (83,95) (92,92) (111,32) (140,30)
cover top
Width mm 500 750 1000 1200 1500 2000
Depth mm 550 550 550 550 550 550
Cover top of plywood − corner segment −

Version: Made of 22 mm thick plywood, for corner segment No. 957080.
Plywood 95 7097
95 7097 (94,76)
top surfaces
Writing desk tops

Version: Of sheet metal; fold-out wooden top with leaf hinges, 0.9
shelf underneath, lockable.
Also suitable for wall mounting.
Size = width mm 500 750

95 7100 Writing desk top (163,88) (227,70)
W×D×H mm 500×550×270 750×550×270 95 7100
Writing surface W×D mm 495×390 745×390

Heavy duty cabinets 725 mm deep (36 units) with TÜV / GS kitemark 1000 mm high
200 kg
Cabinets without doors on request.
1.0 1600 kg
Version: Side walls reinforced with integral pillars.

Mountings for shelves at 20 mm intervals.
All doors with safety edges, reinforced on the inside.
Sliding doors run silently on ball-bearing runners.
All models with lockable doors have slide handle
and cylinder lock.
Galvanised sheet steel storage shelves,
reinforced version for 200 kg load capacity.
Heavy duty cabinets 717 mm (36 units) and 1024 mm (54 units) wide
717/F 717 1024/F 1024

225°
Size = Width mm / model 717/F 717 1024/F 1024
Heavy duty cabinet with
95 8000 (621,–) (526,70) (663,55) (557,75)
95 8020 (662,40) (566,95) (721,05) (615,25)
Number of storage shelves No. 95 8600 pieces 2 − 2 −
W×D mm 717 (36 units)×725 1024 (54 units)×725
Weight (95 8000) kg 53 41 66 49
95 8020
Heavy duty cabinets 1434 mm (2×36 units) wide
95
95 8100 (1344,35) (1158,05)
95 8120 (1421,40) (1235,10)
W×D mm 1434 (2×36 units)×725
Weight (95 8100) kg 133 108 95 8100
2048/F 2048
95 8200 (1366,20) (1154,60)
95 8220 (1512,25) (1300,65)
Number of storage shelves No. 95 8600 size 1024 pcs. 4 −
W×D mm 2048 (2×54 units)×725
Weight (95 8200) kg 176 141 95 8220
Continued ▶

Heavy duty cabinets 725 mm deep (36 units) with TÜV / GS kitemark 2000 mm high
▶ continued
i 1.0
200 kg
1600 kg
Heavy duty cabinets 1024 mm (54 units) wide
225°

95 8300 (941,85) (680,80)
95 8320 (1083,30) (816,50)
W×D mm 1024 (54 units)×725 95 8300
Weight (95 8300) kg 118 74
95 8320

95 8400 (1866,45) (1399,55)
95 8420 (2065,40) (1597,35)
W×D mm 1434 (2×36 units)×725
95 Overall height
Usable height
Weight (95 8400)
mm
mm
kg 249
2000
1820
186
95 8400

95 8500 (2041,25) (1512,25)
95 8520 (2344,85) (1813,55)
W×D mm 2048 (2×54 units)×725
Weight (95 8500) kg 332 243
Cabinets without doors on request.
200 kg
Heavy duty storage shelves, 200 kg load capacity

Size = for width mm 717 1024
Heavy duty storage shelf,
95 8600 (54,28) (61,87)
galvanised
W×D mm 593×628 900×628
suitable for No. 95 8000 − 95 8520 size 717 + 1434 1024 + 2048
Units 36 E 54 E

Upright cabinets 725 mm deep (36 units) with TÜV / GS kitemark
1.2 700 kg
Version: Cabinet body made of 1.75 mm and pull-out frames of

1.25 mm thick high quality sheet metal. The pull-out
frames are cantilevered and equipped with a single
extend lock (only 1 frame can be pulled out at a time).
The hot-dip galvanised frame side walls have holes at
intervals of 37 mm for mounting tool carriers, storage
shelf trays and perforated tool boards. The upright
cabinets are prepared for wall or floor mounting and
must be secured against tilting. The cabinets have a
central catch with a cylinder lock incorporated within 95 8610_2 95 8610_4
a slide handle.
pull-out frames signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
Optional accessories: The pull-out frames can be fitted with
storage shelf trays No. 95 8620
perforated panels No. 95 8625
tool carriers No. 970180 / 970200
Size = Number of pull-out frames 2 4

Upright cabinet
95 8610 (2593,25) (2816,35)
1000 mm high
Upright cabinet
95 8615 (3070,50) (3464,95)
2000 mm high
Height (95 8610) mm 1000 1000
Height (95 8615) mm 2000 2000
W×D mm 717×725 717×725
Inner dimensions H×W×D (95 8610) mm 690×315×628 690×155×628
Inner dimensions H×W×D (95 8615) mm 1690×315×628 1690×155×628
Maximum loading per pull-out frame kg 350 175
Weight (95 8610) kg 181 181
Weight (95 8615) kg 252 252
95 8615_2 95 8615_4
Storage trays for upright cabinets The illustrations show different fitments for upright cabinets.
Suitable for: The fittings are not included.
Size 150 – For upright cabinet No. 95 8610 size 4 / 95 8615 size 4.
Size 300 – For upright cabinet No. 95 8610 size 2 / 95 8615 size 2.
Version: Made of galvanised steel sheet, all sides folded upwards.
Including fastening material for bolting into pull-out
frames of upright cabinets.
Suitable for fitting small parts storage bins No. 96 0650.
100 kg
95
Size = Width mm 150 300 95 8620_150
Galvanised
95 8620 (18,86) (17,31)
storage tray
L×W×H mm 627×154×35 627×308×35
Perforated panels for upright cabinets 95 8620_300
Suitable for:
Size 1000 – Fills one pull-out frame of cabinet No. 95 8610 completely.
Size 2000 – Fills one half of a pull-out frame of cabinet No. 95 8615 −
to fill a frame completely, 2 perforated tool boards
size 2000 are required.
Version: Made of 1.25 mm high quality sheet metal with 9×9 mm
square, holes at 37 mm intervals for single sided mounting
of hooks and holders No. 96 1325 − 96 1430 and perforated
panel accessories from No. 961450 onwards.
Size = for upright cabinet height mm 1000 2000

95 8625 Perforated tool board (43,70) (48,07)
95 8625_1000 Fitment example
H×W mm 677.5×627 840.5×627 95 8615_4
Weight kg 6.3 7.9
Tool carriers for fitting to the upright cabinets are shown under No. 97 0180 / 97 0200.
Small parts storage bins for the storage tray can be found under No. 96 0650.

We will be pleased to advise you on planning your tool storage.
The planning example makes special use of upright cabinets for storage.
Further examples of tool storage can be found in Group 97.
95 Safe storage of grinding wheels
recommends the storage of large

grinding wheels flat in GARANT
grinding wheel cabinets.
Further information and products on the

subject of grinding can be found in the
main catalogue, product group 59.
If wheels are stored upright, the moisture Storing wheels flat permits them to
collects in the lower part of the wheel. dry out evenly. Safe storage in
Uneven drying of the wheel creates an preparation for their next use.
out-of-balance hazard.

Garment lockers with TÜV / GS kitemark
0.9 225°
Standard: DIN 4547

Version: Base-frame of 2 mm thick aluminium sheet. Back walls with
ventilation slots, doors with towel holder and name plate.
The door can easily be converted from right to left hanging.
Interior fittings 1 storage shelf each (carrying capacity 40 kg)
plus hanger rail with 3 hooks per compartment.
The storage shelves can be adjusted for height.
95 8710/8720/8730 – With high quality cylinder lock in the slide handle.
95 8715/8725/8735 – With rotary catch; lockable with a padlock (not included).
95 8710_3
95 8710_2
Cylinder lock:
High-quality cylinder lock with 5 pins
and modular barrel incorporated in the
handy GARANT slide handle. Fitted with Rotary catch:
a large labelling field. For more informa- Can be locked with padlock with hasp
tion on locks, see No. 96 0000−96 0020. ⌀ up to 6 mm (not included).
Can be retrofitted with the electronic For padlocks, see the main catalogue
locking system. under No. 08 5822 − 5875 to size 40 or
No. 08 5812 / 5814 / 5816 size 45.
Size = Number of doors 2 3

Garment locker
95 8710 (422,05) (601,45)
with cylinder lock
95 95 8715 Garment locker with
rotary catch
(422,05) (601,45)
Locker width×depth mm 800×520 1200×520

Internal width×depth per section mm 342×472 342×472
95 8720_6
Internal height per section mm 1188 + 370 1188 + 370
Weight kg 68 102
95 8720_4

Garment locker
95 8720 (506,–) (722,20)
with cylinder lock
Garment locker with
95 8725 (506,–) (722,20)
rotary catch
Internal height per section mm 780 780
Weight kg 68 102

Garment locker
95 8730 (609,50) (895,85)
with cylinder lock
Garment locker with
95 8735 (609,50) (895,85)
rotary catch
Overall height mm 1850 1850 95 8730_12
Internal height per section mm 370 370 95 8730_8
Weight kg 76 114

Garment lockers with TÜV / GS kitemark
0.8 225°
Standard: DIN 4547

Version: Doors with resilient stops.
The body has a sloping roof, plastic slides for the shelf assembly and
a removable base fascia at the front. One shelf with 2 clothes hooks
per unit. The special design accepts integral helmets, despite a unit
width of only 300 mm (design registration applied for).
95 8750 – With high quality cylinder lock in the slide handle.
95 8755 – With rotary catch; lockable with padlock up to size 40 (not included).
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, doors signal blue RAL 5005, powder coated.
Note:  Lockers are supplied fully assembled.

 For padlocks to suit rotary catches see main catalogue
No. 08 5822 − 08 5875, and DOM padlocks No. 08 5812 / 5814.
No. 08 5816 size 45 is suitable for locking systems.
95 8750_2
95 8755_2
With rotary catch
Cylinder lock:
High-quality cylinder lock with 5 pins
and modular barrel incorporated in the Rotary catch: Sloping roof: Special design:
handy GARANT slide handle. Fitted with Can be locked with padlock with Increases the clear height at the top Cut-outs increase the clear width
a large labelling field. For more informa- hasp ⌀ up to 6 mm (not included). for taking long awkward objects. to accept integral helmets (design
tion on locks, see No. 96 0000−96 0020. For padlocks, see the main catalogue registration applied for).
Can be retrofitted with the electronic under No. 08 5822 − 5875 to size 40 or
locking system. No. 08 5812 / 5814 / 5816 size 45.
95

Garment locker
95 8750 (316,25) (439,30)
with cylinder lock
Garment locker
95 8755 (316,25) (439,30)
with rotary catch
Overall height (at front / at rear) mm 1850 / 2000 1850 / 2000
Internal width×depth per section mm 240 (280)×475 240 (280)×475
Usable height for each unit mm 1240 + 420 − 480 1240 + 420 − 480
Shelf (W×D) mm 295×250 295×250
Weight kg 49.8 69.3
95 8750_3
See the main catalogue for padlocks:

No. 08 5822 − 5875 to size 40 or
No. 08 5812 / 5814 / 5816 size 45.
On request we can supply

garment lockers also with
a seating bench.

Grinding wheel cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark 550 mm deep
60 kg
0.9 1000 kg 225°
Version: System cabinet fitted with grinding wheel carriers and a fully extendable drawer.
Pair of swing-out arms each with 12 sockets ⌀ 11 mm to accept individual
grinding wheels. Aluminium joints with steel bushes and automatic restraints
prevent the arm from swinging out when not intended. When the grinding
wheel is swung back into place an end stop protects it against damage. The
drawer is for storage of special tools and accessories. Universal grinding wheel
mountings are not included.
Note: For storage shelves and accessories to system cabinets see No. 957000 −
957100. For grinding wheel mountings see No. 957056 size V.
95 8760_750/4
■ Secure ■ Universal ■ Protective

▶
▶
▶
▶
▶
Carrier arm with restraints Steplessly adjustable

and end stop. from 24 − 240 mm.
Size = Width mm / number of carrier arms 750/4 1000/16

Grinding wheel cabinet with
95 8760 (1762,95) (4123,90)
Grinding wheel cabinet with
95 8765 (1810,10) (4241,20)
W×D mm 750×550 1000×550
Number of drawers No. 95 7024 / 95 7026 size 120 pieces 1 1
Plywood shelf 20 mm thick pieces 1 −
Maximum grinding wheel ⌀ mm 500 450
Weight kg 112 250 95 8760_1000/16 95
Installation example: GARANT Grinding wheel cabinet
1st step:
Which grinding wheels need Maximum
to be stored ? diameter
450 mm each
carrier arm
▶
2nd step: ▶
Determine the number

of necessary grinding ▶
wheel mounting
No. 957056 size V. ▶
▶
Steplessly
adjustable
24 − 240 mm
▶
3rd step:
Define the grinding wheel
carrier No. 957055
size 750 or size 1000.
4th step:
Define the system cabinet  12 sockets on each carrier arm
No. 95 6150 − 95 6785 in sizes  A carrier arm can hold several grinding wheels
750 / 1000 / 1500 and 2000. (depending on the wheel ⌀)

Ergonomically designed − quickly delivered − professionally

installed:
 From initial concept to approval.
 Many years of experience in concept preparation and planning.
 Competence in planning, consultation and installation.
It's that easy !
You require specific special solutions and expect tailor-made

designs − we will convert your ideas into practice!
Our capable consultants will accompany your project from the
idea through the CAD quotation drawing to the ready to use
installation by our professional team of installers.
Everything from one source !
95

Range overview − rounding out the selection
Advantages:
− Security and flexibility:
A comprehensive locking system offers individual solutions for a complete range of workshop equipment.
Accepts both mechanical and electronic locking systems.
− Orderliness − clarity − cleanliness:
− Divider systems for drawers in workbenches and drawer cabinets offer a wide potential for safe storage of
your tools and small components.
− Accessories for storage on perforated panels, such as hooks, display books and open storage bins,
permitting optimum storage in the vertical plane.
− Mats as safe underlay for tools and covers for cabinets.
− Workplace accessories for people:
− Wooden safety slatting and workplace mats for non-fatiguing and safe working.
− Chairs and standing stools for ergonomic and healthy posture.
− Ladders and platforms for safe removal of objects when working at a height.
− Clear-view storage systems:
Shelf racking is quick to assemble and offers large storage areas at an attractive price.
Application Variants Page

Safety 134 –
137
Organising in drawers 138 –

157
Organising on perforated panels 158 –

163
Mats 164 –
167
96
Technical seating 168 –
171
Technical steps 172 –

175
Plug-in racking 176 –

179

Locking systems − mechanical
Advantages:
 Flexible  Clear
Modular system consisting of Garant slide handle / lock plate or The position of the slide handles is evident at a glance,
DOM padlock and DOM lock barrel; permits flexible equipment indicating whether the cupboard is closed.
of the workshop to your requirements. Integral labelling field within the handle.
A simple exchange of lock barrels permits the use of specific lock
numbers or the use of mechanical locking systems. Contents:
Exchanging the handle unit / plate unit for an electronic variety  Fitting the handy slide handle with lock barrel in doors of workbench units
permits the use of an electronic locking solution. and cupboards of the numbering range 92 0000 to 95 8755 except for the
 Practical Kompakt and Holex workbench ranges and asecos products.
Free access to the wide, easy-grip slide handle.  Fitting a lock plate with lock barrel in drawer units except for the Kompakt
Cupboards can be opened even using a gloved hand. and Holex workbench ranges.
The doors of workbenches can be fixed in the closed position using
the slide handle, even without using the key to lock them.
Individual locking system parts − mechanical
Lock barrels (replacement locks) Note: Lock barrels can be replaced only by using the
disassembly tool No. 96 0020 together with the
Suitable for: Factory equipment with locks, from year of construction 07 / 2000. key that fits the lock barrel.
Version: Precision manufactured from solid brass, When ordering lock barrels you should therefore
surface matt nickel-plated. always order the disassembly tool as well.
Five-pin cylinder locks with brass pins ⌀ 2 mm.
Available numbering range 001 − 200.
Application: For quick lock number changes or replacement locks.
Supplied with: 2 keys and fitting instructions.
• 3
Note:  When ordering please state the required lock number

(within the numbering range 001 − 200).
 For security reasons, lock barrels No. 96 0000 are not
available as a superset locking system (master key).
• •
Only master key systems satisfy these criteria.
 Cylinder shells and twist handles fitted from 07 / 2000 to
•
08 / 2008 are available on request. 1 2
 Replacement locks and keys from Eurolocks (lock numbers
45001 − 45200 and 49101 − 49300, fitted from 06 / 2000) 1 Example of cylinder shell (from 08 /
are available on request. 2008 fitted exclusively to GARANT
roller cabinets and to KOMPAKT
••
and HOLEX workbench ranges).
2 Lock barrel No. 96 0000
96 3 Disassembly tool No. 96 0020
Size = Lock number (3-digit) 001.....200

Push handle
96 0000 Lock barrel with 2 keys 15,99 from 08 / 2008
Replacement keys
Suitable for: See lock barrels.
Version: Made of nickel silver, key profile is exclusive
to the Hoffmann Group.
96 0000
Numbering range 001 − 200 available.
Note: When ordering please state the required lock number. Lock plate
(Within the number range 001 − 200.) from 08 / 2008
Size = Lock number (3-digit) 001.....200

96 0010 Replacement keys 9,83
96 0010
Disassembly tool
Application: To change (release) lock barrels.
Operates only in conjunction with the key
which fits the lock barrel.
96 0020
96 0020 Disassembly tool 1,56

Locking system barrel inserts and keys − mechanical
Version: Locking system barrel inserts can be used in place of the standard barrel inserts (Ho 001 − Ho 200).
When a new locking system is delivered, a security card is supplied. Only this card legitimises SECURITY CARD
the customer to purchase subsequent spare or additional components. Locking systems
are made to order and cannot be returned.
Application:
Size 1/100 – A maximum of 100 different locks can be included in 1 supervisory hierarchical level,
e. g. one master key can open up to 100 locks in a group or department.
Size 1/300 – A maximum of 300 different locks can be included in 1 supervisory hierarchical level,
e. g. one master key can open up to 300 locks in a group or department.
Size 3/300 – A maximum of 300 different locks can be included in up to 3 supervisory hierarchical levels,
e. g. several groups or departments each with up to 300 locks, and above them several group
keys, group master keys and a grand master key. Please submit a planning form.
Size 3/2000 – A maximum of 2000 different locks can be included in up to 3 supervisory hierarchical levels,
e. g. several groups or departments with up to 2000 locks, and above them several group keys,
group master keys and a grand master key. Please submit a planning form.
Note: Locking systems are made to order and require planning.

When a new system is being created, a completed and signed locking system plan / planning
form must be submitted.
After the first delivery of the system, the customer receives a security card as proof of
legitimacy. The locking system can be re-ordered and extended on submission of a photocopy
of the security card.
When re-ordering, please state the identity of the system (4-letter code) and for No. 96 0022
sizes 3/300 and 3/2000, the exact allocation of the lock barrels to the desired groups / master
groups. For No. 96 0024 please state whether the requirement is for a master key, group key or
group sub-master key.
Size = Hierarchical levels / maximum number of locks 1/100 1/300 3/300 3/2000
Locking system barrel inserts
96 0022 (24,15) (25,99) (28,06) (30,48)
with 2 keys
Key for
96 0023 (9,83)
locking system barrel insert
Higher-ranking keys for locking systems
96 0024 (13,17)
(e.g. master keys)
Locking systems
Barrel inserts No. 96 0000 are interchangeable with locking system barrel inserts (see No. 96 0022).
Y CARD This allows multiple applications to be satisfied, from simple use of one key for a group of locks to
SECURIT
complex locking systems.
Each locking system is unique − replacement keys or additional keys are issued only on production
of your security card. Before placing the initial order, please plan the extent of the overall system −
structural alterations cannot be made later − such as the introduction of a master group level (hierarchy
level 2) if previously the system was set up to have only groups (hierarchy level 3).
Versatility combined with high security !
Example of a sub-master key within a suite of keys

96
Hierarchy level 1 General master key
(General master key) (locks everything)
can lock all
storage equipment
Hierarchy level 2 Master group key,
(Group master key) can lock master group 1
all cabinets, workbenches
in depts. 1 / 2, not dept. 3
Hierarchy level 3 Group key
(Group sub-master key) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
locks all cabinets, workb. of
the respective department Department 1 Department 2 Department 3
Workbench Cabinet Workbench ToolCar Computer cabinet System cabinet

fitted with 2 lock 1 lock barrel, 1 lock barrel, 1 lock barrel, fitted with 3 lock 1 lock barrel,
barrels, shared key individual key individual key individual key barrels, shared key individual key
Continued ▶

G-LS Garant-Locking-System − Electronic Locking System
G-LS Base system G-LS Manager (extension stage)
Battery
+
Electronic lock Master card − Transponder − Reader unit − Software −
(slide handle) Legitimation and opening and synchronisation planning and
including battery programming closing of the data management
G-LS Garant Locking System

Building on the mechanical locking system, we offer you the opportunity to easily plan and manage the access control to your storage cabinets, using the G-LS
GARANT locking system. The system allows quick and effective handling, giving you great flexibility in structuring your system. You can plan and modify your
locking system as required. The G-LS Manager extension stage allows further simplification of the management of the system. Software offers you facilities to
plan your locking system.
The advantages: G-LS Manager
 Comprehensive across GARANT storage cabinets Electronic locking system
 Easy handling Extension stage −
 Quick and versatile in use planning and management
 Can be extended: G-LS Manager − PC-based management on the PC
G-LS Base system

Electronic locking system
with the same fixing template
as the mechanical system. The
electronic lock replaces the slide
handle and the lock plate.
Workbenches
Groups 92, 93
Oil cabinets
Group 98
Tool cabinets
Group 94
Mechanical locking system

(No. 96 0000, 96 0022)
with specific lock numbers or
Storage cabinets as a locking system.
Group 97
Computer cabinets
Group 95
96 Swing door cabinets

Group 95
Racking systems
Group 94
Select the locking system extension stage that corresponds to the requirements within your company.
G-LS Base system
 Easy and quick to set up an individual locking system by quick assignment of the transponders to the respective cabinets.
Any number of transponders can be set up for each cabinet. If you wish to enable one transponder to lock all the cabinets, you
can use a master key function. Many locking structures can be implemented individually.
 Battery-operated − can be used even in mobile cabinets. No emergency unlocking required.
 Large display with pictograms allows quick and easy operation.
Displays:
User authorised − User not authorised −

cabinet is unlocked− cabinet remains locked
The catch is released manually
 Status display for the lock (slide handle)
 Master card activates the lock −

Assignment and deletion of transponders.
Generation of different locking modes.
Selective deletion of transponder numbers.

G-LS Garant-Locking-System
G-LS Manager
Have you a large number of employees, for whom the manual administration is too laborious,
or would you like to exploit the wider potential of an electronic locking system (such as the
reporting functions), then you can install the G-LS Base System with the G-LS Manager.
The Base System is being used more and more for cabinets − you receive for its implementation
the software and a read/write programming unit.
Your facilities:
 Easy planning of the system on a PC (G-LS software) − tree structure for management.
 In this way even the most complex locking systems can easily be replaced.
 Any number of user entitlements can be assigned.
 Time zones for access to cabinets can be set up.
 Selection of different locking modes.
 User activity reports can be issued.
 Read unit allows synchronisation of the data on the PC and the lock.
Individual parts of the G-LS locking system
G-LS system components

IP
Suitable for: GARANT storage cabinets with sliding handles and lock plates from build year 41
09 / 2008. Except GARANT roller cabinets, workbench ranges KOMPAKT and
HOLEX.
Version:
Size BASIS; ADD – Electronic locking unit (slide lock) with display.
The antenna is located behind the GARANT battery cover.
Battery type: Lithium 3.6 V. With polarity reversal protection.
See the main catalogue No. 08 1560 size LS14250 for spare batteries.
Size MANAGER – Read/write programming unit. With USB interface. The planning software
supplied is compatible with the popular Office programmes.
Supplied with:
Size BASIS – Initial ordering of an electronic locking system. Consisting of at least 1 lock
(slide handle with battery). The master card (for authorisation and programming)
is included in the scope of supply. With this lock and a transponder your +
electronic locking system is ready to use.
Size ADD – Extension of an electronic locking system. Consisting of at least 1 lock (slide
handle with battery). Without a master card. When ordering, please state the
number of your master card (printed on the back as No. M.... ). Please also state
the storage cabinet in which you intend to use the lock.
Size MANAGER – Module for making planning easier and managing the system. One read/write
programming unit with additional system planning software (for installation by
the customer). 96 0011_BASIS
Note:  If the electronic locking system is ordered separately from the storage
cabinets for retrofitting, please be sure to list the storage cabinets
to which the locks are to be fitted.
 Each system has one master card and in the extended version a read/
write programming unit. Please keep these parts securely stored. The
master card constitutes the manager's legitimation. Programming cannot
be performed without the read/write programming unit. 96
+
Size = Type BASIS ADD MANAGER
Electronic
96 0011 (159,85) (159,85) (1459,35)
lock component 96 0011_MANAGER
Transponder
Suitable for: G-LS system solution. Transponders can be used equally in the base level
and extension level versions (manager).
Any transponder can be used in any system, factory programming is not
necessary.
Orders cannot be placed for replacement of specific transponder numbers.
Laser-engraved numbering makes management easy.
Version: Plastic housing 16×50×5 mm (H×W×thickness).
A ⌀ 6 mm hole allows the transponder to be put on a key ring.
The sequential laser-engraved numbering is applied to the narrow edge of
the transponder.
96 0012 Transponder 18,40

Dividers for workbench drawers
Slotted dividers
Suitable for: Drawers No. 92 0140 and 10 mm = 1 divider unit (E)
▶
• 1 • 2
▶
drawers of workbenches No. 93 0950 − 93 3425
and No. 93 3500 − 93 3900.
Version: Of galvanised sheet steel, slots at 10 mm intervals
(corresponds to a divider unit E).
Supply includes fixing screws.
•
▶
32E/48E
3
•
▶
1 No. 96 0030
•
Size = Height mm 33 73 113 slotted dividers
2 No. 96 0040
•
Slotted divider
96 0030 7,94 9,55 10,58 plain divider
520 mm long
3 Divider units
Suitable for drawers with front height mm 60 and 80 100 and 120 140 and more
Divider plates of aluminium

Application: For further drawer divisions connected with slotted dividers No. 96 0030.
Size = Height×width mm 33×60 33×80 33×100 33×120 33×160 33×200 33×240

96 0040 Plain divider 0,54 0,54 0,66 0,66 0,78 0,86 1,32
Divider units E Number of steps 6 8 10 12 16 20 24
For front height mm 60 and 80
Size = Height×width mm 73×60 73×80 73×100 73×120 73×160 73×200 73×240

96 0040 Plain divider 0,66 0,66 0,78 0,95 1,32 1,52 1,86
Divider units E Number of steps 6 8 10 12 16 20 24
For front height mm 100 and 120
Size = Height×width mm 113×80 113×100 113×120 113×160 113×200 113×240

96 0040 Plain divider 1,22 1,52 1,81 2,08 2,54 2,65
Divider units E Number of steps 8 10 12 16 20 24
For front height mm 140 and more
Sets of slotted dividers / plain dividers

Suitable for: For drawer interior dimensions 490×520 mm (W×D), unit width 600 mm.
_5 + 8 _4 + 5 _3 + 5 _2 + 5 _1 + 2
96 Size = Number of pieces 5+8 4+5 3+5 2+5 1+2
Slotted divider / plain divider set
96 0050 42,78 33,93 26,34 19,21 10,35
for front heights 60 and 80 mm
96 0060 51,41 40,71 32,43 24,96 12,88
96 0070 — 48,19 39,56 30,71 15,41
for front heights from 140 mm
Contents: Slotted dividers No. 96 0030 pieces 5 4 3 2 1
Contents: Plain dividers No. 96 0040 pieces×size 8×size ...×80 4×size . . . ×100 5×size...×120 5×size...×160 2×size...×240
1×size. . . . × 80
Practical examples:
Equipment projects handled by the
Hoffmann Group.
Just contact us − we can develop
special solutions for you too.

Dividers for workbench drawers
Sets of slotted dividers / plain dividers

Suitable for: For drawer interior dimensions 320×520 mm (W×D),
unit width 430 mm.
_3 + 8 _2 + 6 _1 + 2
Size = Number of pieces 3+8 2+6 1+2

96 0080 27,37 19,21 9,26
96 0090 32,89 23,46 11,85
96 0100 — 30,59 14,61
for front heights from 140 mm
Contents: Slotted dividers No. 96 0030 pieces 3 2 1
Contents: Plain dividers No. 96 0040 pieces×size 8×size ...×80 4×size ...×100; 2×size...×160
2×size ...×120
Trough inserts of polystyrene

Suitable for: For drawers in workbenches
No. 92 0000 − 93 3425 and 93 3500 − 93 4170.
96 0120 – For drawer interior dimensions 320×520 mm (W×D),
unit width 430 mm. Divider 96 0120
96 0130 – For drawer interior dimensions 490×520 mm (W×D), 96 0140
unit width 600 mm.
Width 320 mm, depth 520 mm,

96 0120 Trough inserts, 5 pieces 30,94
height 30 mm, trough width 50 mm
Width 490 mm, depth 520 mm,
96 0130 Trough insert, 7 pieces 30,94
height 30 mm, trough width 50 mm
96 0140 Divider 0,62 Width 50 mm, height 30 mm 96 0130
Ribbed rubber inlays

Suitable for: For drawers in workbenches
No. 92 0000 − 93 3425 and 93 3500 − 93 4170.
unit width 430 mm.
unit width 600 mm.
Ribbed rubber inlay,

96 0150 9,14 Width 320 mm, depth 520 mm
3 mm thick
Ribbed rubber inlay,
96 0160 10,41 Width 490 mm, depth 520 mm
3 mm thick
Measurement tool inlay of sheet steel with ribbed rubber inlay 96

Suitable for: For drawer interior dimensions 490×520 mm (W×D),
unit width 600 mm.
Measurement tool tray with Width 481 mm, depth 300 mm,
96 0170 16,16
ribbed rubber usable height 17 mm
For measurement tool inlay
96 0180 Spare ribbed rubber inlay 4,70
No. 96 0170
For labelling machines see the Hoffmann Group main catalogue
Labelling machines
No. 08 5500

Divider sets for tool cabinets 27×36 E
Suitable for: Drawers No. 94 2926/94 2931 or drawers of cabinets No. 94 2941−94 2951.
One set fills a drawer completely. 17 mm = 1 divider unit (E)
▶
Version: For labelling, either label holders (No. 96 0665) or barcode carriers ▶
(No. 96 0660) can be fitted.

96 0190 – Troughs made of high-impact plastic (ABS). Slotted on the inside
for division using dividing plates. Small part bins of polystyrene.
96 0200–0240 – The slotted dividers match the height of the drawers.
Lateral slots at increments of 17 : 17 mm allow dividers to be fitted.
Application:
96 0190 – A range of troughs for storing taps, reamers, twist drills etc.
Range of containers for storing screws, nuts, washers etc.
96 0200–0240 – For storing tools, appliances, small parts etc.
_M4 _M4 + 3 _B26 / 1− 3 _B52 / 1− 3 _B77 / 2 + 3

Size = Type M4 M4+3 B26/1–3 B52/1–3 B77/2+3
Divider set
96 0190 53,25 48,99 42,44 51,64 50,95
(for 1 drawer 27×36 E)
Contents: 12 troughs 8 troughs 24 containers 24 containers 12 containers
96 0620 size 4 96 0620 size 4 96 0650 size 26/1 96 0650 size 46/1 96 0650 size 71/2
72 dividers 4 ditto size 3 6 ditto size 26/2 6 ditto size 46/2 6 dito size 71/3
96 0630 size 4 40 dividers 3 ditto size 26/3 3 ditto size 46/3
96 0630 size 4
15 ditto size 3
Suitable for drawer front height mm 50 and higher 50 and higher 50 and higher 75 and higher 100 and higher
Container or trough height mm 26 26 26 46 71
Sets of slotted dividers / plain dividers 27×36 E
_5 +11 _4 +7 _3 + 6 _2 + 4 _1+1
Size = Number of pieces 5+11 4+7 3+6 2+4 1+1
Set of slotted dividers
96 0200 75 mm 30,59 23,58 19,38 14,20 —
for drawer front height
Set of slotted dividers 100 /
96 0210 39,33 30,13 24,38 17,14 8,11
for drawer front height 125 mm
96 0220 — — 31,51 22,77 10,47
96 96 0230 Set of slotted dividers

200 mm — — — 28,18 13,28
96 0240 250 mm — — — 34,62 16,50
Contents: Slotted dividers No. 96 0500 pieces 5 4 3 2 1
Contents: Plain dividers No. 96 0550 − 96 0590. pieces×size 7×size 64 5×size 81 2×size 98 4×size 149 1×size 251
4×size 81 2×size 98 4×size 115
Drawer assembly
Fitting drawers with plastic troughs (No. 96 0620) and small parts bins (No. 96 0650).
Determine the drawer size in units (17 mm = 1 unit); and determine the dimensions of the
plastic troughs and small parts bins in units (17 mm = 1 unit).
The total of the units (E) for the plastic troughs and small parts bins must not exceed the
total of the drawer units.
4.5 E 4.5 E 9E
9E 9E 9E
Plastic troughs No. 96 0620 4.5 E Small part bins No. 96 0650
9E
9E
9E 9E 9E 9E
9E
36 E 36 E
27 E
27 E 36 E 54 E 54 E 78 E

Set of troughs 36×36 E 17 mm = 1 divider unit (E)

▶
▶
Suitable for: Drawers No. 94 3011 / 94 3021 front height of 50 mm and above.
One set completely fills a drawer.
Version: Troughs made of hard plastic (ABS), inner sides slotted to take dividers.
Application: For storing drills, taps, reamers etc.
_4 _4 + 3 _4 + 3 + 2 _3 _3 + 2 _2
Size = Type 4 4+3 4+3+2 3 3+2 2

Set of troughs
96 0250 70,84 63,48 63,25 56,58 55,89 57,27
(for drawers 36×36 E)
Contents: Troughs No. 96 4400 unit width 34 mm pieces 16 8 8 − − −
Contents: Troughs No. 96 4400 unit width 46 mm pieces − 8 4 16 8 −
Contents: Troughs No. 96 4400 unit width 71 mm pieces − − 4 − 8 16
Dividers No. 96 0630 pieces 96 72 68 48 40 32
Sets of small storage bins 36×36 E

One set completely fills a drawer.
Version: Bins of polystyrene;
for labelling, label holders (No. 96 0665) can be fitted.
Application: For storing nuts, bolts, washers etc.
_1/ 64 _1+ 2 / 48 _1− 3 / 44 _2 / 32 _2 + 3 / 24
Container height
Size = Container size / number 1/64 1+2/48 1–3/44 2/32 2+3/24
(mm)
Set of small part bins
96 0260 for drawer front height 50 mm 69,– 58,65 56,35 48,19 43,93 26
96 0270 for drawer front height 75 mm 83,26 73,14 69,– 62,79 54,86 46
96 0280
for drawer front height 100 mm — — — 82,34 68,31 71
96
Contents: Small part bins No. 96 0650; 75× 75 mm pieces 64 32 32 − −
Contents: Small part bins No. 96 0650; 75×150 mm pieces − 16 8 32 16
Contents: Small part bins No. 96 0650; 150×150 mm pieces − − 4 − 8
Drawer assembly
Example of plain and slotted drawer divider arrangements:
Determine the drawer size in units (17 mm = 1 divider unit) and determine the sizes of the slotted dividers (No. 96 0490 − 0520) and of the
desired plain dividers (No. 96 0540 − 0600) in units. The total of the units for the dividers must not exceed the value of units for the drawer.
D = 612 mm = 36 E @ 17 mm
D = 612 mm = 36 E @ 17 mm
D = 612 mm = 36 E @ 17 mm
▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶ ▶
18 E ▶ 18 E ▶ 12 E ▶ 12 E ▶ 12 E ▶ 10 E ▶ 8 E▶ 15 E ▶ 3E
▶ ▶ ▶
36 E ▶ 36 E ▶ 36 E ▶
W = 612 mm = 36 E @ 17 mm W = 612 mm = 36 E @ 17 mm W = 612 mm = 36 E @ 17 mm

Face mill holder set

Suitable for: Drawers No. 94 2926 / 2931; 94 2973 / 2978; 94 3011 / 3021; 94 3251 / 3256;
94 3611 / 3621; 94 4011; 94 6011 − 6083.
Size = Number of holders 28 13
96 0290 Face mill holder set 36,69 17,54
Contents: Face mill holder No. 96 0670,
13 mm ⌀, 26 mm high pieces 3 1

One set is sufficient to fill a drawer.
Version: The height of slotted dividers matches the outer shell height of the drawers.
Lateral slots at intervals of 17 : 17 mm allow dividers to be fitted.
_5 + 22 _4 +18 _3 +14 _3 +12 _2 + 4 _1 + 1
Size = Number of pieces 5+22 4+18 3+14 3+12 2+4 1+1

96 0300 for drawer front height 31,40 26,11 — — — —
50 mm (for 1 drawer)
96 0310 for drawer front height 38,18 33,81 30,71 — — —
96 0320 for drawer front height 50,14 42,78 36,– 34,85 18,52 —
100 / 125 mm (for 1 drawer)
96 0330 for drawer front height — 58,88 50,03 46,92 24,50 —
96 0340 for drawer front height — — 63,48 56,01 33,01 13,86
96 96 0350
for drawer front height — — 77,74 67,85 41,06 17,25
96 0360 for drawer front height — — — — 47,61 19,67
Contents: Slotted dividers No. 96 0500 pieces 5 4 3 3 2 1
Contents: Plain dividers No. 96 0540−96 0600 pieces×size 22×size 98 12×size 98 14×size 149 8×size 132 4×size 200 1×size 302
6×size 149 4×size 166
Storage system
Modular storage system see No. 96 0900 − 96 1170 (single pieces)
or No. 96 1180 − 96 1290 (sets).

Dividers for a complete tool cabinet 36×36 E
Application: For the equipment of the complete tool cabinets No. 94 3201.
Size = Suitable for cabinet No. 94 3201 Size 900/7 900/8 900/9 900/10
Set of dividers
96 0370 347,30 416,30 476,10 466,90
for 1 complete cabinet
_900/10 Contents: (for each drawer)
Set of moulded inserts No. 96 0250 size 4+3+2 4 4 4+3
4+3+2 4+3+2 4+3+2
Contents: Set of small parts bins
No. 96 0260 / 96 0270 size 1 − 3 / 44 (50 mm) 1 − 3 / 44 (75 mm) 1 + 2 / 48 (75 mm) 1 + 2 / 48 (75 mm)
1 − 3 / 44 (75 mm) 1 − 3 / 44 (75 mm)
Contents: Set of slotted / plain dividers
No. 96 0310 − 96 0360 size 5 + 22 ( 75 mm) 5 + 22 (100 mm) 5 + 22 (100 mm) 5 + 22 (100 mm)
4 + 18 (125 mm) 4 + 18 (100 mm) 4 + 18 (100 mm) 4 + 18 (100 mm)
4 + 18 (150 mm) 4 + 18 (125 mm) 4 + 18 (125 mm) 3 + 14 (100 mm)
3 + 14 (200 mm) 4 + 18 (150 mm) 3 + 14 (125 mm) 3 + 14 (100 mm)
2 + 4 (250 mm) 2 + 4 (250 mm) 3 + 12 (200 mm) 3 + 12 (100 mm)
2 + 4 (100 mm)
96 0370_900/7 96 0370_900/8 96 0370_900/9 96 0370_900/10

Divider set Divider set Divider set Divider set
includes: includes: includes: includes:
96 0250_4+3+2; 1. Drawer 50 mm 96 0250_4; 1. Drawer 50 mm 96 0250_4; 1. Drawer 50 mm 96 0250_4+3; 1. Drawer 75 mm
96 0260_1-3/44; 2. Drawer 50 mm 96 0250_4+3+2; 2. Drawer 50 mm 96 0250_4+3+2; 2. Drawer 50 mm 96 0250_4+3+2; 2. Drawer 75 mm
96 0310_5+22; 3. Drawer 75 mm 96 0270_1-3/44; 3. Drawer 75 mm 96 0270_1+2/48; 3. Drawer 75 mm 96 0270_1+2/48; 3. Drawer 75 mm
96 0320_4+18; 4. Drawer 125 mm 96 0320_5+22; 4. Drawer 100 mm 96 0270_1-3/44; 4. Drawer 75 mm 96 0270_1-3/44; 4. Drawer 75 mm
96 0330_4+18; 5. Drawer 150 mm
96 0340_3+14; 6. Drawer 200 mm

96 0320_4+18; 5. Drawer 100 mm,
6. Drawer 125 mm,
96 0330_4+18; 7. Drawer 150 mm
96 0320_5+22; 5. Drawer 100 mm 96 0320_5+22; 5. Drawer 100 mm
96
96 0320_4+18; 6. Drawer 100 mm, 96 0320_4+18; 6. Drawer 100 mm

96 0350_2+4; 7. Drawer 250 mm 96 0350_2+4; 8. Drawer 250 mm 7. Drawer 125 mm
96 0320_3+14; 8. Drawer 125 mm 96 0320_3+14; 7. Drawer 100 mm,

8. Drawer 100 mm
96 0340_3+12; 9. Drawer 200 mm 96 0320_3+12; 9. Drawer 100 mm
96 0320_2+4; 10. Drawer 100 mm

Suitable for: Drawers No. 94 3251 / 94 3256 or drawers of cabinets No. 94 3231 − 94 3261 17 mm = 1 divider unit (E)
and No. 94 3501. One set fills a drawer. ▶
▶
Version: For labelling, either label holders (No. 96 0665) or barcode carriers (No. 96 0660)
can be fitted.
96 0371 – Troughs made of high-impact plastic (ABS). Slotted on the inside for division
using dividing plates. Small parts bins of polystyrene.
96 0372–0378 – The heights of the slotted dividers match the outer shell height of the drawers.
Side slots at intervals of 17 : 17 mm hold the plain dividers.
Application:
96 0371 – Set of troughs for storing taps, reamers, twist drills etc.
Set of bins for storing screws, nuts, washers etc.
_M4 + 3 _M4 + 3 + 2 _B26/1− 3 _B46/1− 3 _B71/2 + 3
Size = Type M4+3 M4+3+2 B26/1–3 B46/1–3 B71/2+3

Set of dividers
(for 1 drawer
96 0371 69,– 64,17 59,34 71,30 71,53
54×27 E)
Contents: No. 96 0620 No. 96 0620 No. 96 0650 No. 96 0650 No. 96 0650
12 troughs size 4, 6 troughs size 4, 24 bins size 26/1, 20 bins size 46/1, 12 bins size 71/2,
6 ditto size 3, 6 ditto size 3, 12 ditto size 26/2, 14 ditto size 46/2, 12 ditto size 71/3
6 ditto size 2 6 ditto size 26/3 6 ditto size 46/3
No. 96 0630 No. 96 0630

50 dividers size 4, 20 dividers size 4,
18 ditto size 3 12 ditto size 3,
12 ditto size 2
Suitable for drawer front heights mm 50 and higher 50 and higher 50 and higher 75 and higher 100 and higher
Container or through height mm 26 26 26 46 71
96
_8+ 22 _5+12 _3+6

96 0372 50 mm 39,68 25,53 —
96 0373 75 mm 47,38 34,73 —
96 0374 61,64 41,17 —
96 0375 — 56,12 34,96
96 0376 200 mm — 71,76 48,19
96 0377 250 mm — — 59,34
96 0378 300 mm — — 66,01
Contents: Plain dividers No. 96 0540 − 96 0600 pieces×size 22×size 98 31×size 149 4×size 200
2×size 251

eForm
Protection and individuality . . .

eForm can be found in the Hoffmann Group eCenter, product group "Workstations and Storage".
Select from over 9,000 The rigid foam insert is Convincing overview,
pre-installed tool shapes. ergonomically milled to your organisation and cleanliness
individual requirements. with eForm.
It's so easy to configure it yourself:
1. Open product group 9 "Workstations 4. Select and arrange the tools. 5. Request a quotation online −
and Storage" in the Hoffmann Group See your requirements clearly planned with or without the selected tools.
eCenter and call up the "eForm".
2. Create a project
in realistic photomontage. Add, change
and save as your project. 96
3. Enter the basic data
Rigid foam inserts in use:

eForm − wherever safety, quality and clarity are decisive.

Suitable for: Drawers No. 94 3611 / 3621 or drawers of cabinets No. 94 3701. 17 mm = 1 divider unit (E)
▶
▶
One set fills one drawer completely.
Version: For labelling, either label holders (No. 96 0665) or barcode carriers
(No. 96 0660) can be fitted.
Troughs made of high-impact plastic (ABS). Slotted on the inside
for division using divider plates. Small parts bins of polystyrene.
Application: Set of troughs for storing taps, reamers, jobber drills etc.
Set of containers for storing screws, nuts, washers etc.
_M4 + 3 _M4 + 3 + 2 _B26/1-3 _B46/1-3 _B71/2 + 3
Size = Type M4+3 M4+3+2 B26/1–3 B46/1–3 B71/2+3

Divider set
96 0379 87,40 79,58 74,29 89,01 91,77
Contents: 16 troughs 96 0620_4 8 troughs 96 0620_4 24 bins 96 0650_26/1 20 bins 96 0650_46/1 12 bins 96 0650_71/2
8 troughs 96 0620_3 8 troughs 96 0620_3 12 bins 96 0650_26/2 14 bins 96 0650_46/2 18 bins 96 0650_71/3
8 troughs 96 0620_2 12 bins 96 0650_26/3 12 bins 96 0650_46/3
50 dividers 20 dividers
96 0630_4 96 0630_4
20 dividers 20 dividers
96 0630_3 96 0630_3
20 dividers
96 0630_2
Suitable for drawer front height mm 50 and higher 50 and higher 50 and higher 75 and higher 100 and higher
Container or moulding height mm 26 26 26 46 71
Slotted / plain divider sets 54×36 E

Suitable for: Drawers No. 94 3611 / 3621 or drawers of cabinets No. 94 3701.
One set fills one drawer completely.
Version: The height of the slotted dividers matches the outer shell height of the drawers.
Lateral slots at intervals of 17:17 mm allow dividers to be fitted.
Application: For storing tools, appliances, small parts etc.
_8 + 31 _5 +12 _4 +10 _3 + 6
Size = Number of pieces 8+31 5+12 4+10 3+6

Slotted divider set
96 0380 48,30 28,52 — —
96 96 0390 Slotted divider set

Slotted divider set
75 mm
58,19 37,84 — —
96 0400 76,36 45,31 40,25 —

for drawer front height 100/125 mm
Slotted divider set
96 0410 — 60,95 52,21 —
Slotted divider set
96 0420 — 75,90 69,– 50,49
Slotted divider set
96 0430 — — — 63,02
Slotted divider set
96 0440 — — — 73,37
Contents: Slotted dividers No. 96 0500 pieces 8 5 4 3
Contents: Plain dividers No. 96 0540 − 96 0600 pieces×size 31×size 98 31×size 149 7×size 166 4×size 200
3×size 200 2×size 251
"Find, don't search" −

Practical examples:
Optimise your tool storage,
create clarity with our
versatile dividers.

Suitable for: Drawers No. 94 4011 or drawers of cabinets No. 94 4101.
17 mm = 1 divider unit (E)
One set fills a drawer. ▶
▶
Version: For labelling, either label holders (No. 96 0665) or barcode carriers (No. 96 0660)
can be fitted. A slotted divider prevents the bins sliding around.
96 0445 – Troughs made of high-impact plastic (ABS). Can be sub-divided using dividers.
Small parts bins of polystyrene.
96 0450–0480 – The height of the slotted dividers matches the outer shell height of the drawers.
Lateral slots at intervals of 17:17 mm allow divider plates to be fitted.
Application:
96 0445 – For storage of tools such as taps see the troughs sets,
for storage of screws see the bins sets.
_M4+3+2 _B26/1−3 _B46/1−3 _B71/2+3

Size = Type M4+3+2 B26/1–3 B46/1–3 B71/2+3
Divider set
96 0445 (for 1 drawer 78×36 E) 110,63 99,59 114,54 124,78
Contents: Troughs No. 96 0620: Bins No. 96 0650: Bins No. 96 0650: Bins No. 96 0650:
8 × size 4 20 × size 26/1 10 × size 46/1 12 × size 71/2
8 × size 3 22 × size 26/2 19 × size 46/2 26 × size 71/3
16 × size 2 16 × size 26/3 20 × size 46/3 including slotted divider
including slotted divider including slotted divider
Divider plates No. 96 0630:
20 × size 4
10 × size 3
20 × size 2
including slotted divider
Suitable for drawer front height mm 75 75 75 100
Container or troughs height mm 26 26 46 71
Slotted / plain divider sets 78×36 E
_7+ 20 _6 +15 _4 +7
Slotted divider set
96 0450 57,04 46,81 —
Slotted divider set
96 0460 68,54 58,19 37,38
Slotted divider set
96 0470 — 77,74 50,26
96 0480 Slotted divider set

— — 66,01 96
Contents: Plain dividers No. 96 0540 − 96 0600 pieces×size 18×size 149 3×size 98 4×size 200
2×size 200 12×size 200 3×size 302
Accessories for tool cabinets

Slotted dividers of sheet steel for dividing drawers
Version: The dividers match the heights of the drawers.
Lateral slots at intervals of 17 : 17 mm allow plain dividers to be fitted.
Dividers are screwed to the bottom of the drawer.
For screws see No. 96 0530.
96 0510/0520 – Paint finish RAL 7035 light grey.
Application:
96 0500 – See description under the item number.
For drawer division of width or depth see No. 94 3011 / 3021,
and for further dividing drawers see No. 94 3611 / 3621 and 94 4011.
Size = for drawer front height mm 50 75 100/125 150/175 200 250 300 300/400
Slotted divider, galvanised, for drawer
96 0490 4,03 4,39 5,46 6,84 8,51 10,18 10,58 —
No. 9494 2973 / 2978, 94 3251 / 3256, 459 mm long (27 E)
Slotted divider, galvanised, for drawer
96 0500 4,68 5,12 6,44 7,99 9,55 11,67 — 13,46
No. 94 3011 / 3021, 612 mm long (36 E)
Slotted divider for drawer
96 0510 — 15,18 18,75 22,31 25,19 27,72 — —
No. 94 3611 / 3621, 918 mm long (54 E)
Slotted divider for drawer
96 0520 — 21,97 25,19 31,05 33,70 — — —
No. 94 4011, 1326 mm long (78 E)
Height of slotted dividers mm 27 50 75 125 175 225 275 275

Fastening screws for dividers
Version: Rounded head screws (DIN 7985) self-tapping,
M5×6 with TORX TX 25.
Application: For the fastening of slotted dividers and
plain dividers to the bottom of the drawer.
Fastening screws set, 100 pieces
96 0530 9,66
M5×6 / TX25
Dividers of aluminium
Application: For further division in connection with
slotted dividers No. 96 0490 to 96 0520.
Note: For slotted divider / plain divider sets, see No. 96 0200 / 0240; 96 0300 / 0360;
96 0372 / 0378; 96 0380 / 0440; 96 0450 / 0480.
Size = Width mm 47 64 81 98 115 132 149 166 200 251 302

Plain divider 27 mm high
96 0540 0,39 0,39 0,43 0,45 0,59 0,59 0,59 0,95 0,95 — —
for drawers with front height 50 mm
96 0550 0,59 0,63 0,69 0,69 0,99 1,06 1,24 1,46 1,46 2,13 2,16
96 0560 — 0,92 0,95 0,99 1,24 1,37 1,37 1,77 1,77 2,28 2,45
for drawers with front height 100 and 125 mm
96 0570 — — — 1,55 1,68 2,13 2,13 2,37 2,56 3,21 3,94
for drawers with front height 150 and 175 mm
96 0580 — — — — — 2,27 2,83 3,38 4,08 4,74 5,46
96 0590 — — — — — 2,59 3,46 4,16 5,19 5,98 7,02
Plain divider 275 mm high for drawers
96 0600 — — — — — — 4,39 4,86 6,10 7,07 7,76
with front height 300 and 400 mm
Divider units E 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 18
Ribbed rubber inlay

Application: For protective, slip-proof and quiet storage of tools.
Size = Divider units E 27×36 36×36 54×27 54×36 78×36

96 0610 Ribbed rubber inlay, 3 mm thick 14,03 16,50 20,30 24,96 36,11
W×D mm 459×612 612×612 918×459 918×612 1326×612
Suitable for drawers No. 94 2926 / 2931 94 3011 / 3021 94 3251 / 3256 94 3611 / 3621 94 4011
Plastic troughs
96 Version: Made of high-impact plastic (ABS), inner faces slotted

for division using dividers (interval 15 mm).
Application: 16 individual troughs fill one drawer No. 94 3011 / 3021 (36×36 E).
For storing delicate tools.
Note: For trough sets see No. 96 0190, 96 0250, 96 0371, 96 0379, 96 0445.
Size = Number of divisions 4 3 2 96 0620

96 0620 Plastic trough, red 3,06 2,90 2,97
96 0630 Divider, red 0,29 0,33 0,43

Internal width of troughs (96 0620) mm 34 46 71
Dimensions W×D×H (96 0620) mm 150×150×26 96 0630
Divider units (96 0620) 9×9E
Insert for hexagon allen keys

Application: For storing 9 hexagon key L-wrenches.
(1.5 − 10 mm) to DIN 911 / DIN ISO 2936.
Insert made of high-impact plastic (ABS).
Insert for
96 0640 8,57
hexagon allen keys
Dimensions W×D×H mm 150×150×26
Divider unit E 9×9E 96 0640

Small parts storage bins

Version: Containers made of high-impact plastic (ABS).
Size 26/0 – with 1 fixed centre partition.
Application: For storing small parts.
Note: For bin sets see No. 96 0190 and 96 0260 − 96 0280,
and No. 96 0371, 96 0379, 96 0445.
96 0650_26/0 96 0650_26/1 96 0650_46/2 96 0650_71/3
Size = Height / type 26/0 26/1 26/2 26/3 46/1 46/2 46/3 71/2 71/3
96 0650 Small parts bin, red 1,18 1,16 1,61 2,66 1,37 2,10 3,15 2,76 3,60
Height mm 26 26 26 26 46 46 46 71 71
Suitable for drawer front height mm ≥ 50 ≥ 50 ≥ 50 ≥ 50 ≥ 75 ≥ 75 ≥ 75 ≥ 100 ≥ 100
Footprint (W×D) mm 75×75 75×75 75×150 150×150 75×75 75×150 150×150 75×150 150×150
Divider units E (W×D) 4.5×4.5E 4.5×4.5E 4.5×9E 9×9E 4.5×4.5E 4.5×9E 9×9E 4.5×9E 9×9E
Number of bins required to fill
a drawer No. 94 3011/94 3021 − 36×36 E 64 64 32 16 64 32 16 32 16
Barcode carriers and label containers

Version:
96 0660 – Made of sheet metal, bright galvanised, with clear cover.
96 0665 – Made of plastic including labelling strips and clear covers.
Application: For fitting to plain dividers No. 96 0540−96 0600,
dividers No. 96 0630 and small parts bins No. 96 0650.
96 0660
Size = Width×height mm 50×15 65×25
Barcode carrier set
96 0660 8,97 9,72
5 pieces
Size = Width×height mm 30×14 50×14

Label holder set
96 0665 5,58 5,81
10 pieces 96 0665
Face mill holders with plastic coating

Version: All holders are 26 mm high; greater heights obtainable by
screwing holders together. M4 internal thread.
Application: The face mill cutter holders are bolted to the perforated drawer base.
They are used as a holder for tools with a bore.
Note: For milling cutter holder sets see No. 96 0290. 96 0670
Size = for tools with bore ⌀ mm 13 16 22 27 32 40 50

Face mill cutter holder set
96 0670 6,44 6,44 6,44 7,19 7,19 7,19 7,36
5 pieces
Marker peg
Application: For recording / traceability of item taken.
Can be screwed to the perforated drawer base.
96 0680 Marker peg 0,45 3 mm ⌀, 26 mm long 96

96 0680
Spanner holders
Version: Made of 1.5 mm aluminium sheet, including fasteners
for bolting to the base of the drawer.
The holders can be cut to length as required.
96 0690
Application: To store spanners.
Size = Number of slots per set 30 18

Spanner holder set
96 0690 16,50 15,64
2 pieces
Length×height mm 610×27 610 x 27
Channel inlays of plastic (ABS)

Application: Suitable for the safe storage of cutting tools (reamers, thread mills, taps etc).
The channel inserts are fitted into drawer compartments formed by slotted
dividers / plain dividers.
Supplied with: 1 piece wide = 64 mm , 1 piece narrow = 32 mm.
Size = Number of channels per set 11 8 6

Channel insert set
96 0700 2,16 2,04 2,04
2 pieces
Suitable for tools up to ⌀ mm 8 14 20
Width mm / E 149 / 9 E 149 / 9 E 149 / 9 E 96 0700

Dividers and accessories for system cabinet drawers
Slotted dividers of sheet metal for drawer division

•• 1 No. 98 0800 slotted divider
•
2 No. 96 0550 − 96 0600 plain divider
Suitable for: Drawers No. 957022, 957024, 957026.
17 mm = 1 divider unit (E) 3 Divider units
Version: Lateral slots at intervals of 17 : 17 mm ▶
▶
•
allow plain dividers to be fitted.
•
For longitudinal division of the drawer.
1 2
Size = for drawer front height mm 80 120 140 160 200 300
Slotted divider
96 0800 7,59 8,68 9,83 10,70 13,23 17,08
442 mm long (26 E)
•
▶
22 / 3
Height of the slotted divider mm 55 95 115 135 179 279 6 / 50
E
▶
suitable plain dividers No. 96 0550 96 0560 96 0560 96 0570 96 0580 96 0600 3
Slotted dividers / dividers sets for individual drawers

Suitable for: Drawers No. 957024 / 957026 or drawers of cabinets No. 95 6860.
One set is sufficient to fill one drawer.
Note: Assortment for 500 mm = 22 E wide system cabinets can be assembled individually
using slotted divider No. 96 0800 and plain dividers No. 96 0550 to 96 0600.
_3 + 8 _4 +16 _4 +10 _6 + 24
Size = Number of pieces 3+8 4+16 4+10 6+24

96 0810 80 mm 31,17 41,52 42,67 62,10
96 0820 Plain dividers set 120 mm 35,08 49,57 49,68 75,21

for drawer front height 38,53 53,94 54,05 81,88
96 0825 140 mm
96 0830 160 mm 46,69 66,70 63,25 99,59

suitable for cabinet width mm 750 1000
suitable for drawers with usable area mm / E 612×445 / (36×26 units) 850×445 / (50×26 units)
Contents: Slotted dividers No. 96 0800 pieces 3 4 4 6
Contents: Plain dividers No. 96 0550 − 96 0570 pieces×size 8×size 149 12×size 98 10×size 166 20×size 98
4×size 149 4×size 166
Ribbed rubber inlay
96 Application: For protective, slip-proof and quiet tool storage.
Size = for cabinet width mm 500 750 1000

Ribbed rubber inlay
96 0840 (18,80) (22,48) (24,61)
3 mm thick
W×D mm 374×445 612×445 850×445
suitable for drawer No. 95 7022 95 7024 95 7026
Drawer fitted with:
Dividers of aluminium for Front height mm: 80 120 140 160 200 300
further division with Product code: 96 0550 96 0560 96 0560 96 0570 96 0580 96 0600
slotted dividers No. 96 0800.
Storage system see No. 96 0900−96 1290.

Modular storage system
The flexibility of the system offers clear arrangement of cases, roller cabinets,
workbenches, tool cabinets and shelves.
Areas to be equipped can be used efficiently by combining the various boxes
(which fit exactly onto the baseplate beside, behind and on top of each other).
The modules are made of high quality black ABS plastic and available
in heights 24 mm and 48 mm.
Individual and simple to set up:
Measure . . . Scribe the worktop . . . Break the plate . . . Glue the plate in . . .
Versatile and flexible applications:
. . . Insert boxes. Done! Stackable Slip-proof Flexible
Accessories for workbenches and tool cabinets
Note: For baseplates to take the boxes, see No. 961140.
Size = Width×length mm 48×96 72×192 96×96 96×144 96×192 96×288 _48 × 96
UNI-BOX
96 0900 1,55 2,51 1,90 2,56 3,43 4,37
24 mm high
Internal dimensions W×L×H mm 37×85×18 61×181×18 85×85×18 85×133×18 85×181×18 85×277×18
96 0900_96 × 288
Size = Width×length mm 72×192 96×96 96×144 96×192 96×240 96×288

96
UNI-BOX
96 0910 3,22 2,76 3,28 4,03 4,60 5,18
48 mm high
Internal dimensions W×L×H mm 61×181×42 85×85×42 85×133×42 85×181×42 85×229×42 85×277×42
96 0910_96 × 336
Size = Width×length mm 96×336 144×144 144×192 144×384 240×336
_96 × 96
UNI-BOX
96 0910 5,75 4,89 5,52 7,53 8,34
48 mm high
Internal dimensions W×L×H mm 85×325×42 133×133×42 133×181×42 133×373×42 229×325×42
96 0910_240 × 336
Size = Width×length mm 48×96 96×96 96×144 96×192

Transparent
96 0920 0,81 0,92 0,98 1,21
cover
Dimensions W×L×H mm 48×96×15 96×96×15 96×144×15 96×192×15
suitable for UNI-BOX No. 96 0900 Size 48×96 96×96 96×144 96×192
suitable for UNI-BOX No. 96 0910 Size − 96×96 96×144 96×192
suitable for MULTI-BOX No. − − − 96 0930 96 0920
Continued ▶

▶ Continued

MULTI-BOX
96 0930 3,68
3 troughs
External dimensions W×L×H mm 96×192×24
Internal dimensions per trough W×L×H mm 24×181×18
MULTI-BOX 96 0940 96 0930

96 0940 4,54
2 troughs
MULTI-BOX
96 0950 5,18
8 troughs
96 0950
VARIO-BOX
96 0960 2,30
end piece, 1 trough
Trough width mm 37
VARIO-BOX
96 0970 2,47 96 0960 96 0970
end piece, 1 trough
Trough width mm 61
VARIO-BOX
96 0980 3,22
end piece, 1 trough
Trough width mm 61
96 0980 96 0990
VARIO-BOX
96 0990 2,82
end piece, 1 trough
Trough width mm 85
VARIO-BOX
96 1000 2,93
end piece, 2 troughs
96 1000 96 1010
Trough width, each mm 40
VARIO-BOX
96 1010 3,16
96 External dimensions W×L×H

Trough width, each
mm
mm
96×96×24
24
96 1020 96 1030
VARIO-BOX
96 1020 3,22
VARIO-BOX
96 1030 3,57
96 1040 Hexagon L-wrench box 8,22

Wrench sizes mm 1.5 / 2 / 2.5 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 8 / 10
96 1040 96 1050
96 1050 Vernier caliper box 8,22

for calipers up to measuring range mm 150
96 1060 Jobber drill box 1.0 - 6.0 mm 11,90

Drill size increment mm 0.1 96 1060
Continued ▶

▶ Continued
Jobber drill box

96 1070 14,72
6.1 - 10.0 mm
Drill size increment mm 0.1 96 1070
Application: For 12 straight open-ended spanners, double-ended ring spanners

or combination spanners 4 to 24 AF.
Combination spanner
96 1080 19,32
box
Application: For 8 cranked double-ended ring spanners or 96 1080

combination spanners 6 to 24 AF
(deep cranked to 22 AF).
96 1090 Double-ended ring spanner box 19,32 96 1090

Application: To take 6 screwdrivers.
96 1100 Screwdriver box 17,71

96 1100
Application: To take 22-piece socket sets
with sockets 10 − 32 mm AF. 96 1110
96 1110 Socket box 1 / 2 ″ 19,55

Application: To take 11 CD cases or 44 floppy discs.
96 1120
96 1120 Multimedia box 10,75
96 1130
Application: For securing tools of a wide variety of
different shapes to the baseplate.
Supplied with: 20 securing screws
Eccentric pin retaining

96 1130 6,56
set, 10 pieces
⌀×height mm 24×24
Application: Size 1056×624 for cutting to individual requirements.

96 1140
96
Size = Length×width mm 312×504 360×432 384×432 384×480 384×528 432×600
96 1140 Baseplate 9,37 8,91 8,91 9,26 9,37 10,58
suitable for drawers with usable area mm 320×520 374×445 391×442 410×500 390×530 459×612
Size = Length×width mm 480×504 576×432 600×600 840×432 888×600 1056×624

96 1140 Baseplate 9,72 9,60 12,59 12,48 15,30 15,30
suitable for drawers with usable area mm 490×520 612×445 612×612 850×445 918×612 −
Supplied with: 34 double-sided adhesive pads,

2 cutting and sticking guides,
1 general-purpose knife.
96 1150 Self-assembly kit 8,97

96 1150
Label
96 1160 0,46
vertical
Label 96 1160
96 1170 0,46
horizontal
External dimensions W×H mm 48×15
96 1170
Continued ▶

▶ Continued
Suitable for: Drawers of the KOMBI workbench range (unit width 430 mm)
and system workplaces.
Usable drawer area 320×520 mm.
Supplied with:
1×96 0900_48×96 UNI-Box
1×96 0900_96×96 UNI-Box
1×96 0900_96×144 UNI-Box
1×96 0900_96×192 UNI-Box
1×96 0930 MULTI-Box 3 troughs
2×96 1010 VARIO-Box 3 troughs, end piece
1×96 1050 Vernier calipers box
1×96 1140_312×504 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1180 (40,37)
24 mm high
Suitable for: Drawers of the KOMBI workbench range (unit width 430 mm)
and system workplaces.
Supplied with:
3×96 0910_96×96 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_144×144 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_96×144 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_144×384 UNI-Box
1×96 1140_312×504 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1190 (35,08)
48 mm high
Suitable for: Drawers of the KOMPAKT, KOMPAKT-L, KOMBI workbench range

(unit width 600 mm) and HOLEX.
Supplied with:
6×96 0960 VARIO-Box 1 trough, end piece
1×96 1140_480×504 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1200 (50,26)
24 mm high

96 Supplied with:
1×96 0910_96×144 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_96×336 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_144×144 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_144×192 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_144×384 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_240×336 UNI-Box
1×96 1140_480×504 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1210 (46,12)
48 mm high

Supplied with:
5×96 0910_96×96 UNI-Box
5×96 0910_96×144 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_96×192 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_96×240 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_144×384 UNI-Box
1×96 1140_480×504 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1220 (59,80)
48 mm high
Continued ▶

▶ Continued

Suitable for: Drawers of tool cabinets 27×36 units.
Supplied with:
2×96 0910_96×96 UNI-Box
6×96 0910_96×240 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_96×192 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_96×288 UNI-Box
1×961140_432×600 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1228 (60,49)
48 mm high

Supplied with:
4×96 0960 VARIO-Box End piece, 1 trough
4×96 0960 VARIO-Box End piece, 1 trough
4×96 1000 VARIO-Box End piece, 2 troughs
1×96 1140_600×600 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1230 (73,37)
24 mm high

Supplied with:
6×96 0910_96×96 UNI-Box
4×96 0910_96×144 UNI-Box
4×96 0910_96×240 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_144×144
1×96 0910_144×192
1×96 0910_240×336
UNI-Box
UNI-Box
UNI-Box
96
1×96 1140_600×600 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1240 (77,51)
48 mm high

Supplied with:
18×96 0910_96×96 UNI-Box
12×96 0910_96×144 UNI-Box
1×96 1140_600×600 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1250 (98,67)
48 mm high
Continued ▶

▶ Continued

Supplied with:
6×96 0910_96×336 UNI-Box
4×96 0910_144×144 UNI-Box
8×96 0910_144×192 UNI-Box
1×961140_888×600 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1255 (113,85)
48 mm high
Suitable for: Pull-out shelves ofsystem cabinets with

cabinet / compartment width 500 mm.
Supplied with:
2×96 0910_96×96 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_96×144 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_96×192 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_96×240 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_144×192 UNI-Box
1×96 1140_384×432 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1260 (46,69)
48 mm high
Suitable for: Drawers of system cabinets size 500 (22×26 units).

Supplied with:
12×96 0910_96×96 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_72×192 UNI-Box
1×961140_360×432 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1268 (54,51)
48 mm high
Suitable for: Drawers and pull-out shelves of system cabinets size 750 (36×26 units).
Usable area of pull-out shelves 595×442 mm.
Supplied with:
2×96 0910_96×96 UNI-Box
3×96 0910_96×144 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_96×192 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_96×240 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_144×144 UNI-Box
96 1×96 0910_144×192
1×96 0910_240×336
1×96 1140_576×432
UNI-Box
UNI-Box
Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1270 (56,24)
48 mm high
Tips for other applications

Some boxes offer space for entire tool sets, such as combination Oddments of baseplate No. 96 1140 can be put to good use
spanner box No. 96 1080 or screwdriver box No. 96 1100. by fixing them to a tool box, socket set, gauge block box etc.:
These boxes make an easy transport of sets possible, e. g. from the
workbench into a mobile roller cabinet.
Continued ▶

▶ Continued
Supplied with:
10×96 0900_48×96 UNI-Box
2×961030 VARIO-Box end piece, 8 troughs
1×961140_576×432 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1272 (46,23)
24 mm high

Supplied with:
6×96 0910_144×144 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_96×336 UNI-Box
1×96 0910_240×336 UNI-Box
3×96 0910_144×192 UNI-Box
1×961140_840×432 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1275 (74,75)
48 mm high
Suitable for: Roller cabinet No. 916300, 916310 and 916320 as well as roller
cabinet No. 916330 / 916340 and HOLEX mobile workbench
No. 916450. Usable drawer areas 530×390 mm.
Supplied with:
1×96 0910_96×144 UNI-Box
6×96 0960 VARIO-Box end piece, 1 trough
1×96 1040 Hexagon L-wrench box
1×96 1080 Combination spanner box
1×96 1100 Screwdriver box
1×96 1140_384×528 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1280 (68,77)
24 / 48 mm high
Suitable for: Roller cabinet No. 916300, 916310 and 916320 as well as roller cabinet
No. 916330 / 916340 and HOLEX mobile workbench No. 916450.
Usable drawer areas 530×390 mm.
Supplied with:
4×96 0910_72×192 UNI-Box
6×96 0910_96×96 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_96×192 UNI-Box
2×96 0910_144×192 UNI-Box
1×96 1140_384×528 Baseplate
4 adhesive pads
Divider set
96 1290 (56,35)
48 mm high
96
Reduced costs and
increased efficiency −
the Hoffmann Group solves
these challenges with their
storage equipment and the
Aqurado® modular tool
organiser system.

Perforated panels and accessories for perforated panels
Fit your wall-mounted perforated For further perforated

panel with our versatile organiser panels see No. 92 0280 /
system No. 96 1325 − 96 1500. 0285, 93 3944 / 3946 and
93 3950 / 3955.
Assembly example
Perforated panels and accessories for perforated panels □ 9×9 mm on a 37 mm grid
Perforated panels of sheet steel for wall mounting

Version: Stiffened on the back with welded-on channels for fixing to the wall.
Application: After fixing to the wall the fastening screws are not visible.
For large wall coverage, perforated panels can be screwed
together for a flush vertical / horizontal fit.
Supplied with: Screws and plugs for wall mounting.
Size = Length mm 920 1420 1920 Wall mounting

Perforated panel 481 mm high
96 1300 (58,88) (78,66) (98,21)
for wall mounting
Overall length mm 920 1420 1920
Hooks and brackets

Suitable for: All GARANT and HOLEX items and perforations with size
□ 9×9 mm on a 37 mm grid.
Version: Made of steel, bright galvanised. For hanging on perforated
panels, secured by means of a fixing screw.
Application: For tidy and clear tool storage in visible areas of the workplace Hang up hooks
− for easy access. and secure them
with a screw
.
Content: 3 single hooks No. 96 1330 size 24×5
2 single hooks No. 96 1330 size 47×4
3 double hooks No. 96 1340 size 38×11
96 2 double hooks
1 double hook
No. 96 1340 size 55×25
No. 96 1340 size 100×25
4 tool hooks No. 96 1350 size 50×6
4 tool clips No. 96 1360 size 12
4 pliers brackets No. 96 1370 size 20×43
Set of brackets
96 1325 61,64
30 pieces
Content: 4 single hooks No. 96 1330 size 24×5

6 tool hooks No. 96 1350 size 50×6
Set of brackets
96 1326 78,66
36 pieces
Continued ▶

Accessories for perforated panels □ 9×9 mm on a 37 mm grid
▶ Continued
Content: 2 tool clips No. 96 1360 size 6

Set of tool clips

96 1327 42,32
18 pieces
Version: Made of steel, bright galvanised.

For hanging into perforated panels, secured by means of a fixing screw.
Size = Length x ⌀ mm 22×3 24×5 38×5

Single hook,
96 1330 1,64 1,64 1,67 5 pcs.
angled end
Size = Length x ⌀ mm 47×4 100×6 150×5

Single hook,
96 1330 1,67 1,97 1,97 5 pcs.
angled end 96 1330_47×4
Version: Single hook with 30° angle.

Made of steel, bright galvanised.
Size = Length x ⌀ mm 50×4 100×6

Tool holder,
96 1332 1,61 2,13 5 pcs.
angled
96 1332_50×4
Size 50×40 with 30° angle. Other sizes are straight.
Size = Length x spacing mm 38×11 50×40 55×25 64×8

Double hook,
96 1340 2,24 2,85 2,24 2,98 5 pcs.
angled end
Clip ⌀ mm 5 5 5 5
96 1340_50×40 96 1340_55×25
Size = Length x spacing mm 64×11 100×25 150×10 150×25

Double hook,
96 1340 2,08 3,23 5,68 5,68 5 pcs.
angled end
Clip ⌀ mm 5 5 5 5
96 1340_100×25 96

96 1350 Tool hook, vertical end 2,08 2,08 5 pcs.
96 1350_10×6 96 1350_50×6


96 1355 Double swivel socket wrench hook 3,62 4,31 5 pcs. 96 1355_33×3
Opening (upper / lower) mm 10 / 9 17 / 9

Size = Clip ⌀ mm 6 12 18 25
2,45 2,45 2,66 2,66 96 1360_18
96 1360 Spring clip 5 pcs.
= Price per piece when ordering box quantity. Only sold in box quantities. Please order in pieces.
Continued ▶

▶ Continued

Size = Length×width mm 20×43 70×25

96 1370 Plier bracket 2,85 3,70 5 pcs. 96 1370_70×25
96 1370_20×43
Version: Overall length 238 mm to take 6 tools

(3×⌀ 12 mm, 3×⌀ 6.5 mm).
96 1380 Screwdriver holder 9,26
96 1380
Version: Overall length 556 mm to take 12 tools

(3× each 12, 18, 26 and 32 mm).
96 1390 Spanner rack 14,15

96 1390
Version: Overall length 238 mm to take 32 drills

(4×⌀ 3 / 4×⌀ 4.5 / 6×⌀ 6.5 / 6×⌀ 8.5 / 6×⌀ 10.5 / 4×⌀ 12 / 2×⌀ 14 mm).
96 1400 Drill stand 11,79 96 1400
Version: Made of steel, bright galvanised. 96 1410_60

Size = Hook ⌀ (inside) mm 60 80

96 1410 Pipe / cable hook 3,53 3,85 5 pcs.

Size = Ring ⌀ (inside) mm 40 60 80

96 1420 Ring bracket 5,39 5,68 5,98 5 pcs. 96 1420_60
Version: Length 115 mm, ⌀ 45 mm.

Accepts tools with ISO 40 shank.
96 1421
96 1421 Ring support ISO 40 6,33 5 pcs.
96
Version: External dimensions W×D×H: 250×180×140 mm.
Usable depth: 163 mm, inner ⌀ maximum 125 mm.
96 1425 Hose support 22,83 96 1425
Suitable for: Open storage bins No. 961510 sizes SB6 and SB5.
Application: Bin support for hanging small open storage bins.
96 1426
96 1426 Bin support 105×45 mm 4,23 5 pcs.
Suitable for: Perforated panels with square holes 9×9 mm on a 37 mm grid.

Version: Height×Width = 40×34 mm.
Application: For storing your own tools.
96 1430
96 1430 Baseplate 1,39 5 pcs.
= Price per piece when ordering box quantity. Only sold in box quantities. Please order in pieces.
Continued ▶

▶ Continued
Display book
Suitable for: For hanging on perforated panels □ 9×9 mm in a 37 mm grid.
Version: For looking up information ready to hand, clean and protected.
Takes 10 pages in A4 format.
Colour: Sheet metal bracket anthracite grey RAL 7016 powder-coated.
96 1440 Display book (62,10)

W×H×D mm 100×320×265
96 1440
Shelf and small parts storage bins
Version: Distributed load maximum 10 kg.
96 1450 Shelf (54,05)

W×D×H mm 440×300×100 96 1450
96 1460_1
Size = Type 1 2
96 1460 Small parts storage bin (33,81) (38,64)
W×D×H mm 200×100×60 200×100×100
96 1460_2
96 1470 Bottle / can holder (26,22)

W×D×H mm 220×115×105
96 1470
Writing surface
96 1480 Writing surface (31,97)

Writing surface (W×D) mm 400×345 96 1480
Drawings pocket DIN A4

Application: For holding drawings, diagrams etc. up to size DIN A4.
96 1490 Drawings pocket DIN A4 (23,23)

Internal dimensions (W×H) mm 212×308
96 1490 96
Tool gripper
Colour: Carrier plate anthracite grey RAL 7016 powder-coated. 96 1495
Application: For individual tool mounting − the clamping effect gives security.
96 1495 Tool gripper (36,34)

For tools up to ⌀ mm 26
L×H mm 430×95
Transparent box carriers

Application: For storing small components − dust-free and clearly identifiable.
96 1500_ST4
Size = Type ST3 ST4 ST5 ST6

96 1500 Transparent box carrier (80,27) (69,92) (58,42) (49,34)
W×D×H mm 601×165×243 601×139×208 601×112×160 601×77×110
Number of transparent boxes pieces 3 4 5 6

Accessories for perforated panels, workbenches and cabinets
Open storage bins of polythene (PE)

Suitable for: Storage bin racks No. 916535, 92 0240 (but not size SB2), for rack panels No. 957060 size S in system
cabinets, for base trays No. 947120 and for shelving cabinets / wall cabinets No. 95 4600 − 95 4670
and No. 95 4701 to 95 4722. In addition, the bin support No. 961426 allows small open storage bins
No. 961510 size SB6 and SB5 to be hung individually on perforated panels.
_SB6 _SB5 _SB4 _SB3Z _SB2
Size = Type SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3Z SB2

96 1510 PE open storage bin 1,44 2,28 5,28 8,63 18,–
L×W×H mm 85/65×100×50 160/140×100×75 230/200×150×130 350/300×210×145 500/445×310×200
Colour yellow red blue grey green
Size = Type SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3Z SB2

96 1511 PE open storage bins 1 pack yellow — (56,93) (131,96) (120,75) (179,98)
96 1512 PE open storage bins 1 pack red (71,88) — (131,96) (120,75) (179,98)
96 1513 PE open storage bins 1 pack blue (71,88) (56,93) — (120,75) (179,98)
96 1514 PE open storage bins 1 pack grey (71,88) (56,93) (131,96) — (179,98)
96 1515 PE open storage bins 1 pack green (71,88) (56,93) (131,96) (120,75) —
Contents per pack pieces 50 25 25 14 10
Suitable for: Open storage bins No. 961510 − 96 1515.

Version:
96 1520 – Labelling strip set comprising 100 pcs. plastic-coated
white labelling strips, suitable for marker pen.
96 1530 – Transparent front plate, swing-up.
96 1540 – Transparent polycarbonate cover.
96 1520 96 1530 96 1540
Size = Suitable for open storage bin Size SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3Z SB2
Labelling strip set
96 1520 10,18 12,08 12,08 15,12 18,06
100 pieces
Transparent front plate,
96 1530 — 1,21 2,– 3,86 6,50
swing-up
96 1540 Transparent cover — 1,23 2,05 6,73 10,41
96
Configuration examples with open storage bins

Accessories for shelves
Storage boxes of polypropylene (PP)

Suitable for: Universal rack No. 96 8000 − 96 8210 sizes 400 and 500 and
storage shelf rack No. 96 9000 − 96 9210 size 400 and 550.
_LB400E _LB400D _LB500E _LB500D
Size = Type LB400E LB400D LB500E LB500D

96 1541 Storage boxes PP 1 pack red (152,95) (111,09) (216,78) (129,95)
96 1542 Storage boxes PP 1 pack blue 152,95 111,09 216,78 129,95
96 1543 Storage boxes PP 1 pack green (152,95) (111,09) (216,78) (129,95)

Dimensions L×W×H mm 400×91×81 400×183×81 500×91×81 500×183×81
Contents per pack pieces 30 15 30 15
Suitable for: Storage boxes No. 961541 − 961543.

Size = For storage box type E D
Divider set
96 1544 10,47 28,87
10 pieces
_E _D
Pull-out stops set

96 1545 11,21
10 pieces
96 1545
Size = For storage box type E D

Label set
96 1546 13,11 20,93
100 pieces _E _D
Storage examples in storage shelf racks

No. 96 9200 size 550 with additional No. 96 8000 height 2000 mm
8 shelves No. 96 9350 size 550.
9 storage boxes No. 96 1541 size LB500E
on each shelf.
with additional 11 shelves
No. 96 8400 size 500.
5 storage boxes No. 96 1542
96
size LB500D on each shelf.
No. 96 9010 size 550

with additional 3 shelves
No. 96 9350 size 550.
Configuration example: Configuration example:

Storage shelf rack with storage boxes No. 96 1541. Universal rack with storage boxes No. 96 1542.

Work mats
Rubber mats / 10 m rolls

Application: For cutting to length as required. For laying into drawers or as a covering
over storage or worksurfaces, to prevent damage when putting down tools.
Note: Rubber mats cut to size for laying on tool cabinets can be found under
No. 94 2920, 94 3070, 94 3245, 94 3670, 94 4070 and for system cabinets under
No. 957090. Rubber mats cut to size for laying into drawers can be found
under No. 96 0150-60, 96 0610 and 96 0840.
96 1550
Ribbed rubber mat 10 m roll
96 1550 (257,60)
1 m wide
Smooth rubber mat 10 m roll
96 1560 (347,30) 96 1560
1.20 m wide
L×W×H (96 1550) mm 10 000×1000×3
L×W×H (96 1560) mm 10 000×1200×3
Plasticised PVC overlays, transparent

Application: To protect workbenches and worksurfaces from dirt and damage.
96 1570 – Cut to size in lengths 1500 mm and 2000 mm.
96 1580 – For cutting to length as required.
Flexible transparent
soft PVC overlay.
Size = Length mm 1500 2000

96 1570
Plasticised PVC overlay,
96 1570 (82,57) (94,53)
transparent
L×D×H mm 1500×700×3 2000×700×3

Plasticised PVC overlay,
96 1580 (1136,20) (1542,15) 93 3575
transparent, 20 m roll
L×W×H mm 20000×1500×3 20000×2000×3
96 Anti-slip mats
Version: Fabric-reinforced work mats with nap weft of special
high-grip plastic, slip-proof and tearproof.
Can be cut to any size, anthracite grey.
Application: Prevents components slipping when being worked on,
provides safe storage of tools, and prevents objects
sliding during transport.
Note: Fabric-reinforced mats cut to size for GARANT roller cabinets

can be found under No. 916490.
96 1805
96 1800
Length Width Thickness

m mm mm
"Anti-slip"
96 1800 14,09 1.22 610 2−3
work mat
As a roll
96 1805 126,50 10 695 2−3 Handling Storage Transport
"Anti-slip"
Price in brackets ( ) = Delivery ex works, incl. packing, excl. carriage.

Industrial work mats and wooden safety slatting
Anti-fatiguing: Protecting:
Increases comfort at work, Minimises damage due to
raises productivity and falling objects and protects
reduces lost time. the floor.
Anti-slip: Insulating:
Reduces dangerous Insulates against cold, heat, Special configurations
stumble hazards. vibration and noise. available on request.
Wooden safety slatting

Version: Safety slatting made of strong, ribbed beech wood strips.
Material:
Kiln-dried beech wood slats linked with at least 3 steel cables.
Locked at the ends with galvanised threaded bolts with hexagon
socket heads.
Resilient rubber feet prevent the wooden slatting from slipping
and ensure it is comfortable for walking.
Resistant to most oils and acids.
Height: approx. 35 mm.
Weight: approx. 10.5 kg/m2.
Available slatting widths: 80, 100, 120, 150 cm.
Available slatting lengths:
Any length can be supplied (limited only by ease of handling).
96 1825/1845 – End profile:
additional bevelling across the width of the slatting.
Profiled on the end
96 1830/1850 – Bevelled: slats. Overall height
Each wooden slat is additionally bevelled at an angle of 45° 35 mm (length approx.
along the long sides of the slatting. 110 mm)
Cleaning: Unroll the wooden slatting.
Bevelled along the long

sides of the slatting
Without profile / bevelling
End slat End slat

Size = Length
cm 150 200 profile profile
96
96 1820 width 80 cm without bevelling, (247,25) (328,90)
without end slat profile
Wooden safety slatting Bevelling
96 1825 width 80 cm with end profile on (282,90) (363,40)
both wide sides
96 1830 width 80 cm with bevelling along one side (313,95) (405,95)
and end profile on both wide sides
Weight kg 12.6 16.8 96 1820 / 1840 without side bevelling, without end slat profile
Size = Length cm 150 200

96 1840 width 100 cm without bevelling, (289,80) (384,10)
without end slat profile
96 1825 / 1845 with end slat profile (2 ends)
96 1845 width 100 cm with end profile on (331,20) (426,65)
both wide sides
96 1850 width 100 cm with bevelling along one side (364,55) (469,20)
and end profile on both wide sides
Weight kg 15.6 20.8
96 1830 / 1850 with bevelled sides and end slat profile
Continued ▶

Workplace mats
▶ Continued
Workplace mats, open structure for wet / dry areas
Version: Industrial nitrile rubber floor mats with circular openings and easily visible,
orange-coloured safety edging on three sides.
 Additional bars on the underside provide generous "collection room" for
dirt and liquids − the surface remains clean, dry and non-slip.
 Long life robust nitrile rubber with high wear resistance.
 Highly anti-slip surface and secure positioning on the floor, even when wet.
Mat thickness: 22 mm, Weight: approx. 13 kg/m2.
 Resistant to industrial oils and most chemicals.
Note: Special dimensions available on request.
Size = Length×width cm 66×102 97×163

Nitrile rubber floor mat,
96 1870 (151,80) (214,48)
open structure, with safety edges
Workplace mats, modular sealed surface, for dry areas

Description: Industrial workplace mat with sealed anti-slip surface.
Tested to anti-slip grade R9 to DIN 51130 and BGR 181.
Flexible interlocking system (tiles 91×91 cm) permits
optimum adaptation to local conditions (can be laid as
islands, in all directions and in various shapes).
Flexible edging allows creation of internal and external corners.
Of virtually indestructible rubber.
Silicone-free, therefore suitable for paint shops.
Resistant to most chemicals, and to extreme temperatures.
19 mm thick material offers high ergonomic benefits.
Anti-fatiguing effect.
Tiles with open structure available on request.
Version:
96 1880 – 100 % natural rubber, not oil-resistant
(if continuously exposed to oil).
96 1882 – 100 % nitrile rubber mixture, oil-resistant.
Flame resistant (suitable for fabrication shops).
Tested for flame resistance to class Bfl-S1 to DIN EN 13501
and to class 1 to ASTM E648-03 (NFPA253).
96 Note: Ensure good ventilation during heavy exposure to sparks.
Workplace mat 91×91 cm,

96 1880 (71,53)
100 % natural rubber
Workplace mat 91×91 cm,
96 1882 100 % nitrile rubber, (148,35) 84 5000,
flame resistant see main
96 1888_1
catalogue
Edge strips for workplace mats

Version: Edge strip 91 cm,
for attachment to tiles.
Yellow or black colour.
Size 0 – Edge strip without
96 1888_0
edge interlocks.
Size 1 – Edge strip with
edge interlocks.
96 1888_1
96 1888_0
Size = Type of edge strip 0 1

96 1888 Edge strip yellow 91 cm (22,20) (22,20)
96 1889 Edge strip black 91 cm (22,20) (22,20)

Instructions for safety slatting and workplace mat planning
Layout example of Layout example for a workplace
a made-to-order mat No. 96 1870 (dimensions
safety slatting. specified in units of 30.5 cm plus
5 cm for the bevelled edge).
We recommend the preparation of a
layout to plan your individual mat
requirements. We will be glad to provide
a quotation for your individual mat.
End
profile
Workplace mats
Anti-fatiguing mats, sealed surface, for dry areas

Version: These industrial workplace mats are made of high quality plastic for heavy-duty use:
 Hard and wear-resistant vinyl surface for optimum slip-resistance and long
service life.
 The industrial chequer-plate surface means the mat can easily be turned in place.
 Soft vinyl foam core for anti-fatiguing characteristics.
This is laminated to the vinyl surface.
 On all sides the edges are bevelled to eliminate the risk of tripping
when walking on to the mat.
 Limited resistance to most industrial greases, agents and chemicals.
 Not suitable for coolant emulsions.
 Sealed all round to prevent penetration of moisture.
 Fire-resistant to DIN 4102 B1.
 Mat thickness: 14.3 mm.
 Weight: approx. 6.5 kg/m2.
Available in black or in black with yellow safety stripes on the long sides.
Workplace mats in fixed sizes

Workplace mat Top
96 1890 (221,95) (295,55)
width 91 cm black
Workplace mat Top
96 1895 (232,30) (325,45)
width 91 cm black / yellow
Weight kg 9 12

Workplace mat Top
96 1900 (301,30) (401,35)
width 122 cm black
Workplace mat Top
96 1905 (325,45) (433,55)
Weight kg 11 14
Workplace mats, length freely definable

96
Version: Specification as for No. 961890 − 961905, but with length freely definable
from 0.6 m up to a maximum of 22.8 m. On all sides the edges are bevelled
to eliminate the risk of tripping when walking on to the mat.
Note: Price per piece = price / m×mat length
Delivery approx. 1 − 2 weeks
Ordering data: Length in metres
Size = Price / m kg / m
Workplace mat Top
96 1920 (96,14) 3.9
width 60 cm black
Workplace mat Top
96 1925 (105,11) 3.9
Workplace mat Top
96 1930 (143,75) 5.9
width 91 cm black
Workplace mat Top
96 1935 (158,13) 5.9
Workplace mat Top
96 1940 (194,93) 7.9
width 122 cm black
Workplace mat Top
96 1945 (210,45) 7.9
Cut-out view

Swivel work chairs
How to select the optimum work chair :

1. Select the suitable surface:
Wood − The economy version: simple, attractively priced, hard-wearing (e. g. in a training workshop).
PU − The all-rounder: soft, practical and robust (e. g. in industrial factory areas).
Synthetic leather − The most comfortable: comfortable, soft and washable (e. g. in the drawing office).
Fabric − The breathable option: soft, comfortable and breathable (e. g. in a foreman's office).
2. Select the correct frame:
Wear-resistant large pad feet.

Suitable for: Working when applying considerable force or performing very fine motor movements.
When the floor is extremely dirty.
DIN 68877 prohibits the use of castors on chairs whose seat height is over 650 mm.
Load-responsive castor braking for hard floors.

Suitable for: All applications not covered by the use of floor pads.
Note:
Castors can easily be fitted in place of pads.
Pads cannot be fitted in place of castors (the gas pressure spring would strike the floor).
You should choose your work chair and adjust it for the optimum seating posture, appropriate to your work and to your physical size.
How to adjust the swivel work chair correctly:
1. Set the seat height correctly: 2. Backrest height adjustment:

90-degree rule: approx. 90 degrees Adjust the backrest so that
between upper arm and forearm the lumbar support presses
when the forearm is resting against your backbone and
horizontally on the work surface. supports it in the region of the
At least 90 degree angle in the knee 3rd and 4th lumbar vertebrae
joint when the foot is placed flat on (about belt height).
the ground. The feet must have
96 solid contact with the ground or
the footrest.
Use the whole of the seat area.
Stay in contact with the backrest.
3. Adjust the seat angle: 4. Permanent contact with the

Most workplaces in production backrest for dynamic sitting:
require a forward leaned working The backrest tracks automatically
position. The seat inclination every movement of the upper
setting should be chosen to body. The back is supported at all
maintain a body posture angle times. This enables dynamic sitting,
of at least 90 degrees and to in which the musculature remains
avoid pressure on the thigh relaxed and the backbone and
area. This ensures an even supply spinal discs are not subjected to
of blood and avoids effectively loads. Permanent contact with the
sitting with a hunched back. backrest can be brought to an end
in any desired leaning position, if
you are performing work that
demands precise motor control,
restraint or application of force.

Swivel work chairs Base-Tec
Perfectly equipped Individual setting functions
Standard: DIN 68 877 Anatomic Permanent Seat tilt Seat height adjustment
Version:  Stable five-point star base (⌀ 680 mm) cushion forming contact backrest adjustment Easy height adjustment by
of steel section with flat extensions to gas pressure safety spring.
carry the feet.
 Ergonomically shaped seat and backrest Backrest height adjustment:
with good lumbar support. Backrest height adjustment in steps.
 Swing-mounted backrest.
Optionally with:  Large pad feet.
 Load-responsive castor braking for
hard floors.
 High version with large pad feet and
height adjustable chrome-plated
footrest ring.
Base-Tec swivel work chairs with GS kitemark
Swivel work chair Base-Tec Beech marine ply

Version: Seat and backrest of beech marine ply, multi-coat clear varnished, washable
and stain-resistant. Seat (W×D): 430×400 mm. Backrest height: 340 mm.
Height adjustable
from − to (mm)
Swivel work chair with
96 3020 183,43 420 − 600
pad feet, wood
96 3030 193,20 420 − 600
castors, wood
Swivek wirk chair with pad feet 96 3020 96 3030 96 3040
96 3040 250,70 570 − 840
and footrest ring, wood
Swivel work chair Base-Tec PU foam

Version: Seat and backrest of soft PU foam. Low-maintenance, washable, robust
and resistant to light acids and alkali as well as mechanical impact.
Seat (W×D): 440×410 mm. Backrest height: 380 mm.
Height adjustable
from − to (mm)
96 3140 208,15 430 − 610
pad feet, PU foam
96 3150 224,83 430 − 610
castors, PU foam
96 3140 96 3150 96 3160
Swivel work chair with pad feet
96 3160 287,50 580 − 850
and footrest ring, PU foam
Swivel work chair Base-Tec Synthetic leather

Version: Extra large seat and backrest with synthetic leather upholstery.
Easy-care and washable.
Height adjustable
from − to (mm)
96 3100 208,15 450 − 630
96 3110
pad feet, synthetic leather
castors, synthetic leather
224,83 450 − 630 96
Swivel work chair with pad feet 96 3100 96 3110 96 3120
96 3120 287,50 590 − 860
and footrest ring, synthetic leather
Swivel work chair Base-Tec Fabric cushion

Version: Extra large seat and back with soft fabric upholstery.
Comfortable and breathable.
Height adjustable
from − to (mm)
96 3060 208,15 450 − 630
pad feet, fabric
96 3070 224,83 450 − 630
castors, fabric
Swivel work chair with pad feet 96 3060 96 3070 96 3080
96 3080 287,50 590 − 860
and footrest ring, fabric
Size = Colour RED BLUE

96 3061 208,15 208,15
pad feet, fabric
Swivel work chair with Sample fabric
96 3071 224,83 224,83
castors, fabric
Swivel work chair with pad feet
96 3081 287,50 287,50
and footrest ring, fabric
Colour RED BLUE 96 3071 96 3071
Sample fabric
_RED _BLUE
Continued ▶

Accessories for swivel work chairs Base-Tec
▶ Continued
Application: Armrests for work chairs Base-Tec PU foam, 60 −80 mm height-adjustable

synthetic leather and fabric cushion.
Not for beech marine ply chairs.
Ring armrests
96 3180 Pair 80,50 20 mm adjustable
of plastic in width
Multi-function armrests
96 3185 Pair 123,63
height adjustable 96 3180 96 3185
Base-Tec work stools with GS kitemark
Work stool Base-Tec Beech marine ply

Standard: DIN 68877
Version: 5-star plastic base. Seat height adjustable by gas pressure safety
spring with ring release. Seat of beech marine ply, natural varnish.
Seat ⌀ 400 mm.
96 3210/3220 – Base ⌀ 640 mm.
96 3230 – Base ⌀ 680 mm,
Height adjustable
height adjustable footrest ring.
from − to (mm)
Swivel stool with
96 3210 105,57 430 − 600
pad feet, wood
Swivel stool with
96 3220 111,78 430 − 600
castors, wood
Swivel stool with pad feet and
96 3230 149,50 570 − 850
footrest ring, wood
96 3210 96 3220 96 3230
Work stool Base-Tec PU foam

Standard: DIN 68877
spring with ring release. Seat surface of robust PU foam.
Seat ⌀ 350 mm.
96 3340/3350 – Base ⌀ 640 mm.
96 3360 – Base ⌀ 680 mm,
height adjustable footrest ring. Height adjustable
from − to (mm)
Swivel stool with
96 3340 111,78 430 − 600
pad feet, PU foam
Swivel stool with
96 3350 117,88 430 − 600
castors, PU foam
96 3360 149,50 570 − 850
footrest ring, PU foam
96 3340 96 3350 96 3360
Work stool Base-Tec Synthetic leather
Standard: DIN 68877
96 spring with ring release. Seat with washable synthetic leather
cushion in black, with all-round edge protection. Seat ⌀ 400 mm.
96 3300/3310 – Base ⌀ 640 mm.
96 3320 – Base ⌀ 680 mm,
Height adjustable
height adjustable footrest ring.
from − to (mm)
Swivel stool with
96 3300 133,40 430 − 600
pad feet, synthetic leather
Swivel stool with
96 3310 140,88 430 − 600
castors, synthetic leather
96 3320 174,80 570 − 850
footrest ring, synthetic leather 96 3300 96 3310 96 3320
Work stool Base-Tec Fabric cushion

Standard: DIN 68877
spring with ring release. Seat with soft fabric cushion in black,
with all-round edge protection. Seat ⌀ 400 mm.
96 3260/3270 – Base ⌀ 640 mm.
96 3280 – Base ⌀ 680 mm,
height adjustable footrest ring. Height adjustable
from − to (mm)
Swivel stool with
96 3260 133,40 430 − 600
pad feet, fabric
Swivel stool with
96 3270 140,88 430 − 600
castors, fabric
96 3280 174,80 570 − 850
footrest ring, fabric
96 3260 96 3270 96 3280

SWEEMO − dynamic mobile seating, with GS kitemark
Version: Seat height adjustment, upholstered backrest.
Back frame chrome-plated. Comfortable seat area 370×370 mm.
Large base disc of plastic (⌀ 470 mm).
With 5 double castors for hard floors.
96 3450 – PU foam (seat and backrest) − practical, hard-wearing, easy to clean.
96 3460 – Synthetic leather (seat and backrest) − comfortable, soft, washable. PU, black Fabric, blue
96 3470 – Fabric (seat and backrest) − comfortable, breathable, easy on the skin.
Application: Space-saving, flexible seating solution for different workings at
various places.
When the castors are fitted, the seat is mobile, when they are detached,
you have a rocker base seating solution for stationary work.
The spine is supported by the backrest, the rocker base allows
movement whilst seated. On completion of the work, the Sweemo
Synthetic leather, blue Fabric, orange
can easily be slid under the desk.
Size = Colour BLACK BLUE ORANGE

SWEEMO with castors,
96 3450 240,35 — —
PU foam
SWEEMO with castors, Synthetic leather, orange
96 3460 263,35 263,35 263,35
synthetic leather
SWEEMO with castors,
96 3470 251,85 251,85 251,85
2 in 1
fabric
Colour Black Blue Orange
440 − 410 −
640 mm 610 mm
Easy change-over
Rocker base −
Rocker base − Castors − movement when sitting still.
movement when sitting still. mobile seating.
Standing stools height adjustable

Standard: DIN 68877
Version: Tubular steel frame with anti-slip, oil-resistant pad feet.
Seat height adjustable by locking lever. Seat of PU foam.
Adjustable seat angle and pivotable to either side with
automatic return adjustment.
96 3900 – Mechanical height adjustment of the seat.
96 4900 – Height adjustment of the seat by gas pressure safety spring.
Colour:
96 3900 – Light grey RAL 7035.
96
96 4900 – Black RAL 9005.
Standing stool, height

96 3900 166,18
adjustable, mechanical
Standing stool, height
96 4900 228,28
adjustable, gas spring
Seat mm 320×220
Base area (96 3900) mm 520×420
Base area (96 4900) mm 650×450
Height adjustable (96 3900) mm 600 − 850 96 3900 96 4900
Height adjustable (96 4900) mm 645 − 825
Stackable stool − beech marine ply

Standard: DIN 68877
Version: Beech marine ply seat.
Tubular steel frame, stackable.
Seat height 500 mm.
Colour: Black RAL 9005.
96 4300 Stackable stool (65,78)
Seat ⌀ mm 350
Seat height mm 500

Ladders with GS kitemark, range Z 600 / Z 500
Stepladder with safety crossbar, single-sided access

Standard: EN 131 and BGV D 36.
Version: Steps and stiles of extruded aluminium profile.
Large safety platform with integrated hinge connection, safety crossbar with wide shelf;
85 mm deep steps with anti-slip grooves and patented 7-point step-stile connection.
Optimum stability due to rigid connections on both sides. Two integral bucket hooks.
Size = Number of steps including platform 3 4 5 6 7 8 10

Stepladder
96 6000 (138,–) (166,75) (179,40) (205,85) (261,05) (286,35) (341,55)
single-sided access
Ladder length m 1.45 1.65 1.90 2.10 2.35 2.60 3.05
Platform height m 0.70 0.90 1.15 1.35 1.55 1.75 2.20
Working height approx. m 2.70 2.90 3.15 3.35 3.55 3.75 4.20
Outer width at bottom m 0.45 0.47 0.49 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.61
Stile height mm 73 73 73 73 73 73 73
Maximum safe working load kg 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Weight kg 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.5 13.0 14.0 96 6000
Safety stepladder, folding, single-sided access

205 mm deep steps with anti-slip ribbing.
Stable positioning due to pressure stiffening and anti-slip ladder feet.
96 6010 – Additionally with high safety rail.
Size = Number of steps including platform 2 3 4 5

Safety stepladder
96 6005 without rail (162,15) (213,90) — —
single-sided access
Safety stepladder
96 6010 with rail — (259,90) (312,80) (368,–)
single-sided access
Platform height m 0.44 0.66 0.88 1.10
Working height approx. m 2.45 2.65 2.90 3.10
96 6010
Outer width at base m 0.55 0.57 0.59 0.60
Maximum safe working load kg 150 150 150 150
Weight 96 6005 / 6010 kg 4.7 7.0 / 8.5 10.5 13
Stepladder double-sided access

Large platform with integral hinge connection.
Optimum stability due to rigid connections on both sides.
Size = Number of steps including platform 2×3 2×4 2×5 2×6 2×7 2×8 2×10
Stepladder
96 6050 (124,20) (150,65) (180,55) (221,95) (251,85) (308,20) (331,20)
96 Ladder length
double-sided access
Working height approx.

m
m
0.75
2.50
0.95
2.70
1.20
2.95
1.40
3.15
1.65
3.40
1.90
3.65
2.35
4.10
Outer width at bottom m 0.41 0.43 0.45 0.47 0.50 0.52 0.56
Stile height mm 73 73 73 73 73 73 73
Maximum safe working load kg 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Weight kg 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0 10.5 12.0 15.5 96 6050
Rung stepladder, plastic throughout, double-sided access

Standard: DIN EN 61478 / VDE 0682 section 6.5 category 1/30 kV high-voltage test for ladders
of insulated material is satisfied. VDE tested at voltages (1000 V AC, 1500 V DC).
To DIN EN ISO 4892-2 ageing resistance 10 years.
Version: Rungs and stiles (30×30 mm) of glass fibre-reinforced plastic for especially high
chemical resistance. High-strength perlon strap ensures resistance to spreading.
Replaceable plastic shoes for non-slip characteristics.
Application: Safety ladders for special requirements in the chemical and pharmaceutical
industries, in electricity sub-stations, gasworks and waterworks.
Size = Number of steps 2×4 2×6 2×8 2×10 2×14

Rung stepladder,
96 6060 plastic throughout, (455,40) (548,55) (685,40) (822,25) (1178,75)
double-sided access
Ladder length m 1.32 1.88 2.44 3.00 4.12
Working height approx. m 2.60 3.10 3.65 4.15 5.20
Outer width at bottom m 0.48 0.54 0.60 0.65 0.77
Maximum safe working load kg 150 150 150 150 150
Weight kg 8.3 11.9 15.5 19.3 27.2 96 6060
Continued ▶

Mobile rack ladder
Rack ladder e. g. for drawer racks

can be found on page 99.
The rack ladder
enables safe access
When not in use the to all items.
ladder can be pushed Even in the top
back out of the way. drawer !
Ladders and platforms with GS kitemark, range Z 600 / Z 500

▶ Continued
Work platform, folding, double-sided access
Version: Steps and stiles of extruded aluminium profile. Large platform with integral hinge connection.
Optimum stability due to rigid connections on both sides.
Size = Number of steps including platform 2×2 2×3 2×4

Work platform,
96 6070 folding (133,40) (177,10) (223,10)
double-sided access
Platform height m 0.50 0.70 0.90
Working height approx. m 2.50 2.70 2.90
Platform size (W×D) mm 520×230 520×230 520×230
Outer width at base m 0.58 0.60 0.62
Maximum safe working load kg 150 150 150
Weight kg 4.0 6.0 7.5 96 6070
Lean-to ladder
Standard: EN 131 and BGV D36.
Version: Steps and stiles of extruded aluminium profile. 85 mm deep steps with anti-slip grooves
and patented 7-point step-stile connection. Particularly light and therefore easy to carry;
with smooth stile sides for a secure grip.
Size = Number of steps 8 10 12 14

96 6080 Lean-to ladder (141,45) (173,65) (205,85) (238,05)
Ladder length m 2.04 2.50 2.96 3.42
Working height approx. m 3.15 3.60 4.10 4.50
Stile height mm 87 87 87 87
Weight kg 5.8 7.2 8.5 9.8 96 6080
96
Multi-purpose ladder, 3-part
Standard: EN 131 and BGV D36.
Version: Rungs and stiles of extruded aluminium profile.
Rung-stile connection by strong high quality swaging.
Protection against spreading by high-strength Perlon
straps and additional 1 rigid connection.
Guides clamped around the stiles (exchangeable).
Upper ladder with retaining hooks and lift-off
protection. Optimum stability using extra wide
crossbar base.
Size = Number of rungs 3×8 3×10 3×12

Multi-purpose ladder
96 6120 (450,80) (573,85) (667,–)
3-part
Ladder length, extended
(as 3-part lean-to ladder) m 5.80 6.90 8.60
Length as 2-part lean-to ladder
and as stepladder with extension piece m 4.10 4.95 6.10
Length of the ladder parts
(also of stepladder without extension piece) m 2.45 3.00 3.55
Stile height mm 73 73 98
Width of crossbar base m 0.80 0.90 1.00 96 6120
Maximum safe working load kg 150 150 150
Weight kg 18.5 24.3 30.1
Continued ▶

Ladders and platforms with GS kitemark, range Z 600 / Z 500
▶ Continued
Kick stool with spring-loaded castors for mobility

Standard: EN 14183.
Version: Ribbed, anti-slip step.
Safe positioning by patented automatic
engagement and anti-slip rubber lip.
Loading capacity 150 kg.
Size = Number of steps without platform 1

96 6145 Kick stool (67,85)
96 6145
Working height mm 430
External ⌀ mm 450
Weight kg 3.5
Work platform "machine step"

Version: Stable lightweight aluminium construction, 200 mm deep
steps of ribbed aluminium, standing platform 350×577 mm.
Size = Number of steps including platform 1 2 3 4 5

Aluminium
96 6148 (97,75) (181,70) (253,–) (324,30) (424,35)
machine step
Platform height m 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00
Working height approx. m 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00
Footprint m 0.40×0.58 0.61×0.64 0.85×0.66 1.08×0.68 1.35×0.73
Overall safe working load kg 150 150 150 150 150
Weight kg 3.0 5.5 7.8 10.1 13.5
96 6148
Modular working platforms

Standard: DIN 4569 and BGV D36.
Version: Extremely torsion-resistant, corrosion-resistant and weatherproof light metal
construction throughout. Steps of ribbed aluminium 555×250 mm. Modular
structure allows changes and extensions. Modules of 4 different heights. The
two-stage base module with up to 3 additional stages is suitable for mobile
use. Attachment possible from module type B.
96 6160
Size = Type A B C D E F
Working platform
96 6150 (128,80) (209,30) (90,85) (105,80) (113,85) (119,60)
individual module
Module combination A B B+C B+D B+D+E B+D+E+F
96
Working height m 2.20 2.40 2.40 2.60 2.80 2.99
Top platform height m 0.20 0.40 0.40 0.60 0.80 0.99
Overall platform depth m 0.30 0.55 0.80 0.80 1.05 1.30
Maximum safe working load kg 150 150 150 150 150 150
Weight of individual module / module comb. kg 2.9 / − 4.8 / − 3.9 / 8.7 4.4 / 9.2 4.8 / 14.0 5.5 / 19.5
Application: Span module No. 96 6160 for connecting 2 modular working

platforms, creating a walkway accessible from both ends.
•
Size = Length cm 100
96 6160 Span module (166,75) 1
Note: Railing No. 96 6170 only required for module D onwards. •• 1

2
96 6170
96 6180
•
Railings (single-sided)
96 6170 (70,15)
for working platform module
Rollers set, 2 pieces 2
96 6180 (25,30) 96 6150
for modular working platform
Continued ▶

Platforms and platform ladders with GS kitemark, range Z600 / Z500
▶ Continued
Platform steps, mobile, single or double-sided access
Standard: BGV D 36 and BGI 637.
Version: Convenient platform steps with 200 mm deep steps (60° rise angle).
Spacious platform (600×800 mm) with platform railing (1.00 m high) and
bars at foot and knee levels. Four spring-mounted castors ⌀ 125 mm.
Note:  Handrail is a mandatory accessory from 1 m platform height or 5 steps. both-hands-free principle:
 Dispatched as components for easy self-assembly. Supplied unassembled. In accordance with new EU
directive safe working with
both hands free possible.
96 6220
Size = Number of steps including platform 3 4 5 6 7
Platform steps, mobile,
96 6220 (722,20) (759,–) (800,40) (840,65) (880,90)
single-sided access
Platform steps, mobile,
96 6270 (760,15) (799,25) (882,05) (951,05) (1033,85)
double-sided access
Platform height without railing m 0.72 0.96 1.20 1.44 1.68
Footprint (96 6220) m 0.81×1.26 0.88×1.46 0.95×1.64 1.02×1.82 1.09×2.00
Footprint (96 6270) m 0.81×1.52 0.88×1.80 0.95×2.07 1.02×2.35 1.09×2.63
Maximum safe working load kg 150 150 150 150 150
Weight (96 6220) kg 29 33 36 40 44
Weight (96 6270) kg 31 37 43 49 55
Size = for number of steps including platform 4 5 6 7

96 6225 Handrail for platform steps (53,48) (53,48) (53,48) (53,48)
for platform steps No. 96 6220 are required pieces 2 2 2 2
for platform steps No. 96 6270 are required pieces 4 4 4 4 96 6270
Platform ladder folding

Standard: EN 131
Version: Compact stepladder with 80 mm deep steps. Work platform (400×400 mm) with rails
round 3 sides and work shelf. Optimum stability due to rigid connections on both sides.
both-hands-free principle:
▶
In accordance with new EU
directive safe working with
both hands free possible.
For increased
Safety cage with work shelf Folds away to save space non-slip properties

96 6275 Fold-away platform ladder
Platform height without railing m
(500,25)
1.32
(529,–)
1.58
(565,80)
1.84
(601,45)
2.07
96
Footprint m 0.67×1.2 0.69×1.4 0.71×1.6 0.74×1.75
Weight kg 10.4 11.8 13.1 14.6 96 6275
Platform ladder, mobile, folding

Standard: BGV D 36
Version: Ergonomic stepladders with 80 mm deep steps.
Anti-slip platform (600×630 mm) with rails on 3 sides.
Large shelf for picked parts.
Handrails close up automatically when the stepladder both-hands-free principle:
In accordance with new EU
is folded, allowing space-saving storage. directive safe working with
Wheels with parking brakes (⌀ 160 mm). both hands free possible.
For increased
non-slip properties

Platform ladder mobile,
96 6280 (1324,80) (1371,95) (1449,–) (1513,40)
folding
Platform height without railing m 1.30 1.60 1.80 2.10
Footprint m 1.09×1.40 1.29×1.50 1.29×1.65 1.69×1.80
Weight kg 33.5 36.5 39.0 46.0 96 6280

All-purpose shelves
Version: Very sturdy square supports 40×40×2 mm, mountings at increments
of 40 : 40 mm with insertion slots for setting the storage shelves to the
right height for the goods to be stored. Supports have plastic base
plates. Shelves with particularly high carrying capacity of strong
sheet metal with side faces bent inwards.
Colour: Rack supports, jet black RAL 9005,
shelves light grey, powder-coated.
Extension
Application: Ideal for industry, craft, trade, administration, archives etc.. The sizes are rack Basic rack
designed to match commercially available metal and plastic storage No. 96 8010 No. 96 8000
containers − for the best use of space. Can be set up as single, row or
double rack. Simple, quick and exact installation, no bolts required,
the storage shelves are simply inserted and locked in place with the
appropriate taper pins (No. 96 8420).
Note: Storage boxes for fitting all-purpose shelves No. 96 8000 − 96 8210
size 400 and 500 can be found on page 163 No. 961541 − 961543.
Complete rack
Size = Depth of storage shelves mm 400 500 600
••
All-purpose basic rack 2 m high
96 8000 200,68 231,15 255,30
complete (5 shelves, 4 supports)
All-purpose extension rack 2 m high 1 Basic rack
••
96 8010 163,30 193,20 215,63 2 Extension rack
All-purpose basic rack 2.5 m high 3 Corner rack
96 8100 244,95 280,60 309,35
••
complete (6 shelves, 4 supports) 4 Storage shelf depth less 56 mm
All-purpose extension rack 2.5 m high 5 Storage shelf depth less 2 mm
96 8110 196,65 233,45 262,20
•
complete (6 shelves, 2 supports) 6 Sum of all dimensions plus 54 mm
All-purpose basic rack 3 m high
96 8200 — 328,90 361,10
•
1
All-purpose extension rack 3 m high
96 8210 — 271,40 304,75 2
5
4
Storage shelf length
Overall height (96 8000, 96 8010)
Overall height (96 8100, 96 8110)
Overall height (96 8200, 96 8210)
mm
mm
mm
mm −
1000
2004
2504
3004 3004
•• • ••
6
5
4
• 2
• 1
• 3
Number of storage shelves (96 8000, 96 8010) pieces 5

950 mm 950 mm
••
•
Number of storage shelves (96 8100, 96 8110) pieces 6 4
1004 mm 1004 mm
Number of storage shelves (96 8200, 96 8210) pieces − 7 7 5
Carrying capacity per shelf (without reinforcing strut) kg 180 6
Maximum capacity per rack bay
(with 600 mm spaces between storage shelves) kg 1375 − 5500
Rack supports individual

Version: 40×40×2 mm, complete with plastic base plate.
Colour: Jet black RAL 9005 powder-coated.
Size = Overall height mm 2000 2500 3000 Storage shelves are Easily viewed storage areas.
easily inserted and
Rack support with
96 8300 Piece 19,15 23,69 27,95 are locked in place
plastic base plate with a tapered pin
96 Single storage shelves of sheet steel
Version: Complete with 4 brackets and 4 pins.
Colour: Light grey powder-coated.
Size = Storage shelf depth mm 400 500 600

Single storage shelf
96 8400 25,65 31,63 36,46
with 4 brackets and 4 pins
Storage shelf length mm 1000 96 8400
Storage shelf height mm 30
Loading capacity: without reinforcing strut kg 180
Loading capacity: with 1 reinforcing strut No. 96 8500 kg 240
Loading capacity: with 2 reinforcing struts No. 96 8500 kg 300
Corner storage shelves of sheet steel

Version: Complete with 4 brackets and 4 pins.
Colour: Light grey powder-coated.

Corner storage shelf 96 8410
96 8410 20,59 23,35 29,10
with 4 brackets and 4 pins
Storage shelf length×depth mm 400×400 500×500 600×600
Storage shelf height mm 30
Carrying capacity kg 230

Continued ▶

Accessories for all-purpose rack No. 96 8000 − 96 8210
▶ Continued
•
Side panels of sheet steel
1
•
Version: With 9×9 mm square holes at 37 mm intervals for
mounting hooks and supports No. 961330 − 96 1430.
A side panel consists of two perforated panels mounted 1 Complete rack
• •
over one another. Supplied completely with fastenings. No. 96 8000
Colour: Anthracite grey RAL 7016 powder-coated. 2 Side wall
(two-piece) 2
Application: For side closure at the end of a rack No. 96 8450
(not suitable as divider between two racks).
For enclosing a complete racking bay, 2 side panels
(one left and one right) have to be ordered.

Side panel 2 m high
96 8450 97,06 121,90 146,63
with fastenings
Side panel 2.5 m high
96 8460 121,90 147,78 177,10
with fastenings
Real panels of sheet steel

Example of fittings:
Version: Consisting of two perforated panels mounted over one another.
Supplied completely with fastenings.
Application: For enclosure at the rear of a racking bay
(not suitable as divider between two racks).
96 8480
Back wall
Size = height mm 2000 2500 Storage boxes for fitting to the racks Top view
96 8480 Rear panel of solid sheet 210,45 218,50 can be found on page 163.
Rack supports
Reinforcing strut
Application: For additional strengthening of storage shelves No. 96 8400
when particularly heavy parts have to be stored
(strut is inserted into the storage shelf from below).
Size = Overall length mm 1000

96 8500 Reinforcing strut 3,48
96 8500
Diagonal brace
Application: For additional bracing of free-standing or single racks.
2 diagonal braces are recommended per 3 m run of
racking.
Diagonal brace
96 8600 17,48
complete with fastenings
Length mm 1470
Wall attachment bracket 96

Application: For fastening the rear face of the rack to a wall, to avoid risk of toppling.
Spacing from wall 70 to 105 mm, adjustable.
Wall attachment bracket

96 8700 13,28
complete with fastenings
With just a few simple movements . . . . . . organisation is provided !

Storage shelf rack with TÜV / GS kitemark
120 kg
• 1 No tools are required
•
Version: Sturdy column frame of rectangular columns to fit cross beams
(50×25×1.25 mm) with slots at intervals of to the column
•
40 mm for mounting cross beams / shelves. frames. 1
Column frame with plastic end caps. 2 Shelves are
No tools required for assembly. simply placed
The high lateral stability eliminates the on a pair of
need for diagonal stabilising struts. cross beams.
Storage shelves of galvanised sheet metal.
•
Colour: Column frame signal blue
RAL 5005 powder-coated.
2
Pairs of cross beams always
anthracite grey RAL 7016.
Basic rack Extension rack
Note:  The 550 mm deep shelves are

dimensionally compatible with system
cabinets No. 95 6000 − 95 6790 and can
be combined with them in any way.
 Individual parts and accessories for
storage shelves and racks can be found
under No. 96 9300 − 96 9550.
Size = Rack depth mm 400 550

Basic rack 1 m high (2 frames, Basic rack Extension rack
96 9000 (95,91) (116,15)
3 pairs of cross beams, 3 shelves) clear span clear span
Extension rack 1 m high (1 frame,
96 9010 (73,83) (88,78)
3 pairs of cross beams, 3 shelves)
Basic rack 1.2 m high (2 frames,
96 9100 (101,20) (120,75)
Extension rack 1.2 m high (1 frame,
96 9110 (76,13) (90,85)
Basic rack 2 m high (2 frames,
96 9200 (135,70) (159,28)
Extension rack 2 m high (1 frame,
96 9210 (101,43) (120,75)
Storage shelf length mm 946
Overall height (96 9000, 96 9010) mm 1000
96 Maximum load per shelf
Maximum load per rack bay
kg
kg
120
900
Corner connecting rack
Note: Corner connecting rack can only be used in

combination with 2 basic racks.
Size = For rack depth mm 400 550

Corner connecting rack 1 m high (1 corner
96 9250 (198,95) (206,43)
column, 3 corner shelves with cross beams)
Corner connecting rack 1.2 m high (1 corner
96 9260 (200,68) (208,15)
Corner connecting rack 2 m high (1 corner
96 9270 (269,10) (278,30)
Dimension A
Shelf length×width mm 975×975 565 mm for racking depth 550 mm
777 mm for racking depth 400 mm
Dimension B
Overall height (96 9260) mm 1200 900 mm for racking depth 400 mm
Overall height (96 9270) mm 2000 1,005 mm for racking depth 550 mm
Number of storage shelves (96 9250, 96 9260) pcs 3
Number of storage shelves (96 9270) pcs 4
Maximum load per shelf kg 120
Maximum load per corner link kg 900

Continued ▶

Individual parts for storage shelf rack with TÜV / GS kitemark
▶ Continued
120 kg
Column frames − single

Version: With slots at 40 mm intervals and plastic end caps at both ends.
Application: For basic and extension racks.

96 9300 Column frame 1000 mm high (23,23) (27,49)
Version: With slots at 40 mm intervals and plastic end caps at both ends. Sheet metal
panels which engage in the holes prevent access to the shelves from the side.
Application: For basic racks and extension racks, for use as intermediate frame or end frame.

Column frame with sheet metal panels
96 9305 (65,55) (70,84)
1000 mm high
96 9320 96 9325 96 9310 96 9315
96 9315 (72,91) (79,35)
1200 mm high
96 9325 (99,82) (109,94)
2000 mm high
Shelf with pair of cross beams

Version: Cross beams for insertion in the column frames.
The galvanised shelves are laid on the cross beams.
Colour: Cross beam pairs always anthracite grey RAL 7016 powder-coated.
Application: For basic and extension racks.
Size = For rack depth mm 400 550 96 9350
Shelf, galvanised
96 9350 (17,25) (20,64)
with pair of cross beams
Storage shelf (length×depth) mm 946×395 946×545
Storage shelf height mm 38 38
Maximum area loading kg 120 120
Loose goods trays

Suitable for: Shelf No. 96 9350 and rack No. 96 9000−96 9210. 96 9360
Version: Two loose goods strips of galvanised sheet steel (110 mm
high at the front, 230 mm high at the rear) with slots on
the inner faces to accept the 4 loose goods dividers.
Example of fittings:
Colour: Dividers always anthracite grey RAL 7016 powder-coated. Basic rack No. 96 9200
Note: Further loose goods dividers can be found under No. 96 9375 with loose goods tray
No. 96 9360
with corresponding details of sizes (rack depth).
Size = For rack depth mm 400 550 96

96 9360 Loose goods tray (77,05) (80,73)
Tray height at front / at rear mm 110 / 230 110 / 230
Corner column − single

Version: With slots at 40 mm intervals and plastic end caps at both ends.
Application: For corner connection rack.
96 9500 Corner column 1000 mm high (21,91)

Corner shelf with cross beams

Version: 3 cross beams for attachment to column frame / corner column,
the galvanised corner shelf is laid on the cross beams.
Colour: Cross beams always anthracite grey RAL 7016 powder-coated.
Application: For corner connection rack.
Corner shelf, galvanised
96 9550 (58,88) (61,41)
with cross beams
Storage shelf (length×depth) mm 975×975 975×975
Storage shelf height mm 38 38 96 9520 96 9500 96 9550
Maximum area loading kg 120 120

NC storage technology
97

Range overview − NC tool storage − with TÜV / GS kitemark
Flexible − versatile − can be combined as required: the GARANT NC tool storage range offers many facilities for professional
storage, secure transport and flexible provision in your production area.
All items in the NC storage range are based on the GARANT product platform and can be combined to suit your needs.
We will be pleased to work with you to plan a suitable solution tailored to your internal works procedures and wishes.
Advantages:
Storage
 well arranged
 protective
 space-saving for tools, clamping and measuring tools
Transport
 safe
 flexible handling
Provision
 defined tools
 short access routes
 quick access
Protection for tools and fixtures against
 dirt
 damage
 theft
Type Variants Page
182 −
Tool trolley
183
Tool block insertion

frames 184 −
185
NC workbenches
Drawer inserts
186 −
NC machine 187
auxiliary cabinets
Storage cabinets
188 −
189
97
Kelch 190 −
TUL system 191

Tool trolley with TÜV / GS kitemark
1.2
Version: With pushing handle and 2 ball-bearing fixed wheels and 2 castors Installation
(⌀ 125 mm, PU treads), braked. Side panels with holes on a 37 mm grid example
for supporting up to 3 standard tool carriers No. 970200 at 1 level.
Can be fitted at inclination angles of 0° / 20° / 45°.
At top level 2 shelves (approx. 500×40 mm) with ribbed rubber inlays.
The tool trolley can also be fitted with a shelf No. 970100.
The grid holes also accept hooks and holders No. 961325 − 961430.
Application: For fitting with tool carriers, shelves, base tray and carrier rail
No. 970120 − 970200.
Tool trolley (437,–)

97 0000 without tool carriers
97 0000
Footprint (length×width) mm 717×500
Load capacity kg 400
Drawings pocket of plastic

97 0050
Application: For holding drawings, diagrams etc. up to size DIN A4.
Self-adhesive, light grey PS.
97 0050 Drawings pocket (11,56)

Internal dimensions (width×height) mm 230×220
Shelf of sheet steel

Suitable for: Tool trolley No. 970000.
Version: Made of sheet steel, with anti-roll lip and ribbed rubber inlay.
Height adjustable at 20 mm intervals.
97 0100 Sheet steel shelf (73,14)

Length×width×height mm 500×305×130
Inside area of shelf (length×width) mm 495×270
Plywood shelf
Application: For individual fitting-out and configuration of the
trolley for various uses.
Fastened to the tool trolley No. 970000 by means of
angle bracket, nuts and bolts (included in delivery).
97 0120
Plywood shelf with (66,70)
97 0120 angle bracket
Length×width×thickness mm 627×460×30
Base tray of galvanised sheet metal

Application: Fastened to the tool trolley No. 970000 by means of
nuts and bolts (included in delivery). 97 0140
Optional accessories: For open storage bins see No. 961510.
Base tray (18,63)
97 0140 without open storage bins
Base tray (38,53)
97 0160 with 4 open storage bins, blue
Length×width×height (97 0140) mm 627×225×35 97 0160
Open storage bins L×W×H (97 0160) mm 230/200×150×130
97 Installation examples:
Continued ▶

Accessories for tool trolley No. 970000 and upright cabinets No. 95 8610 / 95 8615
▶ Continued
Suitable for: For tool trolley No. 970000 and

upright cabinets No. 95 8610 / 95 8615.
Carrier rail for TUL tool carrier

(no special paint colours available).
Application: Fastened by means of nuts and bolts (included in delivery).
•
For supporting 2 tool carriers No. 970910.
•
1
Optional accessories: Tool carrier No. 970910 (not included in delivery).
••
2
1 Carrier rail
Carrier rail 2 Tool carrier No. 970910
97 0180 (39,91) (not supplied)
for TUL tool carrier
Length×width×height mm 627×40×110
Tool carriers with TÜV / GS kitemark ▶ A

▶
_SK50
Version: Of sheet steel with tool socket inserts of plastic.

Application: Fastened by means of nuts and bolts (included in delivery).
Note: VDI 20 sockets also suitable for TRUMPF stamping punches. _HSK100
Size = For tool shanks SK40 SK50 VDI20 VDI30 VDI40 C4 C5 C6

Tool carrier with
97 0200 (100,28) (84,64) (107,18) (101,89) (99,36) (137,43) (144,90) (122,48)
tool sockets
Length×width mm 627×150 627×150 627×150 627×150 627×150 627×150 627×150 627×150
Lateral frame size mm 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
Number of tool sockets pieces 13 5 28 17 13 8 8 5
Axial spacing (A) mm 85 129 52 69 85 77 77 119
Colour code for taper
Size = For tool shanks HSK40 HSK50 HSK63 HSK80 HSK100

Tool carrier with
97 0200 (112,93) (112,24) (108,79) (96,60) (93,84)
tool sockets
Length×width mm 627×150 627×150 627×150 627×150 627×150
Lateral frame size mm 37 37 37 37 37
Number of tool sockets pieces 21 14 14 6 5
Axial spacing (A) mm 56 76 76 110 129
We will gladly prepare

a quotation for NC
97
workstations to your
specifications.

Tool block insertion frames with TÜV / GS kitemark
▶ A
▶ For individual configuration with
1.2 interchangeable modules No. 970510
Version: Interchangeable modules inclined at approx. 10°.

Size SK40 – HSK100 – Fitted with 6 interchangeable modules No. 970510.
Size 6 – Frame only; for individual configuration of various
interchangeable modules No. 970510.
Colour: Tool block insertion frame light grey RAL 7035,
Interchangeable modules signal blue RAL 5005
powder-coated.
Note: VDI 20 sockets also suitable for TRUMPF stamping punches.
97 0500 97 0500_6

97 0500 Tool block insertion frame (290,95) (259,90) (328,90) (299,–) (269,10) (389,85) (410,55) (368,–)
Footprint (width×depth) mm 490×395 490×395 490×395 490×395 490×395 490×395 490×395 490×395
Overall height (without module blocks) mm 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
Size = For tool shanks HSK40 HSK50 HSK63 HSK80 HSK100 6

97 0500 Tool block insertion frame (342,70) (288,65) (302,45) (271,40) (276,–) (164,45)
Footprint (width×depth) mm 490×395 490×395 490×395 490×395 490×395 490×395
Overall height (without module blocks) mm 380 380 380 380 380 380
Number of tool sockets pieces 48 24 24 12 12 −
Axial spacing (A) mm 55 70 70 120 120 −
Colour code for taper −
Interchangeable modules with tool sockets

A
▶
▶
Version:
Size SK40 – HSK100 – Of sheet steel with tool socket inserts of plastic and a
captive securing screw with knurled head. Quick exchange
with few movements of the hand, no tools required. 97 0510_VDI
Size NEUTRAL – 30 mm thick PE sheet, can be drilled to suit. 97 0510_SK
Application: For holding tool blocks No. 970500.
Note: VDI 20 sockets also suitable for TRUMPF stamping punches.
97 0510_HSK 97 0510_NEUTRAL

Interchangeable module
97 0510 (20,64) (15,58) (26,91) (21,97) (17,37) (38,87) (41,98) (34,85)
with tool sockets
Length×width mm 232×135 232×135 232×135 232×135 232×135 232×135 232×135 232×135
Size = For tool shanks HSK40 HSK50 HSK63 HSK80 HSK100 NEUTRAL
Interchangeable module
97 0510 (29,67) (20,24) (22,66) (17,71) (18,57) (57,73)
with tool sockets
Length×width mm 232×135 232×135 232×135 232×135 232×135 232×135
Number of tool sockets pieces 8 4 4 2 2 −
Axial spacing (A) mm 55 70 70 120 120 −
Colour code for taper −
97 Application examples

Workbenches with TÜV / GS kitemark, for NC machines
50 100% 1000 kg
1.2 850
Workbench 1500 mm long, worktop depth 800 mm Bench top:

non-warping, of
Version: With 1 drawer unit 717 mm wide (36×36 E) and 1 support stand. beech marine ply,
waterproof glue,
Application: The drawer unit can be fitted on the left or the right. finished with clear varnish
No. 93 3575
Note: For storage of tools you need a drawer insert No. 970700.

Workbench with 1 support stand
97 0600 and 1 drawer unit 1347,80 36 E
717 mm
36×36 E
Drawer usable area (width×depth) mm 612×612 Drawer dividers can be found under drawer cabinets
Weight of the complete workbench kg 175 No. 96 0250 − 96 0360 as sets and under
No. 96 0490 − 96 0700 as individual parts.
Workbench 2000 mm long, worktop depth 800 mm

Version: With 1 drawer unit 717 mm wide (36×36 E) and
1 drawer unit 565 mm wide (27×36 E).
27 E
565 mm
36 E
717 mm
Workbench with 1 unit 27×36 E
97 0610 2113,70
and 1 unit 36×36 E
Worktop (L×D×thickness) mm 2000×800×50 Drawer dividers can be found under drawer cabinets
No. 96 0190 − 96 0360 as sets and under
Wide drawer unit (W×D×H) mm 717×725×800 No. 96 0490 − 96 0700 as individual parts.
Usable area of wide drawer (W×D) mm 612×612
Narrow drawer unit (W×D×H) mm 565×725×800
Usable area of narrow drawer (W×D) mm 459×612
Weight of the complete workbench kg 270
97
For accessories see No. 96 0190 − 96 0700 and 96 0900 − 96 1290
96 0670
96 1000 96 1010
96 0620
96 0630
96 1020 96 1030

Individual parts for tool cabinets to store clamping tools 36×36 E
Drawer inserts with tool sockets ▶ A ▶
Version: Sheet steel carrier with tool sockets of plastic.

(no special paint finishes available).
Application: For placing in sliding drawers No. 94 3011.
Note: VDI 20 sockets also suitable for Trumpf stamping punches.
HSK catalogue sizes are suitable also for tools with forms
A, C and other forms - see table.
for BT/SK and VDI For HSK
Drawer insert
97 0700 36×36 E 203,55 171,93 240,35 219,08 201,83 (325,45) (347,30) (258,75)
with tool sockets
L×W mm 598×598
Height (without tool sockets inserts) mm 100 145 100 100 100 20 20 20
Suitable also for tools with form HSK − − − − − − − −
Size = For tool shanks HSK40 HSK50 HSK63 HSK80 HSK100

Drawer insert
97 0700 36×36 E 225,98 203,55 201,83 165,60 169,63
with tool sockets
L×W mm 598×598
Height (without tool sockets inserts) mm 20 20 20 20 20
Suitable also for tools with form HSK A, C, E 40 A, C, E 50 A, C, E 63 A, C 80 A, C 100
B, D, F 50 B, D, F 63 B, D, F 80 B, D 100
Machine auxiliary cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark for tool arbors 36×36 E
100%
1.2
Version: With centre partition and ball-bearing mounted sliding doors,

lockable by slide handle with cylinder lock, anti-roll lip on 3-sides
and ribbed rubber coating. Fork lift / pallet truck base 100 mm high
No extend lock for drawers and pull-out shelves.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, doors signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.
Size = Usable height mm / model 900/A 900/B

NC machine auxiliary cabinet with
97 0750 36×36 E 1690,50 1423,70
sliding doors and drawers
Footprint (W×D) mm 1430×780 1430×780
Overall height mm 1120 1120 97 0750_900/A
Weight kg 205 175
97 Fitting with drawer inserts

When drawers No. 94 3011 are fitted with
drawer inserts No. 97 0700, different
usable heights are produced depending
on the combination of tool shank and
▶
drawer front height. ▶
You will find this information in the
table below. Usable height (N) for Usable height (N) for
BT/SK and VDI tools HSK and C tools
When fitted with ... SK40 SK50 VDI20 − 40 C4 − 5 C6 HSK40 − 100

Usable height (N) for 200 mm drawer front height 75 30 75 115 91 155

Tool cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark for storage of tool arbors 36×36E
100%
1.2
Version: Cabinet can be centrally locked using cylinder lock.

With anti-roll lip on 3 sides, black (H = 25 mm) with ribbed rubber covering.
Fork lift / pallet truck base 100 mm high.
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, drawers signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.
Note: For tool storage you need a drawer insert No. 970700.
Size = Usable height mm / model 1050/5A 1050/5B 1225/5 1225/6

Tool cabinet
97 0780 complete 36×36E 1123,55 1182,20 1227,05 1269,60
with drawers
Footprint (W×D) mm 717×725 717×725 717×725 717×725
Usable drawer area mm 612×612 612×612 612×612 612×612 Installation example:
With tool drawer insert No. 97 0700
Assembly and disassembly Measurement and management
A key concept for storage and management of tools − planned using Hoffmann Group storage units.
We will gladly prepare a quotation for a solution to meet your requirements.
Storage of tool arbors.
Assembly and
disassembly
97
Measurement
Management Issue Storage of tools for the tool arbors.

0.9 1000 kg 225°
Version: With mounting rails and shelves; the shelves are equipped
with BT / SK, HSK, C or VDI tool block inserts (see table).
The mounting rails can be adjusted to different heights
at 20 mm intervals. Maximum loading per mounting rail
pair 200 kg, per shelf 150 kg.
97 0820/0840 – With swing doors. Lockable by slide handle with
cylinder lock and 3-point locking.
Roller shutters
97 0830/0850 – With roller shutters of anodised aluminium profiles. of anodised
Easy to open and close as they run on slide rails. Lockable aluminium
by slide handle with cylinder lock. Double back wall profiles!
protects the roller shutters and prevents jamming.
97 0840/0850 – With shelves in the lower half of the cabinet.
The upper half of the cabinet is free for individual
configuration, mountings at 20 mm intervals.
Colour: Body and mounting rails light grey RAL 7035,
doors signal blue RAL 5005, powder-coated.
Roller shutters naturally anodised.
Optional accessories: Upper half
97 0840/0850 – For suitable storage shelves, drawers and accessories empty for
see No. 957000−957080. individual 97 0820
configuration.
Note:  The dimensions of the storage cabinets are
compatible with the system cabinets tibl e
mpa
No. 95 6000 − 95 6885 and can be combined ▶ A ▶
n s i o ns co
s
with them as required. Dime cabinet – 95 6885
 VDI 20 sockets also suitable for Trumpf stamping with 95 6000
punches. No.
 Cabinets that are fitted with ball-bearing drawer
runners, or that are subsequently fitted with them,
must be anchored at the base to prevent inadvertent 97 0830
tipping over.
 HSK tool block inserts are suitable also for tools with
forms A, C and other forms - see table for No. 97 0890.
97 0840
Size = For tool shanks (BT same as SK) SK40 SK50 VDI20 VDI30 VDI40 C4 C5 C6
Storage cabinet with swing doors
97 0820 complete with (1836,55) (1633,–) (2079,20) (1823,90) (1813,55) (2360,95) (2464,45) (2143,60)
tool block inserts
Storage cabinet with roller shutters
97 0830 complete with (2661,10) (2459,85) (2903,75) (2648,45) (2640,40) (3059,–) (3162,50) (2840,50)
tool block inserts
Footprint W×D mm 1000×550
Number of mounting rails No. 97 0880 per cabinet Pair 9
Number of shelves No. 97 0890 per cabinet pieces 9
Number of tool block inserts per cabinet pieces 171 81 360 207 171 90 90 54
Weight (97 0820) kg 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130
Weight (97 0830) kg 146 146 146 146 146 146 146 146
Size = For tool shanks (BT same as SK) HSK40 HSK50 HSK63 HSK80 HSK100
97 97 0820
complete with
tool block inserts
(1992,95) (1965,35) (1815,85) (1745,70) (1736,50)

97 0830 complete with (2818,65) (2789,90) (2643,85) (2571,40) (2562,20)
tool block inserts
Number of mounting rails No. 97 0880 per cabinet Pair 9
Number of tool block inserts per cabinet pieces 270 198 135 81 72
Weight (97 0820) kg 130 130 130 130 130
Weight (97 0830) kg 146 146 146 146 146
Continued ▶

▶ Continued
0.9 1000 kg 225°
97 0840 complete with (1262,70) (1164,95) (1442,10) (1273,05) (1269,60) (1606,55) (1676,70) (1462,80)
tool block inserts
97 0850 complete with (2094,15) (1971,10) (2268,95) (2096,45) (2091,85) (2304,60) (2367,85) (2159,70)
tool block inserts
Number of mounting rails No. 97 0880
per cabinet Pair 2
Number of tool block inserts per cabinet pieces 114 54 240 138 114 60 60 36
Weight (97 0840) kg 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
Weight (97 0850) kg 126 126 126 126 126 126 126 126
97 0840 complete with (1388,05) (1368,50) (1270,75) (1219,–) (1214,40)
tool block inserts
97 0850 complete with (2212,60) (2193,05) (2094,15) (2045,85) (2040,10)
tool block inserts
Number of mounting rails No. 97 0880
per cabinet Pair 2
Number of tool block inserts per cabinet pieces 180 132 90 54 48
Weight (97 0840) kg 110 110 110 110 110
Weight (97 0850) kg 126 126 126 126 126
Mounting rails and shelves

Suitable for: The mounting rails and shelves (No. 970880 / 970890) can be fitted
in cabinets No. 970820 − 970850 as well as in all system cabinets
No. 95 6000 − 95 6790 size 1000 and 2000.
Version: For insertion into the side slots on the cabinet, sloping approx. 20°
forward, for holding a maximum of 3 shelves No. 970890.
Maximum loading per pair of tool block insert rails 200 kg.
Size = Length mm 450 97 0880

Mounting rails
97 0880 Pair (28,41)
for shelves
Version: The shelves are screwed to the mounting rails No. 970880, using
the supplied blind nuts. Maximum 3 shelves per mounting rail pair.
Maximum loading per shelf 150 kg. ▶ A ▶
Note: VDI 20 sockets also suitable for Trumpf stamping punches. HSK tool block
inserts are suitable also for tools with forms A, C and other forms - see table.
97 0890_SK50
97
Shelf with
97 0890 (128,80) (105,11) (160,43) (128,80) (128,23) (193,20) (205,28) (168,48)
tool socket inserts
W×D×H mm 988×150×50
Shelf with
97 0890 (149,50) (146,05) (128,23) (118,45) (117,30)
tool socket inserts
W×D×H mm 988×150×50
Suitable also for tools with form HSK A, C, E 40, A, C, E 50, A, C, E 63, A, C 80, A, C 100
B, D, F 50 B, D, F 63 B, D, F 80 B, D 100

Tool carriers with mounting holes
A Securing hole
Version: Impact-resistant black plastic base body with sockets for tools.
Resistant to oil, grease, petrol etc. Tool socket
Dimensions 240×120×130 mm (L×W×H), load capacity 20 kg.
 For the easy transport of multiple tools by hand, by means
of edge grips suitable for handling on both sides of the carrier.
 Can be placed on a tool cabinet, in the pre-setting area
or on a machine table. Multiple tool carriers can be linked
together by a tongue and groove type arrangement.
All carriers are supplied with a securing hole.
(A single bolt is sufficient for multiple linked carriers). Bracket
 For insertion into holding devices, e.g. in tool trolleys for linking
or cabinets and for suspension from aluminium profile multiple carriers
rails (see No. 970950). These profile rails are suitable for Edge grips
mounting on walls, cabinets etc, or incorporating into for easy Profile rail
transport No. 970950
self-built structures as required.
Application: For suspension in tool trolleys No. 970940,
carrying rails No. 970180, profile rails No. 970950 and
storage cabinets No. 970960 / 970970.
Size = For tool tapers SK40 SK50 VDI30 VDI40 C4 C5

97 0910 Tool carrier 23,69 23,69 23,69 23,69 23,69 27,60
Suitable also for tool block inserts Size − − Tr28, MT4 Tr40, MT5 Tr25, VDI 25 −
Number of sockets pieces 3 2 5 3 5 3
Axial spacing (A) mm 70 120 51 70 51 70
Size = For tool tapers C6 HSK40 HSK50 HSK63 HSK80 HSK100

97 0910 Tool carrier 27,60 27,03 27,03 27,03 27,03 27,03
Suitable also for tool block inserts Size − − − − − −
Number of sockets pieces 3 5 3 3 2 2
Axial spacing (A) mm 70 51 70 70 120 120
Marking pin set 50 pieces

Suitable for: Tool carrier No. 970910.
Application: For greater safety and quicker work. The colour marking
identifies e. g. approved tools or those requiring regrinding.
Size = Colour code R G

97 0920 Marking pin set, 50 pieces 5,18 5,18
Colour red green
TULMOBIL tool trolley S1

Version: Made of round steel tubes, screwed to perforated profile frames;
with 2 fixed wheels and 2 castors (1 braked), and 4 safety handles
of red plastic. The cart is fitted with 4 aluminium profile rails (for
supporting 8 tool carriers No. 970910) and a sheet steel worktop
with ribbed rubber covering.
Colour: Violet blue RAL 5000. (No special paint finishes available).
Optional accessories: For TUL tool carriers see No. 970910 (not supplied).
•• • •
Tool trolley S1 with profile rails
97 0940 603,75 2
(without tool carriers) 1
1 Tray
Maximum number of tool carriers pieces 8
Length×width×height mm 620×590×940 2 Safety
•
handles
Load capacity kg 500
97 Weight kg 44 3 TUL
•
tool carrier
Profile rails for supporting tool carriers No. 970910 4 Aluminium
Version: Extruded hollow section of distortion-free aluminium. profile rail
With fastening holes. The profile rails are shaped so the
sides of tool carriers can be hung from them.
Application: For a self-construction of transport and storage equipment
to mount tool carriers on it. The rails can be bolted e. g. to walls
and tool cabinets. Profile rails are not suitable for No. 970940.
Optional accessories: For TUL tool carriers see No. 970910 (not supplied).
• •
Assembly example
Size = Length mm 480 960 1920
4
Profile rail 3
97 0950 24,50 41,86 75,67
(without tool carrier)
Appropriate number of tool carriers pieces 2 4 8
⌀ of the fastening hole mm 9 9 9
Minimum vertical spacing for
multiple carriers mm 220 220 220

Storage cabinets TUL system with TÜV / GS kitemark 550 mm deep
0.9 1000 kg 225°
Version: Fitted with profile rails for holding tool carriers No. 970910.
The spacing of the profile rails can be changed to different
heights at 20 mm intervals.
Size 4 – With 4 profile rails for a maximum of 16 tool carriers No. 970910
(4 per profile rail) in the bottom half of the cabinet. The upper
half of the cabinet is free for individual configuration, mountings
at 20 mm intervals. For suitable storage shelves, drawers and
accessories see No. 957000−957080.
Size 8 – With 8 profile rails for a maximum of 32 tool carriers No. 970910
(4 per profile rail).
97 0960 – With swing doors. Lockable by slide handle with cylinder lock
and 3-point locking.
97 0970 – With roller shutters of anodised aluminium profiles.
Easy to open and close as they run on slide rails. Upper half
Lockable with cylinder lock. Double back wall protects empty for
individual
the roller shutters and prevents jamming. configuration
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, doors signal blue RAL 5005
powder-coated. Roller shutters naturally anodised. 97 0960_8
Profile rails always anthracite grey RAL 7016.
Note:  The dimensions of the storage cabinets are
compatible with the system cabinets No. 95 6000 −
95 6885 and can be combined with them as required.
 Cabinets that are fitted with ball-bearing drawer runners, le
or that are subsequently fitted with them, must be patib
anchored at the base to prevent inadvertent tipping s i o n s com
n s
over. Dime cabinet – 95 6885
Roller shutters with 95 6000
of anodised No.
aluminium
profiles!
97 0960_4
Size = Number of profile rails pieces 4 8

Storage cabinet
97 0960 with swing doors (738,30) (1003,95)
(without tool carriers)
Storage cabinet
97 0970 with roller shutters (1539,85) (1806,65)
(without tool carriers)
Footprint (width×depth) mm 1000×550 1000×550
Weight (97 0960) kg 83 106
Weight (97 0970) kg 102 125
97 0970_8

Everything from a single source.
To create this ideal situation, your partners in the Hoffmann Group offer individual proposals −
customer-specific and based on expert knowledge. Just ask us !
▶ Advice ▶ Planning ▶ Offer ▶ Delivery ▶ Assembly
97
We will plan your workshop using CAD tools

− tailored to your personal requirements.

Environmental technology
98

Range overview − Environmental technology
Safety cabinets / chemicals storage cabinets:

The handling and storage of hazardous materials always presents a very high hazard potential.
For protection of people and the environment, special statutory requirements must be satisfied
where companies work with hazardous materials.
Cleaning:
Is a significant part of the environmental technology. If despite all precautions spillage occurs,
appropriate means must be available to contain it and clear it up.
Our products are best suited to provision of cleaning products, cleaning equipment and personal
protective work wear, and also provide a place for storage of waste pending proper disposal.
Type Variants Page
Oil cabinet
Chemicals storage 194 −
cabinet 197
Safety cabinet
Janitor's cabinet 198 −

Cleaning point 200
Recycling separation
201
systems
98

Oil cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark
200 kg 1000 kg
1.2
Version: Sturdy sheet metal construction with 2 reinforced doors, can be locked by slide handle
and cylinder lock. The cabinet body is equipped with an anti-tilt device. The anti-tilt
device means that only 1 drawer can be open at a time; the cabinet is generally secured
against tipping. Drawer and pull-out shelf runner mountings at 25 mm intervals on both
sides.
98 0020 – Oil cabinet, equipped with oil containers of plastic (No. 98 0060).
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, doors signal blue RAL 5005,
powder-coated.
Note: The oil containers can be removed and the cabinet used for other purposes.
Fitments as required: For suitable drawers see No. 94 3011 / 3021,
suitable pull-out shelves see No. 94 2991 / 2996 and No. 98 0051.
Size = Overall height mm / number of oil containers 1450/8 1450/14 1450/20 1450 98 0020
Oil cabinet with
98 0020 1789,40 2386,25 (2938,25) —
plastic containers
98 0030 Oil cabinet empty — — — 649,75
Fittings: Number of pull-out shelves No. 98 0051 pieces 2 3 4 −
Fittings: Number of oil containers (10 litres) pieces − 10 20 −
Fittings: Number of oil containers (25 litres) pieces 8 4 − −
Fittings: Number of oil trays pieces 1 1 1 −
Internal height (usable height) mm 1350
W×D×H mm 717×748×1450
Weight kg 123 136 149 77
Pull-out shelves for oil cabinets

Version: Robust, sheet metal construction with ball-bearing drawer runners.
Cut out in front for tap spout. Can be pulled out 100 %.
Application: For holding 4 containers each with 25 litres or 5 containers each
with 10 litres.
98 0051
Double extension runner 100 % pull-out
98 0051 pull-out shelf for oil cabinets 151,80 load capacity up to 200 kg,
(without containers) usable area (W×D) 612×459 mm
Drip tray of sheet steel

Version: Oil-tight welded oil tray of sheet steel for positioning on support rails.
Capacity 40 litres.
Oil tray
98 0055 55,43
with support rails
98 0055
W×D×H mm 655×625×105
Oil containers
Version: Plastic oil container of polyethylene (PE−HD).
Filler opening with vent and removable strainer, 1/2″ brass tap spout.
Oil level visible through transparent container body.
Suitable for storage of acid-free liquids, oils and fats with a flashpoint
above 55 °C up to a maximum ambient temperature of 40 °C.
98
Size = Capacity litres 10L 25L
98 0060 Plastic oil container 87,63 101,43 98 0060
W×D×H mm 120×440×270 150×440×490
Continued ▶

Oil cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark
▶ Continued
Containment base
3,0
Version: Welded steel base with drip tray and steel grating (mesh 25×76 mm).
Welded drip tray is oil-tight and water-tight.
Steel grating is galvanised.
Note: Complies with the specification of the Water Management Act WHG § 19.
724
302
98 0071 Containment base (488,75)

435
W×D×H mm 724×1164×302 1164
Volume of drip tray l 50 81
Weight kg 44
Chemicals storage cabinets with TÜV / GS kitemark 550 mm deep
100 kg
0.9 1000 kg 225°
Standard: Declaration of conformity (UHP) according to the Building

Regulations List number 15.22 DIBT to the StawaR (Steel
Tray Regulations).
Version: Doors have ventilation slots and can be locked using a slide
handle and cylinder lock.
Galvanised drip tray to StawaR with brazed leak-proof
joints. Loading capacity 100 kg.
Height adjustment at 20 mm intervals. Drip catch volume
22 litres (to 20 mm below the lip of the tray).
Application: Secure storage in accordance with regulations of chemicals
used in the workplace, which are harmful to vegetation,
poisonous, and polluting to ground-water.
Note: Not suitable for storage of flammable liquids!
Approval to WHG § 19 and StawaR.
Size = Height mm / number of drip trays 1000/2 2000/4

Chemicals storage cabinet with
98 0090 (518,65) (834,90)
Chemicals storage cabinet with
98 0092 (573,85) (961,40)
W×D×H mm 1000×550×1000 1000×550×2000
Number of drip trays No. 98 0095 pieces 2 4
Weight kg 72 135
98 0092
Drip tray of galvanised sheet metal 100 kg
Standard: Approved to WHG § 19 / StawaR.

Suitable for: System cabinets size 1000 / 2000 and
chemicals storage cabinets No. 98 0090, 98 0092.
Version: Galvanised drip tray, leak-proof welded.
Supplied with: Can be fitted at any height at 20 mm intervals.
Specially developed mounting rails are supplied.
Size = Cabinet / compartment width mm 1000 98

98 0095 Drip tray (101,43)
W×D×H mm 988×453×70
Drip catch volume litres 20
98 0095

Technical ventilation
▶ Continued
Checklist for the necessity of technical ventilation of safety cabinets.
1. The TRbF 20 (Technical Regulations for flammable liquids) Appendix L (storage arrangements in working areas − safety cabinets) permits
the operation of safety cabinets without continuous effective technical ventilation.
If however continuous technical ventilation is not provided, alternative effective measures must be taken which offer comparable
protection against explosions.
2. When deciding for or against technical ventilation, consider whether other regulations may make technical ventilation obligatory.
If for instance irritant or poisonous substances are stored, or the smell might be stressful to those handling the materials, as a rule
technical ventilation of the safety cabinet should be provided (see the respective Health and Safety at Work regulations).
3. The circulation filter attachment No. 98 1100 allows technical ventilation of safety cabinets without the expense of air extraction
systems whilst avoiding the need for Ex-protective measures.
NOTE: Applies only for hydrocarbons (flammable liquids).
Note: All data relate only to Germany,

make no claims to completeness and are without obligation.
You have a general duty of compliance with the regulations applicable in your country.
Consult the relevant authorities fro further information.
What is possible: without technical technical ventilation Air circulation

ventilation with discharge of filter attach-
exhaust air ment
to the outside
Do you store exclusively flammable

liquids?
if yes x x x
if no x
Is it ensured that flammable liquids are
stored only in tightly sealed containers?
if yes x x x
if no x x
If as well as flammable liquids, will other
hazardous substances also be stored,
if yes x x x
which develop hazardous gases? if no
x
Can you guarantee maintenance of the

Ex-zones around the safety cabinet at
if yes x x x
all times?
Ex-zone 2 to be maintained around
if no x x
the cabinet:
− For a workspace without technical
ventilation: 2.5 m around the cabinet
up to a height of 0.5 m above floor
level.
− For a workspace with ventilation
giving not less than 5 changes an
hour: at a distance 1 m in front of the
cabinet, 0.5 m to the side of it and to
a height of 0.3 m above floor level.
Is an air exhaustion system already

available to which the new safety
if yes x
cabinets could be connected?
Would it provide sufficiently
if no x
98 dimensioned exhaust air flows?
Should your cabinet be flexibly free-

standing within your company?
if yes x x
if no x x x

Automatic door closer TSA / AGT
You open the right the left hand and with one hand 60 seconds after the which triggers the the doors close
hand door . . . door opens move you adjust doors were opened, release of the door automatically.
automatically . . . both doors. a clockwork timer restraint . . .
releases a pre-loaded
pin . . .
Safety cabinets Pegasus Type 90 with TÜV / GS kitemark

▶ Continued
Standard: DIN EN 14470-1, type tested (fire chamber tested),
90 minutes fire resistant
(to the highest fire protection class of TRbF 20 Appendix L).
Version: Cabinet housing of sheet steel, interior with chemically resistant surface.
With AGT (Asynchronously Linked Door Drive), TSA (Automatic Door Closer)
and integral door position detector.
One hand movement opens both doors.
 Mountings for shelves at 32 mm intervals.
 With earthing and exhaust air connection (75 mm flange).
 4 adjustment screws for alignment and compensation of
slight unevennesses in the floor.
 Lockable with profile half-cylinder, can be integrated into the company's
locking system. Not compatible with the Hoffmann locking system.
Size 600 – 1 door type.
Size 1200 – 2 door type.
Colour: Cabinet housing and doors optionally light grey RAL 7035 or
signal yellow RAL 1004 powder-coated.
Application: For secure storage of hazardous substances in working area in
accordance with regulations.
Supplied with: Cabinet with 3 storage shelves, perforated panel insert and floor-level
drip tray, plastic-coated.
1×log book, 1×emergency kit (fine fibre absorbent and gloves),
1×explosion-proof guidance document.
iage
Size = Cabinet width mm 600 1200 Carr
Safety cabinet
(2059,65) (2658,80) ext a
r
98 1000 Pegasus type 90
W×D×H (external) mm 600×615×1968 1200×615×1968
W×D×H (internal) mm 450×520×1740 1050×520×1740
Number of storage shelves pieces 3 3
Perforated panel insert pieces 1 1
Floor-level drip tray pieces 1 1
Volume of floor-level drip tray litres 22 33
Weight kg 260 420
Circulation filter attachment for safety cabinets

Operating principle air
Version: Complete system with exhaust air motor, special activated carbon filter, circulation attachment:
exhaust air flow and filter monitoring. Casing of sheet steel.
Air intake from the Return feed of cleaned
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, working area. air directly into the working
lid carmine red RAL 3002 powder-coated. area.
Advantage:  No cost-intensive exhaust air ducting required.
 Easy and safe installation.
 Explosion hazard controls around the cabinet not required.
 High flexibility in the choice of equipment position.
 Active personnel protection due to reliable collection of vapours
hazardous to health and their retention in the system filter.
Filter saturation > 99.999 %.
 Whisper-quiet, only approx. 39 dB (A).
Application: For reliable technical ventilation of safety cabinets in working areas
in accordance with the requirements of TRb F20 Appendix L.
Filter is suitable only for solvent vapours (hydrocarbons),
not for corrosive aggressive materials such as citric acid.
Note: We recommend the filter is changed and the contaminated filter disposed
of annually by the asecos service engineer (at normal toxicity levels).
98
Circulation filter attachment
98 1100 (1550,20)
for safety cabinets
Price in brackets ( ) = Delivery ex works, incl. packing, excl. carriage.

Janitor's cabinets 550 mm deep with TÜV / GS kitemark 2000 mm high
0.9 1000 kg 225°
Version: Body and doors of 0.9 mm sheet steel, mountings at 20 mm

intervals for galvanised storage shelves.
Doors reinforced on the inside, can be locked with push handle
with cylinder lock.
Pattern of holes in the janitor's cabinet casing for attaching
hooks and brackets No. 96 1325 − 961430.
Note: The dimensions of the janitor's cabinet are compatible with

the system cabinets No. 95 6000 − 95 6860 and can be
combined with them as required.
Janitor's cabinets 2000 mm high / 750 mm wide
Size = Width mm / model 750/K 750/P

Janitor's cabinet with
98 7000 (533,60) (497,95)
98 7005 (614,10) (578,45)
W×D×H mm 750×550×2000
98 7000_750/P
Number of hooks pieces 3 3
Number of device brackets pieces 3 3
Weight kg 78 72
Size = Width mm / model 1000/P 1000/P1

98 7010 (591,10) (695,75)
98 7015 (727,95) (832,60)
W×D×H mm 1000×550×2000
98 7015_1000/P1
Number of hooks pieces 3 1
Number of device brackets pieces 3 2
Weight kg 84 90
Individual customer solutions

95 6435_1500/FS
98 7000_750/K
98
98 7000_750/P
98 7050
Continued ▶

Janitor's cabinets 550 mm deep with TÜV / GS kitemark 2000 mm high
▶ Continued
i 0.9 1000 kg 225°

Note: The dimensions of the janitor's cabinet are compatible with the system cabinets
No. 95 6000 − 95 6860 and can be combined with them as required.
Size = Width mm / model 1000/P2

98 7010 (683,10)
98 7015 (817,65)
W×D×H mm 1000×550×2000
Number of hooks pieces 3
Number of device brackets pieces 6
Weight kg 90
Pull-out perforated panel with Perforated panel with holes in 20 mm Application example: Application example:
hooks and device brackets. grid for hooks and device brackets. Storage of a wet / dry vacuum Ways to store cleaning equipment
cleaner and its accessories. using device brackets.
Recycling collection cabinet with TÜV / GS kitemark
0.9 225°
Version: Intake flap of anodised aluminium. Internally fitted with central frame
for recycling collection bin (made of unbreakable polythene).
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, door signal blue RAL 5005 powder-coated.
Supplied with: Set of labels (6 pieces) for the intake flap, with the following symbols:
Metal: Plastic: Glass:
Other waste: Paper: Biodegradable waste:

tibl e
mpa
n s i o ns co
s
Dime cabinet – 95 6885
98 7050 Recycling
collection cabinet
(294,40)
with 95 6000
No.
98
Cabinet width×depth×height mm 500×550×1000
Deposit flap
Materials bin width×depth×height mm 370×370×610 of anodised
Dust collection volume litres 72 aluminium
Intake opening (W×H) mm 245×115
Weight kg 29

Cleaning point
Version: Distortion-free body of sheet steel.
Centre partition with square holes 9×9 mm
on a 37 mm grid.
Size M – 4 castors (⌀ 100 mm) with parking brake and
2 large push handles ensure stability and safe
handling in the workshop.
Colour: Two-tone powder-coated, silver combined
with steel blue RAL 5011.
Size = Type S M
98 7100 Cleaning point, empty (378,35) (562,35)
W×D×H mm 725×725×1700 725×725×1850
Effective width mm 720 720
330 160
Weight kg 46 46
Centre partition 98 7100_S
Recycling collection bin, 45 litre volume

Version: Of galvanised sheet steel with removable upper part for ease of emptying.
Self-closing swing flap prevents odours escaping.
Colour: Silver powder-coated.
Size = Volume litres 45

98 7110 Recycling collection bin, 45 litre (125,35)
W×D×H mm 330×310×640
Support rail for paper dispenser

Note:
Application: For supporting paper dispenser No. 08 9165. See main catalogue,
Group 089
for paper dispensers.
Support rail without

98 7115 Support rail (18,40) paper dispenser.
Cleaning point with recycling collection bin and paper dispenser
Size = Type S M
98 7120 Cleaning point, equipped (676,20) (848,70)
W×D×H mm 725×725×1700 725×725×1850
Weight kg 60 60
Contents: 1×No. 98 7100_S 1×No. 98 7100_M
2×No. 98 7110_45 2×No. 98 7110_45
1×No. 98 7150 1×No. 98 7150
1×No. 08 9165 1×No. 08 9165
98
98 7120_M

Recycling collection bins with TÜV / GS kitemark
Version: 75 litre recycling collection bins with galvanised inner bin
(the bottom of which is leak-proof for liquids) and swing 98 7155_5005
door (with magnet retainer and square key lock). Deposit flap with
fusible plug.
98 7150 – With self-closing deposit flap, contains fire and odours.
98 7155 – With permanently open deposit flap, fitted with fusible
plug. Closes automatically in the event of fire!
Colour: Body light grey RAL 7035, deposit flap optionally signal
blue RAL 5005, anthracite RAL 7016 or signal yellow
RAL 1003 powder-coated.
Inspection:  Proven self-extinguishing to RW / TÜV series M41.
 Incombustible to DIN 41 class A1.
_5005 _7016 _1003
Size = Colour of deposit flap RAL 5005 7016 1003

Galvanised
Recycling collection bin 75 litre inner bin
98 7150 with self-closing (308,20) (308,20) (308,20)
deposit flap
Recycling collection bin 75 litre
98 7155 with permanently open (332,35) (332,35) (332,35)
deposit flap
W×D×H mm 400×380×1000
Capacity litres 75
98 7150_5005
Mobility trolley for recycling collection bins

Version: Steel-framed mobility trolley with fixed wheels and
2 castors (with parking brake) to take up to
4 recycling collection bins.
98 7165 Mobility trolley (263,35)

W×D×H mm 1205×388×800
Self-adhesive pictograms
98 7170 Pictogram set (21,74)
Recycling collection bin set
Size = Colour of deposit flap RAL 5005 7016 1003

Recycling collection bin set with
98 7180 self-closing (1447,85) (1447,85) (1447,85)
deposit flap
Recycling collection bin set with
98 7185 permanently open
deposit flap
(1539,85) (1539,85) (1539,85) 98
Contents: 4×No. 98 7180 / 7185 recycling collection bins
1×No. 98 7165 mobility trolley
1×No. 98 7170 pictogram set Optionally fitted with
4× No. 987180 or
4× No. 987185.

Factory equipment projects from the Hoffmann Group
Last but not least.

The best proof for professional workplace projects are satisfied customers in all sectors.
Take advantage of these positive experiences:
 Individual factory equipment solutions.
 Highest quality for everyday demanding work.
 Reliable processing − from consultancy to installation.
Automobile industry: Stability


Aerospace industry: Safety concepts


Chemical and medical technology: Flexibility and individuality

Consumer goods and luxury goods: Ergonomics
Functional and elegant design for luxury pens at Montblanc.
Ergonomic workplace concept for the

precise and delicate world of watch making
at Chronoswiss watchmakers.

Schools and institutions: An orientation towards education


Classic machining: Overview and individuality


Perfect project management from A to Z
Are you looking for a workplace solution individually

tailored to the needs of your business?
We offer you a professional workplace concept from a
single source. The following pages show the individual 1. Advice
steps through implementation of a major project at MTU
Aero Engines Polska.
2. Planning
3. Offer
4. Delivery
5. Assembly
1. Advice:

2. Planning and 3. Offer:

Your individual workplace equipment
4. Delivery:

5. Assembly:

Quality that's all of a piece
GARANT factory equipment from the Hoffmann Group has been developed for the most demanding applications:
High quality materials and the latest technology offer you quality that you can rely on for many years to come.
Get to know our high quality requirements using the example of a workbench production from machining through to packing.

Changed catalogue numbers
The following number listing gives an overview of catalogue numbers changed

from catalogue 39 to catalogue 40. Validity from 01.08.2009 to 31.07.2010.
Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue Catalogue

issue 39 issue 40 issue 39 issue 40 issue 39 issue 40
old new old new old new
939455 933742 956675 750/P 987005 750/P 958660 980055
939605 933832 956885 987050 958670 980060
941560 933732 957015 1000 980095 1000 958680 981000
941570 933734 958631 980020 958685 981100
956670 750/K 987000 750/K 958641 1450 980030 1450 958695 980090
956670 750/P 987000 750/P 958651 980051 958696 980092
Sketches / notes

Hoffmann Group colours for factory equipment
Choice of many colours without surcharge !
Scratch-resistant and colour-fast powder-coatings for sustained quality.
These 10 colours are supplied without surcharge.
Alternative colours can be supplied at extra cost.
RAL 9002 7035 7032 7016 6011 5018 5012 5007 5005 3003
Body RAL Fronts RAL Other

colour combinations
7035 5018 7016 5005 not possible.
Please state the respective RAL number when ordering.

in
If no RAL number is stated, we will supply the standard paint finish olours cratch
(see product description). All 10 c r coating − s sion,
powde t, good adhe g.
Longer delivery times have to be anticipated for non-stock paint finishes.
resistan edge roundin
cutting
RAL 9002* RAL 7035* RAL 7032* RAL 7016* RAL 6011*
grey-white light grey flint grey anthracite grey reseda green
RAL 5018* RAL 5012* RAL 5007* RAL 5005* RAL 3003*
turquoise blue light blue brilliant blue signal blue ruby red
Other RAL colours are available with surcharge (on request, depending on quantity).
*) For printing reasons, the colour table shown here is suitable only for general identification of colours;
precise colour information can be found on any RAL colour card.

Catalog 40 Vol2 Metaro

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Catalog 40 Vol2 Metaro

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Număr client:

Comenzi Online www.metaro.ro

disponibili Consultanţă tehnică generală +4 0213.083.477

Metaro Industrial S.R.L.

Head office: BUCUREŞTI

Centru Logistic: ARAD

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 2 25.05.2009 08:32:02

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 3 25.05.2009 08:32:03

de calitate La dispoziţia dumneavoastră prin cea mai puternică reţea de

Catalog actualizat anual

Catalog de echipamente şi mobilier industrial Europas führender Systempartner für Qualitätswerkzeuge

pentru ateliere; bancuri de lucru, dulapuri,

■ Zerspanungstechnik ■ Schleif- und Trenntechnik

tehnici de depozitare NC şi accesorii.

Catalog separat disponibil atât tipărit cât şi

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 4 25.05.2009 08:32:30

Partenerul dumneavoastră de încredere în Date de contact

Specialiştii în amenajări oferă soluţii şi asigură consultaţă pentru dotarea atelierelor.

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 5 25.05.2009 08:32:43

Calitate premium, funcţionalitate şi fiabilitate constante

bescheinigt hiermit, dass das Unternehmen

Standort: D-81241 München

ISO 9001: 2000

München, 2008-03-17 QMS-TGA-ZM-07-92

Tehnica modernă de producţie Certificat de producător

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 6 25.05.2009 08:33:21

Garant Mobil ToolCar - design practic şi mobil

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 7 25.05.2009 08:33:37

Specialiştii în amenajări asigură

5. Montaj Economie de bani şi timp

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 8 25.05.2009 08:33:44

eForm: Protecţie şi individualitate pentru sculele dumneavoastră

Alegem din 8000 de modele În funcţie de necesităţile Imagine de ansamblu al

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 9 25.05.2009 08:34:05

1. Consultanţă Montarea asigurată de către specialiştii Hoffmann Group

4. Livrare Acoperire prin pulbere în mai

Cele mai bune materiale şi cea

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 10 25.05.2009 08:34:12

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 11 25.05.2009 08:34:26

Livrare express a articolelor solicitate.

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 12 25.05.2009 08:34:38

Soluţia potrivită de fiecare dată.

Întotdeuana bine informaţi.

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 13 25.05.2009 08:35:15

Identificare simplă şi rapidă în peste 200 de pagini.

Construcţie din tablă de

Capacitatea de încărcare a 1000 kg Capacitate de încarcare a

100% ˡ Elemente de blocare a

Protecţie pentru obiecte şi

Ergonomie Împotriva oboselii Împotriva alunecării Izolaţie

Program rapid de livrare - express

Culorile RAL pentru acoperire cu pulbere CORP RAL Suprafaţă frontalaLieferbare

Combinaţii de culori disponibile.

La pagina 224 puteţi găsi întreaga gamă de culori

Vă rugăm luaţi în considerare:

Preţurile din paranteza () înseamnă: termen de livrare condiţionat de furnizor (non-stoc)

Vorsatz_Kat_40_Band2_Metaro.indd 14 25.05.2009 08:35:19

91 91 6757_23 (Pagina 16)

91 9865 (Pagina 21)

91 9915_2000 (Pagina 23)

93 93 3712_240V (Pagina 65)

93 3712_240V/Luft (Pagina 65)

93 3740_S7T3 (Pagina 67)

93 3832_50 (Pagina 67 / 70)